Home

Beamer User Guide

1. Choosing This License or Another License o e e A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution How to Use This License 2 1 ee Derived Works That Are Not Replacements 0 000002 eee Important Recommendations II Building a Presentation 8 Creating Frames 10 11 8 1 The Frame Environment 2 0 20000 ee ee 8 2 Components oa Frame pub aa ere 8 2 1 The Headline and Footline e 822 The Sidebars gt ass Mond Is o A be oe eee 8 2 3 Navigation Bars moore E ee ee a 8 2 4 The Navigation Symbols 0 2 0 000000 eee ee ee A E RN 8 20 The Frame Title 20 02 DO a amp A E AAA eee ee 82 1 The Background 2 Ss mae AA E A dd tO a a a a aA 8 3 Frame and Mardin Sizes LA AO A a e ee he 8 4 Restricting the Slides of a Frame 0 0 2 eee ee Creating Overlays 9 1 The Pause Commands o e woe ed 8405 bp ee LR a l o 9 2 The General Concept of Overlay Specifications 0 0 2 00 02 ee ee ee ee 9 3 Commands with Overlay Specifications 2 a 9 4 Environments with Overlay Specifications sooo ee 9 5 Dynamically Changing Text or Images ooa ee ee 9 6 Advanced Overlay Specifications a 9 6 1 Making Commands and Environments Overlay Specification Aware 9 6 2 Mode Specifications 2 2 2 aaa e a a a a a e S eera na i a 9 6 3 Action Spe cificationszs mae A D4 WA A EE 9 6 4 Inc
2. useoutertheme infolines Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem EURIA OINEAN A There is no largest prime number i Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 1 2 Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 2 2 162 This theme installs a headline showing the current section and the current subsection It installs a footline showing the author s name the institution the presentation s title the current date and a frame count This theme uses only little space The colors used in the headline and footline are drawn from palette primary palette secondary and primary tertiary see Section 17 for details on how to change these useoutertheme options miniframes Example Results Results g sn of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem EURI O NA ISandhal There is no largest prime number i Proof Department of Mathemati
3. 25 1 3 Contributing Since this package is about internationalization it needs input from people who can contribute translations to their native tongue In order to submit dictionaries please do the following 1 Read this manual and make sure you understand the basic concepts 2 Find out whether the translations should be part of the TRANSLATOR package or part of another package In general submit translations and new keys to the TRANSLATOR project only if they are of public interest For example translations for keys like figure should be send to the TRANSLATOR project Translations for keys that are part of a special package should be send to the author of the package 3 If you are sure that the translations should go to the TRANSLATOR package create a dictionary of the correct name see this documentation once more 4 Finally submit the dictionary using the correct forum on the development site 25 1 4 Installation This package is distributed with BEAMER Typically if you have BEAMER installed the package will already be installed on your system If not look in Section 2 for instructions on how to install BEAMER 25 2 Basic Concepts 25 2 1 Keys The main purpose of the TRANSLATOR package is to provide translations for keys Typically a key is an English word like Figure and the German translation for this key is Abbildung 232 For a concept like figures a single key typically is not enough 1 It i
4. This is also too small Requires that the package extsize is installed documentclass 10pt beamer If you really need to fit more onto each frame use this option Works without extsize documentclass smaller beamer Same as the 10pt option documentclass 11pt beamer The default font size You need not specify this option documentclass 12pt beamer Makes all fonts a little bigger which makes the text more readable The downside is that less fits onto each frame documentclass bigger beamer Same as the 12pt option 194 documentclass 14pt beamer Makes all fonts somewhat bigger Requires extsize to be installed documentclass 17pt beamer This is about the default size of PowerPoint and OpenOffice org Impress Requires extsize to be installed documentclass 20pt beamer This is really huge Requires extsize to be installed 18 2 2 Choosing a Font Family By default BEAMER uses the Computer Modern fonts To change this you can use one of the prepared packages of I4T X s font mechanism For example to change to Times Helvetica simply add usepackage mathptmx usepackage helvet in your preamble Note that if you do not use the serif font theme Helvetica not Times will be selected as the text font There may be many other fonts available on your installation Typically at least some of the following packages should be available arev avant bookman chancery charter euler
5. 14 3 Slide Transitions PDF in general and the Acrobat Reader in particular offer a standardized way of defining slide transitions Such a transition is a visual effect that is used to show the slide For example instead of just showing the slide immediately whatever was shown before might slowly dissolve and be replaced by the slide s content There are a number of commands that can be used to specify what effect should be used when the current slide is presented Consider the following example frame pgfuseimage youngboy frame transdissolve pgfuseimage man 140 ARTICLE The command transdissolve causes the slide of the second frame to be shown in a dissolved way Note that the dissolving is a property of the second frame not of the first one We could have placed the command anywhere on the frame The transition commands are overlay specification aware We could collapse the two frames into one frame like this begin frame only lt 1 gt pgfuseimage youngboy only lt 2 gt pgfuseimage man transdissolve lt 2 gt end frame This states that on the first slide the young boy should be shown on the second slide the old man should be shown and when the second slide is shown it should be shown in a dissolved way In the following the different commands for creating transitional effects are listed All of them take an optional argument that may contain a list of key value pairs
6. 34 Keep it simple Typically your audience will see a slide for less than 50 seconds They will not have the time to puzzle through long sentences or complicated formulas Lance Fortnow a professor of computer science claims PowerPoint users give better talks His reason Since PowerPoint is so bad at typesetting math they use less math making their talks easier to understand There is some truth in this in our opinion The great math typesetting capabilities of T X can easily lure you into using many more formulas than is necessary and healthy For example instead of writing Since a 0 1 x E y lt oo we have use Since y has only finitely many prefixes we have You will be surprised how much mathematical text can be reformulated in plain English or can just be omitted Naturally if some mathematical argument is what you are actually talking about as in a math lecture make use of T X s typesetting capabilities to your heart s content Structuring a Frame Use block environments like block theorem proof example and so on Prefer enumerations and itemize environments over plain text Use description when you define several things Do not use more than two levels of subitemizing BEAMER supports three levels but you should not use that third level Mostly you should not even use the second one Use good graphics instead Do not create endless itemize or enumerate lists Do not uncover
7. Number Number 2 The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria a 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme installs nearly transparent backgrounds for both block titles and block bodies This theme is much less aggressive than the orchid theme The background colors are derived from the foreground of the structure BEAMER color 17 1 4 Outer Color Themes An outer color theme changes the palette colors on which the colors used in the headline footline and sidebar are based by default Outer color themes normally do not change the color of inner elements except possibly for titlelike They happen to be sea animal names usecolortheme whale Example There ls No Largest Prime rc There ls No Largest Prime Number Number Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium
8. The TRANSLATOR package uses names for languages that are different from the names used by other packages like babel The reason for this is that the names used by babel are a bit of a mess so Till decided to clean things up for the TRANSLATOR package However mappings from babel names to TRANSLATOR names are provided The names used by the TRANSLATOR package are the English names commonly used for these languages Thus the name for the English language is English the name for German is German Variants of a language get their own name The British version of English is called BritishEnglish the US version is called AmericanEnglish For German there is the special problem of pre 1998 as opposed to the current not yet fixed spelling The language German reflects the current official spelling but German1997 refers to the spelling used in 1997 25 2 3 Language Paths When you request a translation for a key the TRANSLATOR package will try to provide the translation for the current language Examples of languages are German or English When the TRANSLATOR looks up the translation for the given key in the current language it may fail to find a translation In this case the TRANSLATOR will try a fallback strategy It keeps track of a language path and successively tries to find translations for each language on this path Language paths are not only useful for fallbacks They are also used for situations where a language is a variant of another
9. When using certain packages or classes together with the beamer class extra options or precautions may be necessary usepackage AlDraTex Graphics created using AlDraTex must be treated like verbatim text The reason is that DraTex fiddles with catcodes and spaces much like verbatim does So in order to insert a picture either add the fragile option to the frame or use the defverbatim command to create a box containing the picture usepackage alltt Text in an alltt environment must be treated like verbatim text So add the fragile option to frames containing this environment or use defverbatim usepackagefamsthm This package is automatically loaded since BEAMER uses it for typesetting theorems If you do not wish it to be loaded which can be necessary especially in article mode if the package is incompatible with the document class you can use the class option noamsthm to suppress its loading See Section 12 4 for more details usepackage french babel When using the french style certain features that clash with the functionality of the BEAMER class will be turned off For example enumerations are still produced the way the theme dictates not the way the french style does usepackage spanish babel PRESEN When using the spanish style certain features that clash with the functionality of the BEAMER class will TATION be turned off In particular the special behavior of the pointed brackets lt and gt is de
10. end somebeamerenvironment Beamer Template Color Font some beamer element Here you will find an explanation of the template color and or font some beamer element A BEAMER element is a concept that is explained in more detail in Section 16 Roughly speaking an element is a part of a presentation that is potentially typeset in some special way Examples of elements are frame titles the author s name or the footnote sign For most elements there exists a template see Section 16 once more and also a BEAMER color and a BEAMER font For each element it is indicated whether a template a BEAMER color and or a BEAMER font of the name some beamer element exist Typically all three exist and are employed together when the element needs to be typeset that is when the template is inserted the BEAMER color and font are installed first However sometimes templates do not have a color or font associated with them like parent templates Also there exist BEAMER colors and fonts that do not have an underlying template Using and changing templates is explained in Section 16 3 Here is the essence To change a template you can say setbeamertemplate some beamer element your definition for this template Unfortunately it is not quite trivial to come up with a good definition for some templates Fortunately there are often predefined options for a template These are indicated like this e square causes a small square to be used
11. llap includegraphics lt 3 gt third pdf end frame or like this begin frame frametitle The Three Process Stages includegraphics first pdf Xpause llap includegraphics second pdf Xpause llap includegraphics third pdf end frame A more convenient way is to use the multiinclude command see Section 14 1 3 for details 9 6 Advanced Overlay Specifications 9 6 1 Making Commands and Environments Overlay Specification Aware This section explains how to define new commands that are overlay specification aware Also it explains how to setup counters correctly that should be increased from frame to frame like equation numbering but not from slide to slide You may wish to skip this section unless you want to write your own extensions to the BEAMER class BEAMER extends the syntax of IAT X s standard command newcommand newcommand lt gt command name argument number default optional value text Declares the new command named command name The text should contain the body of this command and it may contain occurrences of parameters like number Here number may be between 1 and argument number 1 The additionally allowed argument is the overlay specification When command name is used it will scan as many as argument number arguments While scanning them it will look for an overlay specification which may be given between any two arguments before the first argument
12. o e e Assi Creating PD ES ui alata AA A a do a a din a os 4 3 2 Creating Postocrlpt ea a a id a Be A a a e goad 4 3 3 Ways of Improving Compilation Speed 000000002 eee 4 4 Step Four Create Frames c ewe a e e len i a a e a a a a E a e de a a aa A 4 5 Step Five Test Your Presentation e 4 6 Step Six Create a Handout soana aaa aaaea a ee 4 6 1 Creating the Handout us iddei aAA ee A Aaa ar a as 4 0 2 Printing the Handout i aa a a SA a aa Guidelines for Creating Presentations BL Structuring a Pr sentations is ee a A a E hd NA e a 5 1 1 Know the Time Constraints aoaaa a a D27 Global Structutes trat e e A a a e ee eee piled Frame Structures a o e ed a Bee ee ere oh ee Ee 5 1 4 Interactive Elements amua i e A bea e a e a a e ena e E a a a a 02 Using Graphics A A E E a 5 3 Using Animations and Transitions ei Ere e e a e ANEA O a AA E R e 5 4 Choosing Appropriate Themes osoo a 5 5 Choosing Appropriate Colors osoo ee 5 6 Choosing Appropriate Fonts and Font Attributes ooo a KO Font Size T AeA aa o NN 5 60 24 Font Families zae a e a een a a 5 6 3 Font Shapes Italics and Small Capitals oaa aaa a 5 6 4 Font Weight 20 tei i a ene rs i ak a 4 2G a DE e arte aaa e aaa ara ww Solution Templates Licenses and Copyright TRI Which License Applies oi loess do he AA A A AAA e a d 7 2 The GNU General Public License Version 2 a rl da Preamble
13. Any occurence of a sign may be followed by an offset in round brackets This offset will be added to the value of beamerpauses Thus if beamerpauses is 2 then lt 1 gt expands to lt 3 gt and lt 1 gt expands to lt 1 2 gt For example begin frame frametitle Method 1 begin itemize item lt 2 gt Apple item lt 3 gt Peach item lt 4 gt Plum 90 item lt 5 gt Orange end itemize and begin itemize lt 1 gt item Apple item Peach item Plum item Orange end itemize are equivalent There is another special sign you can use in an overlay specification that behaves similarly to the sign a dot When you write lt gt a similar thing as in lt gt happens except that the counter beamerpauses is not incremented and except that you get the value of beamerpauses decreased by one Thus a dot possibly followed by an offset just expands to the current value of the counter beamerpauses minus one possibly offset This dot notation can be useful in case like the following begin itemize lt gt item Apple item lt gt Peach item Plum item Orange end itemize In the example the second item is shown at the same time as the first one since it does not update the counter In the following example each time an item is uncovered the specified text is alerted When the next item is uncovered this altering ends begin itemize lt gt item This is alert lt g
14. Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results e Proof of the Main Theorem A variation on the Antibes theme that has a much smoother appearance It can be made less dominant by choosing a different color theme Juan Les Pins is a cozy village near Antibes It hosted sTACS 2002 usetheme Montpellier Example 150 There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number L results L Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics A ea of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem A sober theme giving basic navigational hints The headline can be made more dominant by using a different color theme Montpellier is in the south of France It hosted STACS 2004 15 4 Presentation Themes with a Table of Contents Sidebar usetheme options Berkeley Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum
15. Example beamerdefaultoverlayspecification lt gt Example Nbeamerdefaultoverlayspecificationt clears the default overlay specification Actually it installs the default overlay specification lt gt which just means always but the portable way of clearing the default overlay specification is this call 9 6 4 Incremental Specifications This section is mostly important for people who have already used overlay specifications a lot and have grown tired of writing things like lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt and so on again and again You should skip this section on first reading Often you want to have overlay specifications that follow a pattern similar to the following 89 begin itemize item lt 1 gt Apple item lt 2 gt Peach item lt 3 gt Plum item lt 4 gt Orange end itemize The problem starts if you decide to insert a new fruit say at the beginning In this case you would have to adjust all of the overlay specifications Also if you add a pause command before the itemize you would also have to update the overlay specifications BEAMER Offers a special syntax to make creating lists as the one above more robust You can replace it by the following list of incremental overlay specifications begin itemize item lt gt Apple item lt gt Peach item lt gt Plum item lt gt Orange end itemize The effect of the sign is the following You can use it in any overla
16. e The sans serif version of Computer Modern is not nearly as well designed as the serif version Indeed the sans serif version is in essence the serif version with different design parameters not an independent design e Computer modern needs much more space than more economic fonts like Times this explains why Times is so popular with people who need to squeeze their great paper into just twelve pages To be fair Times was specifically designed to be economic the newspaper company publishing The Times needed robust but space economic font A small selection of alternatives to Computer Modern 39 e Latin Modern is a Computer Modern derivate that provides more characters so it s not considered a real alternative It s recommended over Computer Modern though e Helvetica is an often used alternative However Helvetica also tends to look boring since we see it everywhere and it has a very large x height the height of the letter x in comparison to a letter like M A large x height is usually considered good for languages like English that use uppercase letters seldom and not so good for languages like German that use uppercase letters a lot We have never been quite convinced by the argument for this though Be warned the x height of Helvetica is so different from the x height of Times that mixing the two in a single line looks strange The packages for loading Times and Helvetica provide options for fixing this though e
17. lt aaoo ts tE A AOR a a a de Se 7 2 2 Terms and Conditions For Copying Distribution and Modification 7 2 3 No Wartanty a spote oa p paa a A le a 7 3 The GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 3 3 November 2008 73 1 Preamble nt e a a A ae ee eS 7 3 2 Applicability and definitions 2 2 2 ee Los Verbatim Copying 42 45 fae aa GE ee Pe oh ht gy da s 7 3 4 Copying in Quantity 3 0 Modifications coo eg gee Ee ee i A OR Bl ae Ae eS 1 36 Combining Documents a me oye d bo Se ee RAGA AE EES bh ee A 7 3 7 Collection of Documents 7 3 8 Aggregating with Independent Works 0 e 3 9 Translation A ee eS ee ee BS AOE Ee PS Be a SO Terminations 4 o aa goad Son BP SS oo BOE a de ee Sw Ss 7 3 11 Future Revisions of this License 0 ee 3 12 REWCCNSING iari sya o A yk Se eae GA de aed Ets te at a A 7 3 13 Addendum How to use this License for your documents 000 4 7 4 The FIEX Project Public License 2 ee WAN Preamble aint gurur e Selec death OS lt tes Scala aie e Be DE Tae eee ee gee ae ee E E TAD Definitions ee bbe dot a Bee eee oe DEA eee ee GME E 7 4 3 Conditions on Distribution and Modification 0 2 000 7 4 4 7 4 5 7 4 6 TAT 7 4 8 7 4 9 7 4 10 7 4 11 No Warranty dato Goa en an a BR es e ee hah AI e A a a Maintenance of The Work 2 ee Whether and How to Distribute Works under This License
18. must also be taken once For example a shading must be defined that should not be redefined every time the shading is used later on To implement such actions you can use the optional argument action following the keyword action Thus after the normal use of the defbeamertemplate you add the text action and then any commands that should be executed once when the predefined option is selected by the setbeamertemplate command Example defbeamertemplate background canvas my shading 2 pgfuseshading myshading simple enough action pgfdeclareverticalshading myshading the paperwidth color Ocm 1 color the paperheight 2 setbeamertemplate background canvas myshading red 10 blue 10 Defines the shading myshading right here Subsequent calls to usebeamertemplate background canvas will yield pgfuseshading myshading ARTICLE Normally this command has no effect in article mode However if a mode specification is given this command is applied for the specified modes Thus this command behaves like the command which also gets the implicit mode specification lt presentation gt if no other specification is given Example defbeamertemplate my template default something has no effect in article mode Example defbeamertemplate lt article gt my template default something has no effect in presentation modes but has an effect in article mode Examp
19. subsection begin frame end frame to enforce entries in the table of contents end document The empty frame at the end which should be deleted later ensures that the sections and subsections are actually part of the table of contents This frame is necessary since a section or subsection command following the last page of a document has no effect 4 3 Step Three Creating a PDF or PostScript File Once a first version of the structure is finished you should try to create a first PDF or PostScript file of your still empty talk to ensure that everything is working properly This file will only contain the title page and the table of contents 4 3 1 Creating PDF To create a PDF version of this file run the program pdflatex on main tex at least twice You need to run it twice so that T X can create the table of contents It may even be necessary to run it more often since all sorts of auxiliary files are created In the following example the greater than sign is the prompt gt pdflatex main tex lots of output gt pdflatex main tex lots of output Alternatively you can use lualatex or xelatex instead of pdflatex in above commands You can next use a program like the Acrobat Reader xpdf evince or okular to view the resulting presen tation gt acroread main pdf 4 3 2 Creating PostScript To create a PostScript version you should first ascertain that the HYPERREF package which is automat
20. subsection The Basic Problem That We Studied 21 These commands are given outside of frames So Euclid assumes that at the point of invocation they have no direct effect they only create entries in the table of contents Having a Motivation section seems reasonable to Euclid but he changes the subsection title As he looks at the presentation he notices that his assumption was not quite true each subsection command seems to insert a frame containing a table of contents into the presentation Doubling back he finds the command that causes this The AtBeginSubsection inserts a frame with only the current subsec tion highlighted at the beginning of each section If Euclid does not like this he can just delete the whole AtBeginSubsection stuff and the table of contents at the beginning of each subsection disappears The section and subsection commands take optional short arguments These short arguments are used whenever a short form of the section of subsection name is needed While this is in keeping with the way BEAMER treats the optional arguments of things like title it is different from the usual way ATEX treats an optional argument for sections where the optional argument dictates what is shown in the table of contents and the main argument dictates what is shown everywhere else in BEAMER things are exactly the other way round 3 8 Creating a Simple Frame Euclid then modifies the next frame which is the first real fr
21. ColorFoot DefaultTransition WoFrenchBabelItemize TitleSlideNav NormalSlideNav HAPsetup LeftFoot and RightFoot 24 2 Seminar The package beamerseminar maps a subset of the commands of the SEMINAR package to BEAMER As for PROSPER the emulation cannot be perfect For example no portrait slides are supported no automatic page breaking the framing of slides is not emulated Unfortunately for all frames slide environments that contain overlays you have to put the environment into a frame environment by hand and must remove all occurrences of newslide inside the environment by closing the slide and opening a new one and then putting these into frame environments The workflow for the migration is the following 1 Use the document class beamer not seminar Most options passed to seminar do not apply to beamer and should be omitted If you copy parts of a presentation that is mixed with normal text add the ignorenonframetext option and place every slide environment inside a frame since BEAMER will not recognize the begin slide as the beginning of a frame Add a usepackage beamerseminar to start the emulation Add the option accumulated if you wish to create a presentation to be held with a video projector Possibly add commands to install themes and templates There should not be commands in the preamble having to do with page and slide styles They do not apply to beamer If a ne
22. Example 157 There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics a University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number A more sober variation of the Copenhagen theme Malm is a town in southern Sweden It hosted FCT 2001 usetheme Warsaw Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results e Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number A dominant variation of the Copenhagen theme Warsaw is the capital of Poland It hosted MFcs 2002 15 7 Presentation Themes Included For Compatibility Earlier versions of BEAME
23. In a presentation if you go to the trouble of using a serif font for some part of it you should also use italics not slanted text e The different characters used for serif italics have changed much less from the original handwritten letters they are based on than normal serif text For this reason serif italics creates the impression of handwritten text which may be desirable to give a presentation a more personal touch although you can t get very personal using Times italics which everyone has seen a thousand times However it is harder to read than normal text so do not use it for text more than a line long The second font shape supported by TFX are small capital letters Using them can create a conservative even formal impression but some words of caution e Small capitals are different from all uppercase text A small caps text leaves normal uppercase letters unchanged and uses smaller versions of the uppercase letters for normal typesetting lowercase letters Thus the word German is typeset as GERMAN using small caps but as GERMAN using all uppercase letters e Small caps either come as faked small caps or as real small caps Faked small caps are created by just scaling down normal uppercase letters This leads to letters the look too thin Real small caps are specially designed smaller versions of the uppercase letters that have the same stroke width as normal text e Computer Modern fonts and expert v
24. Second you can use the following command includeonlyframes frame label list This command behaves a little bit like the includeonly command Only the frames mentioned in the list are included All other frames are suppressed Nevertheless the section and subsection commands are still executed so that you still have the correct navigation bars By labeling the current frame as say current and then saying includeonlyframes current you can work on a single frame quickly The frame label list is a comma separated list without spaces of the names of frames that have been labeled To label a frame you must pass the option label name to the frame command or frame environment Example includeonlyframes examplel example3 frame label example1 This frame will be included frame label example2 This frame will not be included frame This frame will not be included againframe examplei Will be included 4 4 Step Four Create Frames Once the table of contents looks satisfactory start creating frames for your presentation by adding frame environments You ll find guidelines on what to put on a frame in Section 5 1 3 4 5 Step Five Test Your Presentation Always test your presentation For this you should vocalize or subvocalize your talk in a quiet environment Typically this will show that your talk is too long You should then remove parts of the presentation such that it fits into the allotted t
25. Tan01 NT02 If you want to be modest you can abbreviate your name when citing yourself as in Nickelsen and T 2003 or Nickelsen and T 2003 However this can be confusing for the audience since it is often not immediately clear who exactly T might be We recommend using the full name 5 1 3 Frame Structure Just like your whole presentation each frame should also be structured A frame that is solely filled with some long text is very hard to follow It is your job to structure the contents of each frame such that ideally the audience immediately sees which information is important which information is just a detail how the presented information is related and so on The Frame Title Put a title on each frame The title explains the contents of the frame to people who did not follow all details on the slide The title should really explain things not just give a cryptic summary that cannot be understood unless one has understood the whole slide For example a title like The Poset will have everyone puzzled what this slide might be about Titles like Review of the Definition of Partially Ordered Sets Posets or A Partial Ordering on the Columns of the Genotype Matrix are much more informative Ideally titles on consecutive frames should tell a story all by themselves a In English you should either always capitalize all words in a frame title except for words like a
26. The following options are possible e duration seconds Specifies the number of seconds the transition effect needs Default is one second but often a shorter one like 0 2 seconds is more appropriate Viewer applications especially Acrobat may interpret this option in slightly strange ways e direction degree For directed effects this option specifies the effect s direction Allowed values are 0 90 180 270 and for the glitter effect also 315 All of these commands are ignored in article mode transblindshorizontal lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide as if horizontal blinds were pulled away Example transblindshorizontal transblindsvertical lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide as if vertical blinds were pulled away Example Ntransblindsvertical lt 2 3 gt transboxin lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by moving to the center from all four sides Example Ntransboxin lt 1 gt transboxout lt overlay specification gt L options Show the slide by showing more and more of a rectangular area that is centered on the slide center Example Ntransboxout transdissolve lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by slowly dissolving what was shown before Example Ntransdissolve duration 0 2 transglitter lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide with a glitter effect that sweeps in the specified direction Example Ntrans
27. alert 1 gt First point item lt 2 alert 2 gt Second point item lt 3 alert 3 gt Third point end itemize or begin itemize lt alert gt item First point item Second point item Third point end itemize Note that this will draw the little item symbol also in red 215 23 3 Changing Symbol Before an Enumeration When uncovering a list of tasks or problems you may desire that the symbol in front of the last uncovered symbol is say a ballot X while for the previous items it is a check mark you ll find these characters in some Dingbats fonts The best way to achieve this is to implement a new action environment If this action is activated it temporarily changes the item symbol template to the other symbol newenvironment ballotenv only setbeamertemplate itemize item code for showing a ballot setbeamertemplate itemize subitem code for showing a smaller ballot setbeamertemplate itemize subsubitem code for showing a smaller ballot setbeamertemplate itemize item code for showing a check mark setbeamertemplate itemize subitem code for showing a smaller check mark setbeamertemplate itemize subsubitem code for showing a smaller check mark The effect of the code is to install a check mark as the default template If the action ballot is now requested for some item this template will temporarily be replaced by the ballot templates Note that the ballotenv is invoked wit
28. bstep 231 button template color font 105 button border color 105 c class option 74 CambridgeUS presentation theme 148 caption template color font 124 caption label separator template 125 caption name color font 125 circles inner theme 160 CJK package 16 Class options for BEAMER 10pt 194 11pt 194 12pt 194 14pt 195 17pt 195 20pt 195 8pt 194 9pt 194 aspectratio 141 76 aspectratio 149 76 aspectratio 1610 76 aspectratio 169 76 aspectratio 32 76 aspectratio 43 76 aspectratio 54 76 bigger 194 c 74 color list of options 16 compress 68 draft 30 envcountsect 119 handout 204 hyperref list of options 17 noamssymb 120 noamsthm 120 notheorems 120 smaller 194 t 74 trans 203 ucs 17 242 usepdftitle false 93 utf8 18 utf8x 17 xcolor list of options 19 Classes foils 17 prosper 19 seminar 19 code 231 codeswitch 231 color package 16 Color themes albatross 176 beaver 180 beetle 177 crane 177 default 174 dolphin 183 dove 178 fly 178 lily 181 monarca 179 orchid 181 rose 181 seagull 179 seahorse 182 sidebartab 175 spruce 180 structure 174 whale 182 wolverine 179 color list of options class option 16 Colors see Beamer colors colortbl package 16 column 126 column environment 126 columns environment 125 compress class option 68 conference talks conference ornate 20min solution 42 Copenhagen presentatio
29. helvet lmodern mathtime mathptm mathptmx newcent palatino pifont utopia 18 2 3 Choosing a Font Encodings The same font can come in different encodings which are very roughly spoken the ways the characters of a text are mapped to glyphs the actual shape of a particular character in a particular font at a particular size In T X two encodings are often used with Latin characters the T1 encoding and the OT1 encoding old T1 encoding Conceptually the newer T1 encoding is preferable over the old OT1 encoding For example hyphenation of words containing umlauts like the famous German word Fraulein will work only if you use the T1 encod ing Unfortunately the EC fonts that is the Tl encoded Computer Modern fonts are distributed on small installations just as MetaFont sources and only have bitmap renditions of each glyph For this reason using the Tl encoded EC fonts on such small installations will produce PDF files that render poorly TeX Live cross platform replaced older teTeX for UNIX Linux and MiKT X for Windows platforms can be installed with different levels of completeness Concerning the Computer Modern fonts the following packages can be installed cm super fonts 1modern Latin Modern fonts and 1gc fonts the latter containing the Latin Greek and Cyrillic alphabets Concerning other fonts the txfonts and pxfonts are two extended sets of the Times and the Palatino PostScript fonts both packages containing exte
30. navigation bars navigation symbols a logo a frame title a background and some frame contents OE OU cee A frame need not have all of these components Usually the first three components are automatically setup by the theme you are using 8 2 1 The Headline and Footline The headline of a frame is the area at the top of the frame If it is not empty it should show some information that helps the audience orientate itself during your talk Likewise the footline is the area at the bottom of the frame BEAMER does not use the standard TEX mechanisms for typesetting the headline and the footline Instead the special headline and footline templates are used to typeset them The size of the headline and the footline is determined as follows Their width is always the paper width Their height is determined by tentatively typesetting the headline and the footline right after the begin document command The head of the headline and the footline at that point is frozen and will be used throughout the whole document even if the headline and footline vary in height later on which they should not The appearance of the headline and footline is determined by the following templates Beamer Template Color Font headline This template is used to typeset the headline The BEAMER color and font headline are installed at the beginning The background of the BEAMER color is not used by default that is no background rectangle is
31. or after the last argument If it finds an overlay specification like lt 3 gt it will call 85 text with arguments 1 to argument number set to the normal arguments and the argument number argument number 1 set to lt 3 gt including the pointed brackets If no overlay specification is found the extra argument is empty If the default optional value is provided the first argument of command name is optional If no optional argument is specified in square brackets the default optional value is used Example The following command will typeset its argument in red on the specified slides newcommand lt gt makered 1 color 2 red 1 Example Here is BEAMER s definition of emph newcommand lt gt emph 1 only 2 itshape 1 Example Here is BEAMER s definition of transdissolve the command beamer dotrans mainly passes its argument to hyperref newcommand lt gt transdissolve 1 only 2 beamer dotrans 1 Dissolve renewcommand lt gt ezisting command name argument number default optional value text Redeclares a command that already exists in the same way as newcommand lt gt Inside text you can still access to original definitions using the command beameroriginal see the example Example This command is used in BEAMER to make hyperlink overlay specification aware renewcommand lt gt hyperlink 2 only 3 beameroriginal hyperlink 1 2 newenvi
32. relative overlay spec ification For example the specification 3 here means things that will be uncovered three slides ahead respectively things that have once more been covered for three slides More precisely if an item is uncov ered for more than one slide and then covered once more only the first moment of uncovering is used for the calculation of how long the item has been covered once more An opaqueness of 100 is fully opaque and 0 is fully transparent Currently since real transparency is not yet implemented this command causes all colors to get a mixing of percentage of opaqueness of the current bg At some future point this command might result in real transparency The alternate PGF extension used inside an opaque area is percentage of opaqueness opaque In case of nested calls only the innermost opaqueness specification is used Example setbeamercovered still covered opaqueness lt 1 gt 15 again covered opaqueness lt 1 gt 15 pgfdeclareimage book book pgfdeclareimage book 150paque filenameforbooknearlytransparent Makes everything that is uncovered in two slides only 15 percent opaque 190 18 Fonts The first subsection introduces the predefined font themes that come with BEAMER and which make it easy to change the fonts used in a presentation The next subsection describes further special commands for changing some basic attributes of the fonts used in a presentation
33. short title title The short title is used in headlines and footlines Inside the title line breaks can be inserted using the double backslash command Example title The Beamer Class title Short Version A Very Long Title Over Several Lines 92 ARTICLE The short form is ignored in article mode subtitle short subtitle 14 subtitle The short subtitle is not used by default but is available via the insert insertshortsubtitle The subtitle is shown below the title in a smaller font Example title The Beamer Class subtitle An easily paced introduction with many examples ARTICLE This command causes the subtitle to be appended to the title with a linebreak and a normalsize command issued before it This may or may not be what you would like to happen author short author names author names The names should be separated using the command and In case authors have different affiliations they should be suffixed by the command inst with different parameters Example Nauthor Hemaspaandra et al L Hemaspaandra inst 1 and T Tantau inst 2 ARTICLE The short form is ignored in article mode institute short institute institute If more than one institute is given they should be separated using the command and and they should be prefixed by the command inst with different parameters Example institute Universities of Rijeka and Berlin inst 1 Department of Informatics Uni
34. these commands will not create a heading at the position where you use them Rather they will add an entry to the table of contents and also to the navigation bars In order to create a line break in the table of contents usually not a good idea you can use the command breakhere Note that the standard command does not work actually we do not really know why comments would be appreciated section lt mode specification gt L short section name section name Starts a section No heading is created The section name is shown in the table of contents and in the navigation bars except if short section name is specified In this case short section name is used in the navigation bars instead If a mode specification is given the command only has an effect for the specified modes Example section Summary Summary of Main Results ARTICLE The mode specification allows you to provide an alternate section command in article mode This is necessary for example if the short section name is unsuitable for the table of contents Example section lt presentation gt Results Results on the Main Problem section lt article gt Results on the Main Problem Beamer Template Color Font section in toc This template is used when a section entry is to be typeset For the permissible options see the parent template table of contents The following commands are useful for this template e inserttocsection inserts the ta
35. when multiple mini frames are shown their position is calculated based on the BEAMER sizes mini frame size and mini frame offset See the command setbeamersize for a description of how to change them Beamer Template mini frame in current subsection This template is used to render the mini frame of frames in the current subsection that are not the current frame The BEAMER color font mini frame installed prior to the usage of this template is invoked Beamer Template mini frame in other subsection This template is used to render mini frames of frames from subsections other than the current one The following template options are predefined e default percentage By default this template shows mini frame in current subsection ex cept that the color is first changed to fg percentage bg The default percentage is 50 Example To get an extremely shaded rendering of the frames outside the current subsection you can use the following setbeamertemplate mini frame in other subsection default 20 Example To render all mini frames other than the current one in the same way use setbeamertemplate mini frame in other subsection default 100 Some themes show sections and or subsections in the navigation bars By clicking on a section or subsection in the navigation bar you will jump to that section Clicking on a section is particularly useful if the section starts with a tableofcontents currentsection since you
36. you have to load the package by hand in the article mode documentclass foils If you wish to emulate the foils class using BEAMER please see Section 24 3 usepackage T1 EU1 EU2 fontenc Use the T1 option only with fonts that have outline fonts available in the T1 encoding like times or the lmodern fonts In a standard installation standard Computer Modern fonts the fonts Donald Knuth originally designed and which are used by default are not available in the T1 encoding Using this option with them will result in very poor rendering of your presentation when viewed with PDF viewer applications like Acrobat xpdf evince or okular To use the Computer Modern fonts with the T1 encoding use the package lmodern See also Section 18 2 3 This applies both to latex dvips and pdflatex Use the EU1 option with xelatex and EU2 option with lualatex Note that xelatex and luatex support OpenType fonts and font encodings work very different compared to pdflatex Again see Section 18 2 3 for more information usepackage fourier The package switches to a T1 encoding but it does not redefine all fonts such that outline fonts non bitmapped fonts are used by default For example the sans serif text and the typewriter text are not replaced To use outline fonts for these write usepackage lmodern before including the fourier package usepackage HA prosper You cannot use this package with BEAMER However you might try to use the pa
37. 11 This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to the Work nor does this license place any restrictions on aggregating such works with the Work by any means 12 Nothing in this license is intended to or may be used to prevent complete compliance by all parties with all applicable laws 7 4 4 No Warranty There is no warranty for the Work Except when otherwise stated in writing the Copyright Holder provides the Work as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the Work is with you Should the Work prove defective you assume the cost of all necessary servicing repair or correction In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing will The Copyright Holder or any author named in the components of the Work or any other party who may distribute and or modify the Work as permitted above be liable to you for damages including any general special incidental or consequential damages arising out of any use of the Work or out of inability to use the Work including but not limited to loss of data data being rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by anyone as a result of any failure of the Work to operate with any other programs even if the Copyright Holder or said author or said other party has been advised of the
38. 153 15 6 Presentation Themes with Section and Subsection Tables o 157 15 7 Presentation Themes Included For Compatibility o o e 158 16 Inner Themes Outer Themes and Templates 159 16 1 Inner Themes nat a AAA Pak Eee ele ee eS Be 159 16 2 O ter Themes ese a See Medea a doe ee Atlee abd ae ee 162 16 3 Changing the Templates Used for Different Elements of a Presentation 167 16 3 1 Overview of Beamer s Template Management e 167 16 3 2 Using Beamer s Templates e e 169 16 3 3 Setting Beamer s Templates tas E ae a AAA a a Se 169 17 Colors 174 Pal Color Themes LAS AA A ee AAA A A 174 17 1 1 Default and Special Purpose Color Themes o o 174 17 1 2 Complete Color Them s stese pia dara td be a A 176 1 13 Inner Color Themes e ee aa a a heeded eg woe ae dd 4 181 17 1 4 Outer Color Themes s sa s eo aae 2 00 0 e a a a ee 182 17 2 Changing the Colors Used for Different Elements of a Presentation o 17 2 1 Overview of Beamer s Color Management 2 2 00 0000 000 2 eee eee 17 2 2 Using Beamers Colors rta ae cae GA a o a ey ee a lr 23 setting Beamer s COlOrs y a l oe tad ee ae ee Se A RE Be ea eee ee ee 17 3 The Color of Mathematical Text 2 0 000 000 0000 000000000000 000 17 4 The Color Palettes g d ete a Leo Be Bia Shae hoe Sle wowed 17 5 Miscellan ous Colors 2
39. 18 3 1 Overview of Beamer s Font Management BEAMER s font mechanism is somewhat similar to BEAMER s color mechanism but not quite the same As for colors every BEAMER element like the frame titles the document title the footnotes and so on has a certain BEAMER font As for colors on the one hand you can specify the font of each element individually on the other hand fonts also use inheritance thereby making it easy to globally change the fonts used for say titlelike things or for itemizelike things While a BEAMER color has a certain foreground and a certain background either of which may be empty a BEAMER font has a size a shape a series and a family each of which may be empty The inheritance relation among BEAMER fonts is not necessarily the same as between BEAMER colors though we have tried to match them whenever possible Multiple inheritance plays a more important rule for fonts than it does for colors A font might inherit the attributes of two different fonts If one of them specifies that the font should be say boldface and the other specifies that the font should be say large then the child font will be both large and bold As for fonts the description of the font used for an element is given after the description of the element 18 3 2 Using Beamer s Fonts To use a BEAMER font you can use the command usebeamerfont Inside the templates for elements this command will typically have already be
40. 247 subsubsection in toc template color font 95 subsubsection in toc shaded template color font 95 subtitle 93 switch 230 Szeged presentation theme 156 t class option 74 tableofcontents 99 Template inserts see Inserts Templates see Beamer templates temporal 81 texpower package 19 textpos package 19 thebibliography environment 101 Themes see Presentation themes theorem environment 118 theorem begin template 120 theorem end template 121 theorems parent template 120 tiny structure font 115 title 92 title page template color font 92 titlegraphic 93 titlelike color font 188 titlepage 92 trans class option 203 transblindshorizontal 141 transblindsvertical 141 transboxin 141 transboxout 141 transdissolve 141 transduration 142 transglitter 141 translate 237 translatelet 238 translator package 238 transreplace 141 transsplithorizontalin 142 transsplithorizontalout 142 transsplitverticalin 142 transsplitverticalout 142 transwipe 142 tree outer theme 166 tsection 223 tsectionandpart 223 ucs class option 17 ucs package 19 uncover 81 UntilSlide 222 untilSlide 222 upper separation line foot color 189 upper separation line head color 189 usebeamercolor 184 usebeamerfont 196 usebeamertemplate 169 usecolortheme 144 usedictionary 236 usefonttheme 144 useinnertheme 144 uselanguage 236 useoutertheme 144 usepdftitle fa
41. 80 black bg red 20 white Finally Euclid is satisfied with the presentation and goes ahead and gives a great talk at the conference making many new friends He also writes that email to BEAMER s author containing that long list of things that he missed in BEAMER or that do not work He is a bit disappointed to learn that it might take till ISPN 79 for all these things to be taken care of but he also understands that BEAMER s authors also need some time to do research or otherwise he would have nothing to give presentations about 27 PRESEN TATION 4 Workflow For Creating a Beamer Presentation This section presents a possible workflow for creating a BEAMER presentation and possibly a handout to go along with it Technical questions are addressed like which programs to call with which parameters 4 1 Step One Setup the Files It is advisable that you create a folder for each presentation Even though your presentation will usually reside in a single file T X produces so many extra files that things can easily get very confusing otherwise The folder s name should ideally start with the date of your talk in ISO format like 2003 12 25 for a Christmas talk followed by some reminder text of what the talk is all about Putting the date at the front in this format causes your presentation folders to be listed nicely when you have several of them residing in one directory If you use an extra directory for each presentation you can
42. A a ee hye oe AP ee OS ee ea ee 23 Installation in a texmt Tree wy 2 ee a a do D Aa a a ODE Ee eee es 2 4 Updating the Installation 2 0 0 e oe ee ss 20 Testing the Installation geese de Gi ea E ad d h 2 6 Compatibility with Other Packages and Classes 2 2 e Tutorial Euclid s Presentation 3 1 Problem Statement o E ae a ee E e Ra A 3 2 gt Solution Template o a siyrat a RA a A a e Car Las E ao Title Material ia e a Ge oh AS a ye Re wee 34 The Title Page Frames a da ae ee RRR AAR td a de lle wed 3 5 Creating the Presentation PDF File o e 3 6 The Table Of Contents sde doe sa eos e E A A e e ded 3 7 Sections and SUbSECtIONS a A AR ew es wae y 3 9 Creating a Simple Frames se a 5 a e e A A RWB A da de da eG ae a ee 3 9 Creating Simple Overlays eogi GS ee Se He Oe ee Pp ee ee YW 3 10 Using Overlay Specifications ee ee 3 11 Structuring ay Brame os e doe eee A A ee ee heen A Ma Mod ice AA he de 3 12 Adding References un no a ae le RN eee ee ee ee 313 Verbatim LOX ao BY de Os a et hs AMEE Me TOS EA e es ao 3 14 Changing the Way Things Look I Theming e 3 15 Changing the Way Things Look Il Colors and Fonts o e e 4 Workflow For Creating a Beamer Presentation 4 1 Step One Setup the Files ta tad e e a ld ac Da a a 4 2 Step Two Structure Your Presentation 0 e 4 3 Step Three Creating a PDF or PostScript File
43. Alexandria Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number A variation on the Berlin theme The same options may be given Ilmenau is a town in Germany It hosted the 40th Theorietag usetheme Dresden Example 154 Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number A variation on the Berlin theme with a strong separation into navigational stuff at the top bottom and a sober main text The same options may be given Dresden is a town in Germany It hosted STACS 2001 usetheme Darmstadt Example Re Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Universi
44. An MMC is eligible for relicensing if it is licensed under this License and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC 1 had no cover texts or invariant sections and 2 were thus incorporated prior to November 1 2008 The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC BY SA on the same site at any time before August 1 2009 provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing 7 3 13 Addendum How to use this License for your documents To use this License in a document you have written include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page Copyright C YEAR YOUR NAME Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foun dation with no Invariant Sections no Front Cover Texts and no Back Cover Texts A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License If you have Invariant Sections Front Cover Texts and Back Cover Texts replace the with Texts line with this with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES with the Front Cover Texts being LIST and with the Back Cover Texts being LIST 51 If you have Invariant Sections without C
45. Default and Special Purpose Color Themes usecolortheme default Example There Is No There Is No beets Lagos rine There Is No Largest Prime Number Number lumber i The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p The default color theme is very sober It installs little special colors and even less backgrounds The default color theme sets up the default parent relations between the different BEAMER colors The main colors set in the default color theme are the following e normal text is black on white e alerted text is red e example text is a dark green green with 50 black e structure is set to a light version of MidnightBlue more precisely 20 red 20 green and 70 blue Use this theme for a no nonsense presentation Since this theme is loaded by default you cannot reload it after having loaded another color theme usecolortheme options structure Example 174 There Is No There Is No ei targes Prime There ls No Largest Prime Number Number Euklid Number G The proof uses reductio ad absurdum ukli There Is No Largest
46. Distribution It is wise never to modify a component of the Work even for your own personal use without also meeting the above conditions for distributing the modified component While you might intend that such modifications will never be distributed often this will happen by accident you may forget that you have modified that component or it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified version that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions of this license in ways that could have legal implications and worse cause problems for the community It is therefore usually in your best interest to keep your copy of the Work identical with the public one Many works provide ways to control the behavior of that work without altering any of its licensed components 55 7 4 9 How to Use This License To use this license place in each of the components of your work both an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year the work was authored and or last substantially modified Include also a statement that the distribution and or modification of that component is constrained by the conditions in this license Here is an example of such a notice and statement hh pig dtx hh Copyright 2005 M Y Name This work may be distributed and or modified under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License either version 1 3 of this license or at your option any later version The latest ve
47. Futura is in our opinion a beautiful font that is very well suited for presentations Its thick letters make it robust against scaling inversion and low contrast Unfortunately while it is most likely installed on your system somewhere in some form getting TEX to work with it is a complicated process However it has been made a lot simpler with modern typesetting engines such as luatex and xetex e Times is a possible alternative to Computer Modern Its main disadvantage is that it is a serif font which requires a high resolution projector Naturally it also used very often so we all know it very well e DejaVu a derivate of Bitstream Vera is also a very good and free alternative TrueType version that comes with OpenOffice org is complicated to get to work with TFX but arev TFX package provides an easy way to use Type 1 version named Bera It has both sans serif and serif versions arev provides both Families that you should not use for normal text include e All monospaced fonts like Courier Script fonts which look like handwriting Their stroke width is way too small for a presentation More delicate serif fonts like Stempel and possibly even Garamond though Garamond is really a beautiful font for books e Gothic fonts Only a small fraction of your audience will be able to read them fluently There is one popular font that is a bit special Microsoft s Comic Sans On the one hand there is a website lobbying for banning
48. License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice 50 Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copise or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it 7 3 11 Future Revisions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish new revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns See http www gnu org copyleft Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this Li
49. Reader up to version 5 does not seem to be able to display any movies or sounds on Linux On the other hand the Acrobat Reader Version 6 on MacOS is able to display anything that QuickTime can display which is just about everything Embedding movies in a PDF document is provided for by the PDF 133 standard and is not a peculiarity of the Acrobat Reader In particular one might expect other viewers like xpdf and poppler based viewers Okular Evince to support embedded movies in the future Example movie pgfuseimage myposterimage mymovie avi Example movie width 3cm height 2cm poster mymovie mpg If your viewer application is not able to render your movie but some external application is you must use the externalviewer option This will ask the viewer application to launch an application for showing the movie instead of displaying it itself Since this application is started in a new window this is not nearly as nice as having the movie displayed directly by the viewer unless you use evil trickery to suppress the frame of the viewer application Which application is chosen is left to the discretion of the viewer application which tries to make its choice according to the extension of the movie filename and according to some mapping table for mapping extensions to viewer applications How this mapping table can be modified depends on the viewer application please see the release notes of your viewer The following options
50. There ls No There Is No Largest Prime Largest Prime Number Number There is no largest prime number There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria d 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 El Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results m Proof of the Main Theorem o 45 3 nue E 5 A dominant theme If the navigation bar is on the left it dominates since it is seen first The height of the frame title is fixed to two and a half lines thus you should be careful with overly long titles A logo will be put in the corner area Rectangular areas dominate the layout The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme By default the current entry of the table of contents in the sidebar will be highlighted by using a more vibrant color A good alternative is to highlight the current entry by using a different color for the background of the current point The color theme sidebartab installs the appropriate colors so you just have to say usecolortheme sidebartab This color theme works with all themes that show a table of contents in the sidebar This theme is useful for long talks like lectures that require a table of contents to be visible all the time The following options may be given e hideallsubsections causes on
51. This symbol is framed by arrows A section icon which is depicted as a highlighted section entry together with all subsections in a table of contents This symbol is framed by arrows A presentation icon which is depicted as a completely highlighted table of contents An appendix icon which is depicted as a completely highlighted table of contents consisting of only one section This icon is only shown if there is an appendix Back and forward icons depicted as circular arrows A search or find icon depicted as a detective s magnifying glass Clicking on the left arrow next to an icon always jumps to the last slide of the previous slide frame subsection or section Clicking on the right arrow next to an icon always jumps to the first slide of the next slide frame subsection or section Clicking on any of these icons has different effects 1 If supported by the viewer application clicking on a slide icon pops up a window that allows you to enter a slide number to which you wish to jump Clicking on the left side of a frame icon will jump to the first slide of the frame clicking on the right side will jump to the last slide of the frame this can be useful for skipping overlays Clicking on the left side of a subsection icon will jump to the first slide of the subsection clicking on the right side will jump to the last slide of the subsection 71 4 Clicking on the left side of a
52. Viewer applications for this format exist for virtually every platform When bringing your presentation to a conference on a memory stick you do not have to worry about which version of the presentation program might be installed there Also your presentation is going to look exactly the way it looked on your computer 1 2 History Till Tantau created BEAMER mainly in his spare time Many other people have helped by sending him emails containing suggestions for improvement or corrections or patches or whole new themes by now this amounts to over a thousand emails concerning BEAMER Indeed most of the development was only initiated by feature requests and bug reports Without this feedback BEAMER would still be what it was originally intended to be a small private collection of macros that make using the seminar class easier Till created the first version of BEAMER for his PhD defense presentation in February 2003 A month later he put the package on CTAN at the request of some colleagues After that things somehow got out of hand After being unmaintained since 2007 in April 2010 Till handed over the maintenance to Joseph Wright and Vedran Mileti who are still maintaining it improving code fixing bugs adding new features and helping users 1 3 Acknowledgments Till Tantau Where to begin BEAMER s development depends not only on me but on the feedback I get from other people Many features have been implemented because someone r
53. Work If this is not the case e g if a few lines of code are reused for a completely different task then clauses 6b and 6d shall not apply 7 4 11 Important Recommendations Defining What Constitutes the Work The LPPL requires that distributions of the Work contain all the files of the Work It is therefore important that you provide a way for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work This could for example be achieved by explicitly listing all the files of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by using a line such as This work consists of all files listed in manifest txt in that place In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you to comprise the Work and in such a case the licensee would be entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise the Work 56 Part II Building a Presentation This part contains an explanation of all the commands that are used to create presentations It starts with a section treating the commands and environments used to create frames the basic building blocks of presentations Next the creation of overlays is explained The following three sections concern commands and methods of structuring a presentation In order the static global structure the interactive global structure and the local structure are treated Two further sections treat graphics and animations Much of the mater
54. a more complicated overlay behavior for this frame In an enumeration of four points he wishes to uncover the points one by one but he wishes the fourth point to be shown at the same time as the first The idea is to illustrate his new proof method namely proof by contradiction where a wrong assumption is brought to a contradiction at the end after a number of intermediate steps that are not important at the beginning For this Euclid uses overlay specifications begin frame frametitle There Is No Largest Prime Number framesubtitle The proof uses textit reductio ad absurdum begin theorem There is no largest prime number end theorem begin proof begin enumerate item lt 1 gt Suppose p were the largest prime number item lt 2 gt Let q be the product of the first p numbers item lt 3 gt Then q 1 is not divisible by any of them item lt 1 gt But q 1 is greater than 1 thus divisible by some prime number not in the first p numbers qedhere end enumerate end proof uncover lt 4 gt The proof used textit reductio ad absurdum end frame The overlay specifications are given in pointed brackets The specification lt 1 gt means from slide 1 on Thus the first and fourth item are shown on the first slide of the frame but the other two items are not shown Rather the second point is shown only from the second slide onward BEAMER automatically computes the number of slides need
55. a second level item Beamer Template Color Font itemize subsubitem Color font parents subsubitem Like itemize item only for third level items beginfenumerate lt default overlay specification gt mini template environment contents end enumerate Used to display a list of items that are ordered Inside the environment use an item command for each topic By default before each item increasing Arabic numbers followed by a dot are printed as in 1 and 2 This can be changed by specifying a different template see below The first optional argument default overlay specification has exactly the same effect as for the itemize environment It is detected by the opening lt sign in the default overlay specification Thus if there is only one optional argument and if this argument does not start with lt then it is considered to be a mini template 111 The syntax of the mini template is the same as the syntax of mini templates in the enumerate package you do not need to include the enumerate package this is done automatically Roughly spoken the text of the mini template is printed before each item but any occurrence of a 1 in the mini template is replaced by the current item number an occurrence of the letter A is replaced by the i th letter of the alphabet in uppercase for the th item and the letters a i and I are replaced by the corresponding lowercase letters lowercase Roman l
56. a theme according to occasion A longer talk is more likely to require navigational hints than a short one When you give a 90 minute lecture to students you should choose a theme that always shows a sidebar with the current topic high lighted so that everyone always knows exactly what s the current status of your talk is when you give a ten minute introductory speech a table of contents is likely to just seem silly A theme showing the author s name and affiliation is appropriate in situations where the audience is likely not to know you like during a conference If everyone knows you having your name on each slide is just vanity First choose a presentation theme that has a layout that is appropriate for your talk Next you might wish to change the colors by installing a different color theme This can drastically change the appearance of your presentation A colorful theme like Berkeley will look much less flashy if you use the color themes seahorse and lily You might also wish to change the fonts by installing a different font theme Choosing Appropriate Colors Use colors sparsely The prepared themes are already quite colorful blue structure red alert green example If you add more colors for things like code math text etc you should have a very good reason Be careful when using bright colors on white background especially when using green What looks good on your monitor may look bad during a pres
57. a titlegraphic If any of these are missing they are not shown Except for the titlegraphic if the BEAMER color title author institute or date is defined respectively it is used as textcolor for these entries If a background color is defined for them a colored bar in the corresponding color is drawn behind them spanning the text width The corresponding BEAMER fonts are used for these entries The alignment option is passed on the beamercolorbox and can be used for example to flush the title page to the left by specifying left here The following commands are useful for this template e insertauthor inserts a version of the author s name that is useful for the title page e insertdate inserts the date e insertinstitute inserts the institute e inserttitle inserts a version of the document title that is useful for the title page e insertsubtitle inserts a version of the document title that is useful for the title page e inserttitlegraphic inserts the title graphic into a template For compatibility with other classes in article mode the following command is also provided maketitle PRESEN If used inside a frame it has the same effect as titlepage If used outside a frame it has the same effect TATION as frame titlepage in other words a frame is added if necessary Before you invoke the title page command you must specify all elements you wish to be shown This is done using the following commands titleL
58. adds those attributes that have not been mentioned in a previous call and overwrites those that have been mentioned Thus the following two command blocks have the same effect Example setbeamerfont frametitle size large setbeamerfont frametitle series bfseries setbeamerfont frametitle size large series bfseries In the starred version the font attributes are first completely reset that is set to be empty The following attributes may be given 196 size size command sets the size attribute of the BEAMER font The size command should be a normal MTEX command used for setting the font size or it should be empty Useful commands include tiny scriptsize footnotesize small normalsize Mlarge Large huge and Huge BEAMER also introduces the two font sizes Tiny and TINY for really small text But you should know exactly what you are doing if you use them You have been warned Note that there is a difference between specifying an empty command and specifying normalsize Making the size attribute empty means that the font size should not be changed when this font is used while specifying normalsize means that the size should be set to the normal size whenever this font is used size size in pt baselineskip sets the size attribute of the font to the given size in pt and the baseline skip to the given value Note that depending on what kind of font you use not all font sizes may be available Also
59. aligned end column end columns Example begin columns t column 5cm Two lines column T 5cm includegraphis height 3cm mygraphic jpg end columns ARTICLE This environment is ignored in article mode To create a column you can either use the column environment or the column command begin column placement 14 column width environment contents end column Creates a single column of width column width The vertical placement of the enclosing columns environ ment can be overruled by specifying a specific placement t and T for the two top modes c for centered and b for bottom Example The following code has the same effect as the above examples begin columns begin column t 5cm Two lines end column begin column t 5cm One line but aligned end column end columns ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode column placement 14 column width Starts a single column The parameters and options are the same as for the column environment The column automatically ends with the next occurrence of column or of a column environment or of the end of the current columns environment Example begin columns column t 5cm Two lines column t 5cm One line but aligned end columns ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode 126 12 8 Positioning Text and Graphics Absolutely Normally BEAMER uses T X s normal typesetting mec
60. an environment for typesetting a block of text that has a heading The appear ance of blocks can easily be changed using the following template Parent Beamer Template blocks Changing this parent template changes the templates of normal blocks alerted blocks and example blocks Example setbeamertemplate blocks default Example setbeamertemplate blocks rounded shadow true The following template options are predefined e default The default setting typesets the block title on its own line If a background is specified either for the block title or for the block body this background color is used as background of the title or body respectively For alerted and example blocks the corresponding BEAMER colors and fonts are used instead e rounded shadow true Makes the blocks rounded This means that the corners of the back grounds of the blocks are rounded off If the shadow true option is given a shadow is drawn behind the block begin block lt action specification gt block title lt action specification gt environment contents end block Only one action specification may be given Inserts a block like a definition or a theorem with the title block title If the action specification is present the given actions are taken on the specified slides see Section 9 6 3 In the example the definition is shown only from slide 3 onward Example begin block lt 3 gt Definiti
61. an example block it should have the example text color if it is currently alerted it should have the alerted text color This color is setup by certain environments to have the color that should be used to typset things like item buttons Since the color used for items item inherits from this color by default items automatically change their color according to the current situation If you write your own environment in which the item buttons and similar structural elements should have a different color you should change the color local structure inside these environments Beamer Font tiny structure This special font is used for tiny structural text Basically this font should be used whenever a structural element uses a tiny font The idea is that the tiny versions of the structure font often are not suitable For example it is often necessary to use a boldface version for them Also one might wish to have serif smallcaps structural text but still retain normal sans serif tiny structural text begin structureenv lt overlay specification gt environment contents end structureenv Environment version of the structure command Beamer Template structure begin This text is inserted at the beginning of a structureenv environment The following template options are predefined e default ARTICLE The text is typeset in boldface Beamer Template structure end This text is inserted at the end of a structureenv env
62. are a few things to keep in mind e Many packages produce poor quality graphics This is especially true of the standard picture environment of ATEX e Powerful packages that produce high quality graphics often do not work together with pdflatex lualatex or xelatex 130 e The most powerful and easiest to use package around namely pstricks does not work together with pdflatex lualatex or xelatex and this is a fundamental problem Due to the fundamental differences between PDF and PostScript it is not possible to write a pdflatex back end for pstricks Situation with lualatex and xelatex is very similar Regardless PST PDF XETEX PSTRICKS and PDFTRICKS package can help here and simplify things from user s perspective There are three possible solutions to the above problem each with it s own advantages and disadvantages e Use the PGF package It produces high quality graphics and works together with pdflatex lualatex xelatex and also with normal latex It is not as powerful as pstricks as pointed out above this is because of rather fundamental reasons and not as easy to use but it should be sufficient in most cases e Use LUAMPLIB package and lualatex It provides you with an environment using which you can type MetaPost code directly in your document e Use pstricks and stick to latex and dvips or use some of the workarounds mentioned above 13 2 Including Graphic Files Ending eps or ps External graphic files end
63. are easy to print on a black and white printer The theme uses grayscale in certain unavoidable cases but never color It also changes the font of alerted text to boldface When using this theme you should consider using the class option gray which ensures that all colors are converted to grayscale Also consider using the structurebold font theme usecolortheme fly Example 178 Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Theorem Proof Results particularly well with themes that use shadows usecolortheme monarca This theme is the consequent version of beetle and uses white black gray throughout Example It does not go beamerugcolorthememonarcal The theme is based on the colors of the Monarch butterfly Theme author Max Dohse usecolortheme seagull beamerugcolorthememonarca2 Example There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid Results roo ot the Main Theorem aame There Is No Largest Prime Number reve The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number Po With an introduction to a new proof technique na Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Theorem University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest pri et q be the proc f Proof of the Main Theorem duct of numbe Then q 1 i
64. are especially useful for placing a graphic next to a description explanation The main environment for creating columns is called columns Inside this environment you can either place several column environments each of which creates a new column or use the column command to create new columns begin columns options environment contents end columns A multi column area Inside the environment you should place only column environments or column commands see below The following options may be given b will cause the bottom lines of the columns to be vertically aligned c will cause the columns to be centered vertically relative to each other Default unless the global option t is used onlytextwidth is the same as totalwidth textwidth t will cause the first lines of the columns to be aligned Default if global option t is used T is similar to the t option but T aligns the tops of the first lines while t aligns the so called baselines of the first lines If strange things seem to happen in conjunction with the t option for example if a graphic suddenly drops down with the t option instead of going up try using this option instead totalwidth width will cause the columns to occupy not the whole page width but only width all told Note that this means that any margins are ignored 125 Example begin columns t begin column 5cm Two lines end column begin column 5cm One line but
65. bg is globally set to the value of bg This allows you to access the foreground or background of a certain beamer color name after another BEAMER color has been used However referring to these special global colors should be kept to the unavoidable minimum and should be done as locally as possible since a change of the BEAMER color will not reflect in a change of the colors beamer color name fg and beamer color name bg until the next invocation of usebeamercolor Also if the beamer color name 184 does not specify a foreground or a background color then the values of the special colors are whatever happened to be the foreground or background at the time of the last invocation of usebeamercolor So try not to get into the habit of writing color structure fg all the time at least not without a usebeamercolor structure close by Example This text is usebeamercolor fg alerted text alerted The following box uses the fore and background of frametitles usebeamercolor fg frametitle colorbox bg Frame Title ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode ifbeamercolorempty fg or bg beamer color name H if undefined if defined This command can be used to check whether the foreground or background of some beamer color name is non empty If the foreground or background of beamer color name is defined if defined will be executed otherwise the if undefined code Example ifbea
66. bit of a hassle You may wish to consult the TRX book for the glorious details on Making Boxes If your headline is simple you might also try putting everything into a pgfpicture environment which makes the placement easier 168 16 3 2 Using Beamer s Templates As a user of the BEAMER class you typically do not use or invoke templates yourself directly For example the frame title template is automatically invoked by BEAMER somewhere deep inside the frame typesetting process The same is true of most other templates However if for whatever reason you wish to invoke a template yourself you can use the following command Nusebeamertemplatex x 1 element name Tf none of the stars is given the text of the element name is directly inserted at the current position This text should previously have been specified using the setbeamertemplate command No text is inserted if this command has not been called before Example setbeamertemplate my template correct Your answer is usebeamertemplate my template If you add one star three things happen First the template is put inside a T X group thereby limiting most side effects of commands used inside the template Second inside this group the BEAMER color named element name is used and the foreground color is selected Third the BEAMER font element name is also used This one starred version is usually the best version to use If you add a second star ne
67. certain font sizes are much less desirable than other ones the standard commands take care of choosing appropriate sizes for you Do not use this option unless you have a good reason This command has the same effect as size fontsize size in pt baselineskip shape shape command sets the shape attribute of the font The command should be a command like itshape slshape scshape or upshape shape shape attribute abbreviation sets the shape attribute of the font using the IAT X s abbre viations for attributes This command has the same effect as shape fontshape shape attributes abbreviation series series command sets the series attribute of the font The command should be a command like bfseries series series attribute abbreviation has the same effect as series fontseries series attributes abbreviation family family command sets the font family attribute The command should be a ETRX font com mand like rmfamily or sffamily family family name sets the font family attribute to the given family name The command has the same effect as family fontfamily family name The family name is normally a somewhat cryptic abbreviation of a font family name that installed somewhere on the system For example the family name for Times happens to be ptm No one can remember these names so it s perfectly normal if you have to look them up laboriously parent 1 parent list spec
68. color lt 2 3 gt rgb 1 0 0 This text is red on slides 2 and 3 otherwise black end frame For the following commands the effect of an overlay specification is special onslide modifier lt overlay specification gt text The behavior of this command depends on whether the optional argument text is given or not note that the optional argument is given in normal braces not in square brackets If present the modifier can be either a or a If no text is given the following happens All text following this command will only be shown uncovered on the specified slides On non specified slides the text still occupies space If no slides are specified the following text is always shown You need not call this command in the same TFX group its effect transcends block groups However this command has a different effect inside an overprint environment see the description of overprint If the modifier is hidden text will not be treated as covered but as invisible The difference is the same as the difference between uncover and visible The modifier may not be given if no text argument is present Example begin frame Shown on first slide onslide lt 2 3 gt Shown on second and third slide begin itemize item Still shown on the second and third slide onslidet lt 4 gt item Shown from slide 4 on end itemize Shown from slide 4 on onslide Shown on all slides end frame If a text
69. command the part command does not cause any frame or special text to be produced However it is often advisable for the start of a new part to use the command partpage to insert some text into a frame that advertises the beginning of a new part part lt mode specification gt short part name part name Starts a part The part name will be shown when the partpage command is used The short part name is not shown anywhere by default but it is accessible via the command insertshortpart Example 96 begin document frame titlepage section Outlines subsection Part I Review of Previous Lecture frame frametitle Outline of Part I tableofcontents part 1 subsection Part II Today s Lecture frame frametitle Outline of Part II tableof contents part 2 part Review of Previous Lecture frame partpage section Previous Lecture Summary of the Previous Lecture subsection Topics frame subsection Learning Objectives frame part Today s Lecture frame partpage section Topic A frame tableofcontents currentsection subsection Foo frame section Topic B frame tableof contents currentsection subsection bar frame end document partpage Works like titlepage only that the current part not the current presentation is advertised Example frame partpage Beamer Template Color Font part page This template is inv
70. command outside frames are described note options note text Outside frames this command creates a note page This command is not affected by the option notes onlyframeswithnotes see below The following options may be given 199 e itemize will enclose the whole note page in an itemize environment This is just a convenience e enumerate will enclose the whole note page in an enumerate environment Example frame some text note Talk no more than 1 minute note enumerate item Stress this first item Then this ARTICLE Notes are ignored in article mode The following element dictates how the note pages are rendered Beamer Template Color Font note page This template is used to typeset a note page The template should contain a mentioning of the insert insertnote which will contain the note text To squeeze more onto note pages you might consider changing the size of the BEAMER font note page to something small The default is sma11 The following template options are predefined e default The default template shows the last slide in the upper right corner and some hints that should help you match a note page to the slide that is currently shown e compress The option produces an output that is similar to the default only more fits onto each note page at the price of legibility e plain Just inserts the note text no fancy hints The following two inserts are useful for note
71. description see these for details Also the default action specification can be set using the command beamerdefaultoverlayspecification see below Example begin frame begin actionenv lt 2 alert 3 4 6 gt This text is shown the same way as the text below end actionenv begin uncoverenv lt 2 gt begin alertenv lt 3 4 6 gt This text is shown the same way as the text above end falertenv end uncoverenv end frame action lt action specification gt text This has the same effect as putting text in an actionenv Example action lt alert 2 gt Could also have used texttt string alert lt 2 gt char char beamerdefaultoverlayspecification default overlay specification Locally sets the default overlay specification to the given value This overlay specification will be used in every actionenv environment and every item that does not have its own overlay specification The main use of this command is to install an incremental overlay specification like lt gt or lt alert gt see Section 9 6 4 Usually the default overlay specification is installed automatically by the optional arguments to frame frame itemize enumerate and description You will only have to use this command if you wish to do funny things If given outside any frame this command sets the default overlay specification for all following frames for which you do not override the default overlay specification
72. do not wish to have the frame title shown on a zoomed slide you can add an overlay specification to the frametitle command that simply suppresses the title for the slide Also by using the plain option you can have the zoomed slide fill the whole page Example A simple case begin frame frametitle A Complicated Picture framezoom lt 1 gt lt 2 gt Ocm 0cm 2cm 1 5cm framezoom lt 1 gt lt 3 gt 1cm 3cm 2cm 1 5cm framezoom lt 1 gt lt 4 gt 3cm 2cm 3cm 2cm pgf image height 8cm complicatedimagefilename end frame Example A more complicate case in which the zoomed parts completely fill the frames begin frame lt 1 gt label zooms frametitle lt 1 gt A Complicated Picture framezoom lt 1 gt lt 2 gt border Ocm 0Ocm 2cm 1 5cm framezoom lt 1 gt lt 3 gt border 1cm 3cm 2cm 1 5cm framezoom lt 1 gt lt 4 gt border 3cm 2cm 3cm 2cm pgf image height 8cm complicatedimagefilename end frame againframe lt 2 gt plain zooms 109 12 Structuring a Presentation The Local Structure IAT X provides different commands for structuring text locally for example via the itemize environment These environments are also available in the BEAMER class although their appearance has been slightly changed Furthermore the BEAMER class also defines some new commands and environments see below that may help you to structure your text 12 1 Itemizations Enumerations and Descriptio
73. during the presentation but never on the transparencies version Likewise frame lt trans 0 gt causes the frame to be suppressed for the handout Finally note that it is possible to give more than one alternate overlay specification and in any order For example the following specification states that the text should be inserted on the first three slides in the presentation in the first two slides of the transparency version and not at all in the handout only lt trans 1 2 1 3 handout 0 gt Text If you wish to give the same specification in all versions you can do so by specifying all as the version For example frame lt all 1 2 gt blah ensures that the frame has two slides in all versions 203 21 Creating Handouts and Lecture Notes During a presentation it is very much desirable that the audience has a handout or even lecture notes available to it A handout allows everyone in the audience to individually go back to things he or she has not understood Always provide handouts as early as possible preferably weeks before the talk Do not retain the handout till the end of the talk The BEAMER package offers two different ways of creating special versions of your talk they are discussed in the following The first easy way is to create a handout version by adding the handout option which will cause the document to be typeset in handout mode It will look like a presentation but it can be printed more easi
74. end 117 block begin 116 block end 117 block example begin 117 block example end 117 button 105 caption 124 caption label separator 125 description item 114 enumerate item 112 enumerate mini template 113 subitem 112 enumerate subsubitem 113 footline 65 footnote 129 frame begin 62 frame end 62 frametitle 73 frametitle continuation 59 headline 63 itemize item 111 itemize subitem 111 itemize subsubitem 111 itemize enumerate body begin 113 itemize enumerate body end 113 logo 73 mini frame 69 mini frame in current subsection 69 mini frame in other subsection 69 navigation symbols 72 note page 200 part page 97 qed symbol 119 quotation begin 128 quotation end 128 quote begin 128 enumerate 241 quote end 128 section in head foot 69 section in head foot shaded 69 section in sidebar 70 sidebar shaded 70 section in toc 94 section in toc shaded 94 canvas left 67 canvas right 68 sidebar left 66 sidebar right 67 structure begin 115 structure end 115 subsection in head foot 70 subsection in head foot shaded 70 subsection in sidebar 70 sidebar shaded 70 subsection in toc 94 subsection in toc shaded 95 subsubsection in head foot 70 subsubsection in head foot shaded 71 subsubsection in sidebar 71 sidebar shaded 71 subsubsection in toc 95 subsubsection in toc shaded 95 theorem begin 120 theorem end 121 title page 92 verse begin 128 ver
75. error where only would not Example begin frame This line is always shown beginfonlyenv lt 2 gt This line is inserted on slide 2 end onlyenv end frame beginfaltenv lt overlay specification gt begin text end text alternate begin text alternate end text lt overlay specification gt environment contents end altenv Only one overlay specification may be given On the specified slides begin text will be inserted at the beginning of the environment and end text will be inserted at the end On all other slides alternate begin text and alternate end text will be used 83 Example begin frame This begin altenv lt 2 gt word end altenv is in round brackets on slide 2 and in square brackets on slide 1 end frame 9 5 Dynamically Changing Text or Images You may sometimes wish to have some part of a frame change dynamically from slide to slide On each slide of the frame something different should be shown inside this area You could achieve the effect of dynamically changing text by giving a list of only commands like this only lt 1 gt Initial text only lt 2 gt Replaced by this on second slide only lt 3 gt Replaced again by this on third slide The trouble with this approach is that it may lead to slight but annoying differences in the heights of the lines which may cause the whole frame to wobble from slide to slide This problem becomes
76. file that is to be included in this way you must create such a file by hand For example if the PostScript file of your presentation version is named main beamer ps and you wish to include the slides with page numbers 2 and 3 you must create single page files main beamer page2 ps and main beamer page3 ps by hand or using some script If these files cannot be found pgf will complain e For new versions of pdflatex pdflatex also looks for the files according to the above naming scheme However if it fails to find them because you have not produced them it uses a special mechanism to directly extract the desired page from the presentation file main beamer pdf 21 3 Details on Modes This subsection describes how modes work exactly and how you can use the mode command to control what part of your text belongs to which mode When BEAMER typesets your text it is always in one of the following five modes e beamer is the default mode e second is the mode used when a slide for an optional second screen is being typeset handout is the mode for creating handouts e trans is the mode for creating transparencies e article is the mode when control has been transferred to another class like article cls Note that the mode is also article if control is transferred to say book cls In addition to these modes BEAMER recognizes the following names for modes sets e all refers to all modes e presentation refers to the first
77. fragile singleslide only for the plain fragile The frame environment name is used to determine the end of the scanning when gathering the frame con tents Normally the frame ends when a line reading end frame is reached However if you use begin frame inside another environment you need to use this option Example newenvironment slide 1 begin frame fragile environment slide frametitle 1 end frame begin slide My title Text end slide If you did not specify the option environment slide in the above example TRX would miss the end of the slide since it does not interpret text while gathering the frame contents label name causes the frame s contents to be stored under the name name for later resumption using the command againframe Furthermore on each slide of the frame a label with the name name lt slide number gt is created On the first slide furthermore a label with the name name is created so the labels name and name lt 1 gt point to the same slide Note that labels in general and these labels in particular can be used as targets for hyperlinks You can use this option together with fragile plain causes the headlines footlines and sidebars to be suppressed This is useful for creating single frames with different head and footlines or for creating frames showing big pictures that completely fill the frame Example A frame with a picture completely filling the fram
78. greater than p The default element theme is quite sober The only extravagance is the fact that a little triangle is used in itemize environments instead of the usual dot 159 In some cases the theme will honor background color specifications for elements For example if you set the background color for block titles to green block titles will have a green background The background specifications are currently honored for the following elements e Title author institute and date fields in the title page e Block environments both for the title and for the body This list may increase in the future useinnertheme circles Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem 7 5 Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria O Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p O Results Proof of the Main Theorem In this theme itemize and enumerate items start with a small circle Likewise entries in the table of contents start with circles useinnertheme rectangles Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proo
79. gt tezt dstep This just advances the counter beamerpauses by one It has no other effect vstep Same as dstep restep tezt Same as step but the tezt is shown on the same slide as the previous step command This is imple mented by first decreasing the counter beamerpauses by one before calling step reswitch alternate text text Like restep only for the switch command rebstep text Like restep only for the bstep command redstep This command has no effect revstep This command has no effect boxedsteps Temporarily for the current TEX group changes the effect of step to issue an uncover even if used inside a stepwise environment nonboxedsteps Temporarily for the current TFX group changes the effect of step to issue an only even if used inside a parstepwise environment code tezt Typesets the argument using a boldface typewriter font codeswitch Switches to a boldface typewriter font 231 25 Translating Strings 25 1 Introduction 25 1 1 Overview of the Package The TRANSLATOR package is a ATEX package that provides a flexible mechanism for translating individual words into different languages For example it can be used to translate a word like figure into say the German word Abbildung Such a translation mechanism is useful when the author of some package would like to localize the package such that texts are correctly translated into t
80. i lt lt uncover lt 3 gt alert lt 3 gt for int j i j lt 100 uncover lt 3 gt alert lt 3 gt is_prime j false j i uncover lt 2 gt alert lt 0 gt uncover lt 1 gt alert lt 0 gt return 0 uncover lt 1 gt alert lt 0 gt end semiverbatim visible lt 4 gt Note the use of alert texttt std end frame The visible command does nearly the same as uncover A difference occurs if the command setbeamercovered transpar has been used to make covered text transparent instead visible still makes the text completely invisible on non specified slides Euclid has the feeling that the naming convention is a bit strange but cannot quite pinpoint the problem 26 3 14 Changing the Way Things Look I Theming With the contents of this talk fixed Euclid decides to have a second look at the way things look He goes back to the beginning and finds the line usetheme Warsaw By substituting other cities he notices that these cities seem to have in common that there has been a workshop or conference on theoretical computer science there at which always the same person had a paper attended or gave a talk Euclid can change the way his presentation is going to look He decides to choose some theme that is reasonably simple but since his talk is not too short shows a bit of navigational information He settles on the Frankfurt theme but decides that the light dark c
81. icon of any frame other than the current frame the presentation will jump to the first slide of the frame you clicked on e If you click on the current frame and you are not on the last slide of this frame you will jump to the last slide of the frame e If you click on the current frame and you are on the last slide you will jump to the first slide of the frame By the above rules you can e Jump to the beginning of a frame from somewhere else by clicking on it once e Jump to the end of a frame from somewhere else by clicking on it twice e Skip the rest of the current frame by clicking on it once We also tried making a jump to an already visited frame jump automatically to the last slide of this frame However this turned out to be more confusing than helpful With the current implementation a double click always brings you to the end of a slide regardless from where you come from Parent Beamer Template mini frames This parent template has the children mini frame and mini frame in current subsection Example setbeamertemplate mini frames box The following template options are predefined e default shows small circles as mini frames 68 e box shows small rectangles as mini frames e tick shows small vertical bars as mini frames Beamer Template Color Font mini frame The template is used to render the mini frame of the current frame in a navigation bar The width of the template is ignored Instead
82. language version This command currently only prints a message in the log files The format is the same as for AT X s ProvidesPackage command 235 Dictionaries are stored in a decentralized manner A special dictionary for a package will typically be stored somewhere in the vicinity of the package For this reasons TRANSLATOR needs to be told which kinds of dictionaries should be loaded and which languages should be used This is accomplished using the following two commands usedictionary kind This command tells the translator package that at the beginning of the document it should load all dictionaries of kind kind for the languages used in the document Note that the dictionaries are not loaded immediately but only at the beginning of the document If no dictionary of the given kind exists for one of the language nothing bad happens Invocations of this command accumulate that is you can call it multiple times for different dictionaries uselanguage list of languages This command tells the translator package that it should load the dictionaries for all languages in the list of languages The dictionaries are loaded at the beginning of the document Here is an example of how all of this works Suppose you wish to create a new package for drawing say chess boards Let us call this package chess In the file chess sty we could now write the following This is chess sty RequirePackage translator
83. language For example when the TRANSLATOR looks for the translation for a key in Austrian the language path starts with Austrian followed by German Then a dictionary for Austrian only needs to provide translations for those keys where Austrian differs from German 25 2 4 Dictionaries The translations of keys are typically provided by dictionaries A dictionary contains the translations of a specific set of keys into a specific language For example a dictionary might contain the translations of the names of months into the language German Another dictionary might contain the translations of the numbers into French 25 3 Usage 25 3 1 Basic Usage Here is a typical example of how to use the package 233 documentclass german article usepackage babel usepackage some package that uses translator begin document end document As can be seen things really happen behind the scenes so typically you do not really need to do anything It is the job of other package to load the TRANSLATOR package to load the dictionaries and to request translations of keys 25 3 2 Providing Translations There are several commands to tell the TRANSLATOR package what the translation of a given key is As said before as a normal author you typically need not provide such translations explicitly they are loaded automatically However there are two situations in which you need to provide translations 1 You do not like the existing t
84. lists piecewise Emphasis is an important part of creating structure Use Nalert to highlight important things This can be a single word or a whole sentence However do not overuse highlighting since this will negate the effect Use columns Never use footnotes They needlessly disrupt the flow of reading Either what is said in the footnote is important and should be put in the normal text or it is not important and should be omitted especially in a presentation Use quote or quotation to typeset quoted text Do not use the option allowframebreaks except for long bibliographies Do not use long bibliographies Writing the Text Use short sentences Prefer phrases over complete sentences For example instead of The figure on the left shows a Turing machine the figure on the right shows a finite automaton try Left A Turing machine Right A finite automaton Even better turn this into an itemize or a description Punctuate correctly no punctuation after phrases complete punctuation in and after complete sentences Never use a smaller font size to fit more on a frame Never ever use the evil option shrink Do not hyphenate words If absolutely necessary hyphenate words by hand using the command Break lines by hand using the command Do not rely on automatic line breaking Break where there is a logical pause For example good breaks in the tape alphabet is larger than the input alphabe
85. matter whether they are given but it s a good practice and perhaps Euclid might need these numbers some other time An alternative would be nested itemize begin frame frametitle What s Still To Do begin itemize item Answered Questions begin itemize item How many primes are there end itemize item Open Questions begin itemize 24 item Is every even number the sum of two primes end itemize end itemize end frame Pondering on the problem some more Euclid decides that it would be even nicer to have the Answered Questions on the left and the Open Questions on the right so as to create a stronger visual contrast For this he uses the columns environment Inside this environment column commands create new columns begin frame frametitle What s Still To Do begin columns column 5 textwidth begin block Answered Questions How many primes are there end block column 5 textwidth begin block Open Questions Is every even number the sum of two primes end block end columns end frame Trying this he is not quite satisfied with the result as the block on the left has a different height than the one on the right He thinks it would be nicer if they were vertically top aligned So he adds the t option to the columns environment Euclid is somewhat pleased to find out that a pause at the end of the first column allows him to uncover the second column only
86. may be given e autostart Causes the movie to start playing immediately when the page is shown At most one movie can be started in this way The viewer application will typically be able to show at most one movie at the same time anyway When the page is no longer shown the movie immediately stops This can be a problem if you use the movie command to include a sound that should be played on after the page has been closed In this case the sound command must be used e borderwidth T X dimension Causes a border of thickness TX dimension to be drawn around the movie Some versions of the Acrobat Reader seem to have a bug and do not display this border if is smaller than 0 5bp about 0 51pt e depth T X dimension Overrides the depth of the poster text box and sets it to the given dimension e duration time s Specifies in seconds how long the movie should be shown The time may be a fractional value and must be followed by the letter s For example duration 1 5s will show the movie for one and a half seconds In conjunction with the start option you can cut out a part of a movie for display e externalviewer As explained above this causes an external application to be launched for displaying the movie in a separate window Most options like duration or loop have no effect since they are not passed along to the viewer application e height T X dimension Overrides the height of the poster text box and sets it to t
87. number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem A not too sober theme with navigation that does not dominate Singapore is located in south eastern Asia It hosted COCOON 2002 usetheme Szeged Example Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number Th f ductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number E E EE With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof o aos 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number E 56 A sober theme with a strong dominance of horizontal lines Szeged is on the south border of Hungary It hosted DLT 2003 15 6 Presentation Themes with Section and Subsection Tables usetheme Copenhagen Example There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Larg
88. on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Installs a white on dark palette for the headline footline and sidebar The backgrounds used there are set to shades between the structure BEAMER color and black The foreground is set to white While this color theme can appear to be aggressive you should note that a dark bar at the border of a frame will have a somewhat different appearance during a presentation than it has on paper During a presentation the projection on the wall is usually surrounded by blackness Thus a dark bar will not create a contrast as opposed to the way it does on paper Indeed using this theme will cause the main part of the frame to be more at the focus of attention The counterpart to the theme with respect to blocks is the orchid theme However pairing it with the rose color theme is also interesting usecolortheme seahorse Example 182 Deer ee tsare There Is No Largest Prime Number E a es The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number A With an introduction to a new proof technique pei Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main T
89. options see below Example Assume that MetaPost has created files called gra 0 gra 1 and gra 2 You can then create frame consisting of three slides that incrementally show the graphic as follows begin frame nultiinclude gra end frame The effect of providing a default overlay specification is the following First no pause command is inserted between graphics Instead each graphic is surrounded by an actionenv environment with the overlay specification set to default overlay specification Example You can create the same effect as in the previous example using multiinclude lt gt gra Example For a more interesting usage of the default overlay specification consider the following usage multiinclude lt alert gt gra This will always paint the most recently added part of the graphic in red assuming you do not use special colors in the graphic itself Example In order to have each graphic completely replace the previous one you could use multiinclude lt gt gra The following options may be given these are the same as for the original command from the ppower4 package e pause command replaces the default pausing command pause by command If a default overlay specification is given the default pausing command is empty otherwise it is pause Note that commands like pauselevel are not available in beamer e graphics options passes the options to the includegraphics comm
90. or the as in a title or you always use the normal lowercase letters Do not mix this stick to one rule The same is true for block titles For example do not use titles like A short Review of Turing machines Either use A Short Review of Turing Machines or A short review of Turing machines Turing is still spelled with a capital letter since it is a name In English the title of the whole document should be capitalized regardless of whether you capitalize anything else In German and other languages that have lots of capitalized words always use the correct upper lowercase letters Never capitalize anything in addition to what is usually capitalized How Much Can I Put On a Frame A frame with too little on it is better than a frame with too much on it A usual frame should have between 20 and 40 words The maximum should be at about 80 words Do not assume that everyone in the audience is an expert on the subject matter Even if the people listening to you should be experts they may last have heard about things you consider obvious several years ago You should always have the time for a quick reminder of what exactly a semantical complexity class or an w complete partial ordering is Never put anything on a slide that you are not going to explain during the talk not even to impress anyone with how complicated your subject matter really is However you may explain things that are not on a slide
91. pagebreak lt presentation gt and noframebreak is a shorthand for nopagebreak lt presentation gt The use of this option is evil In a good presentation you prepare each slide carefully and think twice before putting something on a certain slide rather than on some different slide Using the allowframebreaks option invites the creation of horrible endless presentations that resemble more a paper projected on the wall than a presentation Nevertheless the option does have its uses Most noticeably it can be convenient for automatically splitting bibliographies or long equations Example begin frame allowframebreaks References begin thebibliography XX bibitem bibitem bibitem end thebibliography end frame Example begin frame allowframebreaks allowdisplaybreaks A Long Equation beginfalign zeta 2 amp 1 1 4 1 9 cdots amp AN amp pi 2 6 end align end frame b c t will cause the frame to be vertically aligned at the bottom center top This overrides the global placement policy which is governed by the class options t and c fragile singleslide tells BEAMER that the frame contents is fragile This means that the frame contains text that is not interpreted as usual For example this applies to verbatim text which is obviously interpreted somewhat differently from normal text If a frame contains fragile text different internal mechanisms are
92. particular predefined option name Thus if someone calls setbeamertemplate for this predefined option name the given argument for children is used For other predefined option names a possibly different definition is used You can imaging that leaving 172 out the optional predefined option name means this argument for children applies to all predefined option names that have not been specially defined differently 173 17 Colors BEAMER s color management allows you to specify the color of every element like say the color of the section entries in a table of contents or say the color of the subsection entries in a mini table of contents in a sidebar While the system is quite powerful it is not trivial to use To simplify the usage of the color system you should consider using a predefined color theme which takes care of everything for you In the following color themes are explained first The rest of the section consists of explanations of how the color management works internally You will need to read these sections only if you wish to write your own color themes or if you are quite happy with the predefined themes but you absolutely insist that displayed mathematical text simply has to be typeset in a lovely pink 17 1 Color Themes In order to also show the effect of the different color themes on the sidebar in the following examples the color themes are used together with the outer theme sidebar 17 1 1
93. possibility of such damages 7 4 5 Maintenance of The Work The Work has the status author maintained if the Copyright Holder explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice in the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright Holder or simply that it is author maintained The Work has the status maintained if there is a Current Maintainer who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to receive error reports for the Work for example by supplying a valid e mail address It is not required for the Current Maintainer to acknowledge or act upon these error reports The Work changes from status maintained to unmaintained if there is no Current Maintainer or the person stated to be Current Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means of communication for a period of six months and there are no other significant signs of active maintenance You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role If the Work is unmaintained you can become the Current Maintainer of the Work through the following steps 54 1 Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer and the Copyright Holder if the two differ through the means of an Internet or similar search 2 If this search is successful then enquire whether the Work is still maintained a If it is being maintained then ask th
94. possible to inherit from another BEAMER color in a more sophisticated way which is more like using the other BEAMER color in an indirect way You can specify that say the background of the title should be a 90 of the background of normal text and 10 of the foreground of structure Inheritance and using of other BEAMER colors is done dynamically This means that if one of the parent BEAMER colors changes during the presentation the derived colors automatically also change The default color theme which is always loaded installs numerous BEAMER colors and inheritance relations between them These colors are explained throughout this guide The color used for say frametitles is discussed in the section on frametitles and so on 17 2 2 Using Beamer s Colors A BEAMER color is not a normal color as defined by the color and xcolor packages and accordingly cannot be used directly as in commands like color or colorlet Instead in order to use a BEAMER color you should first call the command usebeamercolor which is explained below This command will setup two normal colors called fg for foreground and bg for well guess what You can then say color fg to install the foreground color and color bg to install the background color You can also use the colors fg and bg in any context in which you normally use a color like say red If a BEAMER color does not have a foreground or a background the colors fg or bg or both remain un
95. puts the sidebar on the left side Note that in a left to right reading culture this is the side people look first Note also that this table of contents is usually not the most important part of the frame so you do not necessarily want people to look at it first Nevertheless it is the default right puts the sidebar of the right side width dimension specifies the width of the sidebar If it is set to Opt it is completely suppressed The default is 2 5 base line heights of the frame title font useoutertheme split Example Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number This theme installs a headline in which on the left the sections of the talk are shown and on the right the subsections of the current section If the class option compress has been given the sections and subsections will be put in one line normally there is one line per section or subsection The footline shows the a
96. rapid succession first you immediately end up at the correct position and second the button s label can give the audience a visual feedback of what exactly will be skipped For example when you press a skip button labeled Skip proof nobody will start puzzling over what he or she has missed You can add an appendix to your talk The appendix is kept perfectly separated from the main talk Only once you enter the appendix part presumably by hyperjumping into it does the appendix structure become visible You can put all frames that you do not intend to show during the normal course of your talk but which you would like to have handy in case someone asks into this appendix You can add goto buttons and return buttons to create detours Pressing a goto button will jump to a certain part of the presentation where extra details can be shown In this part there is a return button present on each slide that will jump back to the place where the goto button was pressed In BEAMER you can use the againframe command to continue frames that you previously started somewhere but where certain details have been suppressed You can use the againframe command at a much later point for example only in the appendix to show additional slides there In BEAMER you can use the framezoom command to create links to zoomed out parts of a complicated slide Using Graphics Graphics often convey concepts or ideas much mor
97. single color to every element of a presentation is not such a good idea First of all we sometimes want colors of elements to change during a presentation like the color of the item indicators when they become alerted or inside an example block Second some elements naturally have two colors namely a foreground and a background but not always Third sometimes elements somehow should not have any special color but should simply run along with the color of their surrounding Finally giving a special color to every element makes it very hard to globally change colors like changing all the different kind of blue things into kind of red things and it makes later extensions even harder 183 For all these reasons the color of an element in BEAMER is a structured object which we call a BEAMER color Every BEAMER color has two parts a foreground and a background Either of these may be empty which means that whatever foreground or background was active before should remain active when the color is used BEAMER colors can inherit from other BEAMER colors and the default themes make extensive use of this feature For example there is a BEAMER color called structure and all sorts of elements inherit from this color Thus if someone changes structure the color of all these elements automatically change accordingly When a color inherits from another color it can nevertheless still override only the foreground or the background It is also
98. slides by hand that is by pressing a forward button it typically takes at least a second for the next slide to show More lively animations can be created by relying on a capability of the viewer program Some programs support showing slides only for a certain number of seconds during a presentation for the Acrobat Reader this 135 works only in full screen mode By setting the number of seconds to zero you can create a rapid succession of slides To facilitate the creation of animations using this feature the following commands can be used animate and Nanimatevalue animate lt overlay specification gt The slides specified by overlay specification will be shown as quickly as possible Example begin frame frametitle A Five Slide Animation animate lt 2 4 gt The first slide is shown normally When the second slide is shown presumably after pressing a forward key the second third and fourth slides flash by At the end the content of the fifth slide is shown code for creating an animation with five slides end frame ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode animatevalue lt start slide end slide gt name start value end value The name must be the name of a counter or a dimension It will be varied between two values For the slides in the specified range the counter or dimension is set to an interpolated value that depends on the current slide number
99. start with its kind The kind tells TRANSLATOR which kind of keys the dictionary contains For example the dictionaries of the kind translator months dictionary contain keys like January note that this is a key not a translation Following the kind the name of a dictionary must have a dash Then comes the language for which the dictionary file provides translations Finally the file name must end with dict To continue the example of the month dictionary for the German language the dictionary is called translator months dictionary German dict Its contents is the following ProvidesDictionary translator months dictionary German providetranslation January Januar providetranslation February Februar providetranslation March M arz providetranslation April April providetranslation May Mai providetranslation June Juni providetranslation July Juli providetranslation August August providetranslation September September providetranslation October Oktober providetranslation November November providetranslation December Dezember Note that the providetranslation command does not need the option to German Inside a dictionary file TRANSLATOR will always set the default translation language to the language provided by the dictionary However you can still specify the language if you prefer The ProvidesDictionary command currently only prints a message in the log files ProvidesDictionary kind
100. stuff explaining more on the second matter The fourth slide is identical to the first two slides except that the third point is now highlighted Example Mframe lt 1 gt label Cantor frametitle Main Theorem begin Theorem alpha lt 27 alpha for all ordinals alpha end Theorem 107 beginfoverprint onslide lt 1 gt hyperlink Cantor lt 2 gt beamergotobutton Proof details onslide lt 2 gt this is only shown in the appendix where this frame is resumed begin proof As shown by Cantor end proof hfill hyperlink Cantor lt 1 gt beamerreturnbutton Return end overprint appendix againframe lt 2 gt Cantor In this example the proof details are deferred to a slide in the appendix Hyperlinks are setup so that one can jump to the proof and go back ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode 11 3 Adding Anticipated Zooming Anticipated zooming is necessary when you have a very complicated graphic that you are not willing to simplify since indeed all the complex details merit an explanation In this case use the command framezoon It allows you to specify that clicking on a certain area of a frame should zoom out this area You can then explain the details Clicking on the zoomed out picture will take you back to the original one framezoom lt button overlay specification gt lt zoomed overlay specification gt options upper left x upper left y zoom a
101. tex delete the first line which sets the document class e Create a file named say main beamer tex with the following content documentclass ignorenonframetext beamer input main tex e Create an extra file named say main article tex with the following content 206 documentclass article usepackage beamerarticle setjobnamebeamerversion main beamer input main tex e You can now run pdflatex or latex on the two files main beamer tex and main article tex The command setjobnamebeamerversion tells the article version where to find the presentation version This is necessary if you wish to include slides from the presentation version in an article as figures setjobnamebeamerversion filename without extension Tells the BEAMER class where to find the presentation version of the current file 21 2 3 Including Slides from the Presentation Version in the Article Version If you use the package beamerarticle the frame command becomes available in article mode By adjusting the frame template you can mimic the appearance of frames typeset by BEAMER in your articles However sometimes you may wish to insert the real thing into the article version that is a precise screenshot of a slide from the presentation The commands introduced in the following help you do exactly this In order to include a slide from your presentation in your article version you must do two things First you must place a no
102. than getting neither the main message nor the detail across In many situations a quick appraisal of how much time you have will show that you won t be able to mention certain details Knowing this can save you hours of work on preparing slides that you would have to remove later anyway 5 1 2 Global Structure To create the global structure of a presentation with the time constraints in mind proceed as follows e Make a mental inventory of the things you can reasonably talk about within the time available e Categorize the inventory into sections and subsections e For very long talks like a 90 minute lecture you might also divide your talk into independent parts like a review of the previous lecture part and a main part using the Apart command Note that each part has its own table of contents e Do not feel afraid to change the structure later on as you work on the talk Parts Section and Subsections e Do not use more than four sections and not less than two per part Even four sections are usually too much unless they follow a very easy pattern Five and more sections are simply too hard to remember for the audience After all when you present the table of contents the audience will not yet really be able to grasp the importance and relevance of the different sections and will most likely have forgotten them by the time you reach them e Ideally a table of contents should be understandable by itself In pa
103. that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow 43 7 2 2 Terms and Conditions For Copying Distribution and Modification 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying dist
104. the and command which is used to separate several authors nor the inst command which just makes its argument a superscript 20 3 4 The Title Page Frame The next thing in the file that seems interesting is where the first frame is created right after the begin document begin frame titlepage end frame In BEAMER a presentation consists of a series of frames Each frame in turn may consist of several slides if there is more than one they are called overlays Normally everything between begin frame and end frame is put on a single slide No page breaking is performed So Euclid infers that the first frame is filled by the title page which seems quite logical 3 5 Creating the Presentation PDF File Eager to find out how the first page will look he invokes pdflatex on his file main tex twice He could also use latex twice followed by dvips and then possibly ps2pdf or lualatex twice or xelatex twice Then he uses the Acrobat Reader xpdf evince or okular to view the resulting main pdf Indeed the first page contains all the information Euclid has provided until now It even looks quite impressive with the colorful title and the rounded corners and the shadows but he is doubtful whether he should leave it like that He decides to address this problem later Euclid is delighted to find out that clicking on a section or subsection in the navigation bar at the top hyperjumps there Also the small
105. the Article Version 21 3 Detailsion Modest La E A EA A e ate Ge A a ho Ok e e 22 Taking Advantage of Multiple Screens 22 1 Showing Notes on the Second Screen 22 2 Showing Second Mode Material on the Second Screen oo e 22 3 Showing the Previous Slide on the Second Screen 2 2 e V Howtos 23 How To Uncover Things Piecewise 23 1 Uncovering an Enumeration Piecewise o e 23 2 Highlighting the Current Item in an Enumeration 0 0 000000 23 3 Changing Symbol Before an Enumeration 2 0 ee 23 4 Uncovering Tagged Formulas Piecewise 2 e 23 5 Uncovering a TablesRowwis gt eae ii e Boe a oa eae de a bee ee E 23 6 Uncovering a Table Columnwise 2 2 196 198 199 199 200 201 203 204 204 204 204 206 207 208 211 211 211 213 24 How To Import Presentations Based on Other Packages and Classes 219 24 1 Prosper HA Prosper and Powerdot 0 ee 219 DA ID SEMA AS oo A A de Eh Oe he A E A A 224 DAS S s BOLAS ta A DNA A a BS A AAN IS 227 24A TEX Power a I a e e RT ey ADA E dt 230 25 Translating Strings 232 25 1 Antroductions se rd a aa E A ee BE APS A al ee 232 20 131 Overview of the Packages eck a a Me ee SS ES 232 25 1 2 How to Read This Section 4 4 6 6 4 44 Fu dae Re ee ee ee 232 201 3 COMTE lak Ghd E E ted 232 25 14 Installation jai op A Ake y BAS Aa Re ae a PEN eS A eh e I A 232 25 2 Basie Concepts oa aed ee
106. the Work you should immediately provide within the Work a prominent and unambiguous statement of your status as Current Maintainer You should also announce your new status to the same pertinent community as in 2b above 7 4 6 Whether and How to Distribute Works under This License This section contains important instructions examples and recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their works under this license These authors are addressed as you in this section 7 4 7 Choosing This License or Another License If for any part of your work you want or need to use distribution conditions that differ significantly from those in this license then do not refer to this license anywhere in your work but instead distribute your work under a different license You may use the text of this license as a model for your own license but your license should not refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that your work is distributed under the LPPL The document modguide tex in the base ATEX distribution explains the motivation behind the conditions of this license It explains for example why distributing TFX under the GNU General Public License GPL was considered inappropriate Even if your work is unrelated to IXT X the discussion in modguide tex may still be relevant and authors intending to distribute their works under any license are encouraged to read it 7 4 8 A Recommendation on Modification Without
107. the boxes in the headline and in the footline You can add a template for another box by using the following commands 145 addheadbox beamer color H box template Each time this command is invoked a new box is added to the head line with the first added box being shown on the left All boxes will have the same size The beamer color will be used to setup the foreground and background colors of the box Example addheadbox section in head foot tiny quad 1 Box addheadbox structure tiny quad 2 Box A similar effect as the above commands can be achieved by directly installing a head template that contains two beamercolorboxes setbeamertemplate headline leavevmode begin beamercolorbox width 5 paperwidth section in head foot tiny quad 1 Box end beamercolorbox begin beamercolorbox width 5 paperwidth structure tiny quad 2 Box end beamercolorbox While being more complicated the above commands offer more flexibility addfootbox beamer color boxr template Example addfootbox section in head foot tiny quad 1 Box addfootbox structure tiny quad 2 Box usetheme options Bergen Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Weka Euklid of Alexandria MESCE There is no largest prime number CT LAA Department of Mathematics Proof Uni
108. the fourth This is slide number 5 A useful specification is just lt 0 gt which causes the frame to have no slides at all For example begin frame lt handout 0 gt causes the frame to be suppressed in the handout version but to be shown normally in all other versions Another useful specification is lt beamer gt which causes the frame to be shown normally in beamer mode but to be suppressed in all other versions 77 9 Creating Overlays 9 1 The Pause Commands The pause command offers an easy but not very flexible way of creating frames that are uncovered piecewise If you say pause somewhere in a frame only the text on the frame up to the pause command is shown on the first slide On the second slide everything is shown up to the second pause and so forth You can also use pause inside environments its effect will last after the environment However taking this to extremes and using pause deeply within a nested environment may not have the desired result A much more fine grained control over what is shown on each slide can be attained using overlay specifications see the next sections However for many simple cases the pause command is sufficient The effect of pause lasts till the next pause onslide or the end of the frame begin frame begin itemize item Shown from first slide on pause item Shown from second slide on begin itemize item Shown from second slide on pause item Shown f
109. the framesassubsections options is specified e template text is ignored Example The following two texts have the same effect begin slide trans Glitter toc short A Title Hi end slide and subsection short omitted if framesassubsections is not specified begin frame fragile singleslide transglitter 221 frametitle A Title Hi end frame overlays number slide environment This will put the slide environment into a frame that does not have the fragile option and which can hence contain overlayed text The number is ignored since the number of necessary overlays is computed automatically by BEAMER Example The following code fragments have the same effect overlays 2 begin slide A Title begin itemstep item Hi item Ho end itemstep end slide and subsection A Title omitted if framesassubsections is not specified begin frame frametitle A Title begin itemstep item Hi item Ho end itemstep end frame fromSlide slide number text This is mapped to uncover lt slide number gt text fromSlide slide number H text This is mapped to only lt slide number gt 1 text y onlySlide slide number text This is mapped to uncover lt slide number gt text onlySlide slide number text This is mapped to only lt slide number gt tezxt untilSlide slide number H text This is mapped to uncover lt slid
110. the sections Inside the circles the section number is shown The BEAMER font and color section number projected is used for typesetting the circles that is the circle gets the background color and the text inside the circle the foreground color e square Similar to the circle option except that small squares are used instead of circles Small unnumbered squares are shown in front of the subsections e ball Like square the only difference being the balls are used instead of squares e ball unnumbered Similar to ball except that no numbering is used This option makes the table of contents look more like an itemize If none of the above options suits you you have to change the templates section in toc and subsection in toc directly 100 Parent Beamer Template section subsection in toc shaded A parent template with children section in toc shaded and subsection in toc shaded They are used to render section and subsection entries when they are currently shaded like all non current subsections in tableofcontents currentsubsection The following template options are predefined e default opaqueness In the default setting the templates section in toc shaded and subsection in toc shaded just show whatever the nonshaded versions of these templates show but only opaqueness opaque The default is 20 Example setbeamertemplate section in toc shaded default 50 makes dimmed entries 50 transparent 10 6 Adding a Bibl
111. the use of this font Indeed the main trouble with the font is that it is not particularly well readable and that math typeset partly using this font looks terrible On the other hand this font does create the impression of a slide written by hand which gives the presentation a natural look Think twice before using this font but do not let yourself be intimidated One of the most important rules of typography is that you should use as little fonts as possible in a text In particular typographic wisdom dictates that you should not use more than two different families on one page However when typesetting mathematical text it is often necessary and useful to use different font families For example it used to be common practice to use Gothic letters to denote vectors Also program texts are often typeset in monospace fonts If your audience is used to a certain font family for a certain type of text use that family regardless of what typographic wisdom says A common practice in typography is to use a sans serif fonts for titles and serif fonts for normal text check your favorite magazine You can also use two different sans serif fonts or two different serif fonts but you then have to make sure that the fonts look sufficiently different If they look only slightly different the page will look somehow strange but the audience will not be able to tell why For example do not mix Arial and Helvetica they are almost identical
112. this will override any leftskip or rightskip setting e center centers the text inside the box Note that this will override any leftskip or rightskip setting e leftskip left skip installs the left skip inside the box as the left skip T X s left skip is a glue that is inserted at the left end of every line See the TRX book for details Note that this will override any left center or right setting e rightskip right skip install the right skip To get a good ragged right border try say Xrightskip 0pt plus 4em Note that this will override any left center or right setting e sep dimension sets the size of extra space around the text This space is added inside the box which means that if you specify a sep of 1cm and insert the box normally into the vertical list then the left border of the box will be aligned with the left border of the slide text while the left border of the text inside the box will be 1cm to the right of this left border Likewise the text inside the box will stop 1cm before the right border of the normal text e colsep dimension sets the extra color separation space around the text This space behaves the same way as the space added by sep only this space is only inserted if the box has a colored background that is if the background of the beamer color is not empty This command can be used together with sep the effects accumulate e colsep dimension sets an extra color separation sp
113. usepackage beamerfoils Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to FOILS commands Use beamer as the document class not foils Example In the following example frames are automatically created The endfoil at the end is needed to close the last frame documentclass beamer usepackage beamerfoils begin document maketitle foilhead First Frame This is on the first frame pagebreak This is on the second frame which is a continuation of the first foilhead Third Frame This is on the third frame endfoil end document Example In this example frames are manually inserted No endfoil is needed documentclass beamer usepackage beamerfoils begin document frame maketitle frame foilhead First Frame This is on the first frame frame foilhead Second Frame This is on the second frame end document In the following the effects of FOILS commands in BEAMER are listed MyLogo logo text This is mapped to logo though the logo is internally stored such that it can be switched on and off using LogoOn and MLogo0ff LogoOn Makes the logo visible LogoOff Makes the logo invisible 228 foilhead dimension frame title If used inside a frame command or frame environment this is mapped to Mframetitlet frame title If used outside any frames a new frame is started with the option allowframebreaks If a frame was previously started u
114. whether the current slide is temporally before the specified slides is one of the specified slides or comes after them If the overlay specification is not an interval that is if it has a hole the hole is considered to be part of the before slides Example temporal lt 3 4 gt Shown on 1 2 Shown on 3 4 Shown 5 6 7 temporal lt 3 5 gt Shown on 1 2 4 Shown on 3 5 Shown 6 7 8 81 As a possible application of the temporal command consider the following example Example def colorize lt 1 gt temporal lt 1 gt color red 50 color black color black 50 begin frame begin itemize colorize lt i gt item First item colorize lt 2 gt item Second item colorize lt 3 gt item Third item colorize lt 4 gt item Fourth item end itemize end frame item lt alert specification gt item label lt alert specification gt PRESEN Only one alert specification may be given The effect of alert specification is described in Section 9 6 3 TATION Example begin frame begin itemize item lt 1 gt First point shown on all slides item lt 2 gt Second point shown on slide 2 and later item lt 2 gt Third point also shown on slide 2 and later item lt 3 gt Fourth point shown on slide 3 end itemize end frame begin frame begin enumerate item lt 3 alert 3 gt 0 A zeroth point shown at the very end item lt 1 alert 1 gt The first an
115. which as the name suggests is behind everything The background is a surprisingly complex object in BEAMER it consists of a background canvas and the main background The background canvas can be imagined as a large area on which everything the main background and everything else is painted on By default this canvas is a big rectangle filling the whole frame whose color is the background of the BEAMER color background canvas Since this color inherits from normal text by changing the background color of the normal text you can change this color of the canvas Example The following command changes the background color to a light red setbeamercolor normal text bg red 20 The canvas need not be monochrome Instead you can install a shading or even make it transparent Making it transparent is a good idea if you wish to include your slides in some other document Example The following command makes the background canvas transparent setbeamercolor background canvas bg Beamer Template Color Font background canvas Color parents normal text The template is inserted behind everything The template should typically be some TEX commands that produce a rectangle of height paperheight and width paperwidth The following template options are predefined e default installs a large rectangle with the background color If the background is empty the canvas is transparent Since background canvas inherits from nor
116. which the letters do not have serifs from French sans which means without Serifs are the little hooks at the ending of the strokes that make up a letter The font you are currently reading is a serif font By comparison this text is in a sans serif font Sans serif fonts are generally considered to be easier to read when used in a presentation In low resolution rendering serifs decrease the legibility of a font However on projectors with very high resolution serif text is just as readable as sans serif text A presentation typeset in a serif font creates a more conservative impression which might be exactly what you wish to create Most likely you ll have a lot of different font families preinstalled on your system The default font used by TFX and BEAMER is the Computer Modern font It is the original font family designed by Donald Knuth himself for the TEX program It is a mature font that comes with just about everything you could wish for extensive mathematical alphabets outline PostScript versions real small caps real oldstyle numbers specially designed small and large letters and so on However there are reasons for using font families other than Computer Modern e The Computer Modern fonts are a bit boring if you have seen them too often Using another font but not Times can give a fresh look e Other fonts especially Times and Helvetica are sometime rendered better since they seem to have better internal hinting
117. width left insert right insert Inserts a horizontal navigation bar containing all sections with the current section highlighted The left insert will be inserted to the left of the sections the right insert to the right By inserting a triple fill a 1111 you can flush the bar to the left or right Example insertsectionnavigationhorizontal 5 textwidth hskipOpt plusifilll insertshortauthor options Inserts the short version of the author into a template The text will be printed in one long line line breaks introduced using the command are suppressed The following options may be given width width causes the text to be put into a multi line minipage of the given size Line breaks are still suppressed by default center centers the text inside the minipage created using the width option rather than having it left aligned respectlinebreaks causes line breaks introduced by the command to be honored Example insertauthor width 3cm center respectlinebreaks Vinsertshortdate options Inserts the short version of the date into a template The same options as for insertshortauthor may be given 64 e insertshortinstitute options Inserts the short version of the institute into a template The same options as for Ninsertshortauthor may be given e insertshortpart options Inserts the short version of the part name into a template The same options as for Ninsertshortauthor m
118. y Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p m Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number A dominant theme with strong colors and dominating rectangular areas The head and footlines give lots of information and leave little space for the actual slide contents This theme is useful for conferences where the audience is not likely to know the title of the talk or who is presenting it The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme The following options may be given e compress causes the mini frames in the headline to use only a single line This is useful for saving space Berlin is the capital of Germany usetheme options Ilmenau Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Th i I rime number Euklid of Alexandria oie ferne lel cest pine eine Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p e Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ
119. 19 translator 238 ucs 19 xcolor 19 xmpmulti 137 page number in head foot color font 66 palette primary color 188 palette quaternary color 188 palette secondary color 188 palette sidebar primary color 188 palette sidebar quaternary color 188 palette sidebar secondary color 188 palette sidebar tertiary color 188 palette tertiary color 188 PaloAlto presentation theme 152 parstepwise 230 part 96 part page template color font 97 partpage 97 pause 78 PDForPS 223 pdfpages package 18 PDFtransition 223 Pittsburgh presentation theme 149 Presentation themes AnnArbor 147 Antibes 149 Bergen 146 Berkeley 151 Berlin 153 Boadilla 146 boxes 145 CambridgeUS 148 Copenhagen 157 Darmstadt 155 default 145 Dresden 154 EastLansing 148 Frankfurt 155 Goettingen 152 Hannover 153 Ilmenau 154 JuanLesPins 150 Luebeck 157 Madrid 147 Malmoe 157 Marburg 152 Montpellier 150 PaloAlto 152 Pittsburgh 149 Rochester 149 Singapore 156 246 Szeged 156 Warsaw 158 previous slide on second screen beamer option 213 professionalfont font theme 191 proof environment 119 prosper class 19 prosperpart 223 ProvidesDictionary 235 providetranslation 234 pstricks package 19 qed symbol template color font 119 quotation color font 128 quotation environment 128 quotation begin template 128 quotation end template 128 quote color font 128 quote enviro
120. 5 e fg color sets the foreground color of beamer color name to the given normal color The color may also be a color expression like red 50 black see the manual of the XCOLOR package Tf color is empty the beamer color name has no special foreground and when the color is used the foreground currently in force should not be changed Specifying a foreground this way will override any inherited foreground color e bg color does the same as the fg option but for the background e parent parent beamer color s specifies that beamer color name should inherit from the specified parent beamer color s Any foreground and or background color set by the parents will also be used when beamer color name is used If multiple parents specify a foreground the last one wins and likewise for the backgrounds Example setbeamercolor father fg red setbeamercolor mother bg green setbeamercolor child parent father mother begin beamercolorbox child Terrible red on green text end beamercolorbox setbeamercolor father fg blue begin beamercolorbox child Now terrible blue on green text since parent was changed end beamercolorbox Note that a change of the foreground or background of a parent changes the corresponding foreground or background of the child unless it is overruled A BEAMER color can not only have parents but also grandparents and so on e use another beamer color is used
121. 8 palette sidebar secondary 188 palette sidebar tertiary 188 palette tertiary 188 part page 97 qed symbol 119 quotation 128 quote 128 section in head foot 69 section in sidebar 70 section in sidebar shaded 70 section in toc 94 section in toc shaded 94 separation line 189 sidebar left 66 sidebar right 67 structure 115 subitem 114 subitem projected 114 subsection in head foot 70 subsection in sidebar 70 subsection in toc 94 subsection in toc shaded 95 subsubitem 114 subsubitem projected 114 subsubsection in head foot 70 subsubsection in sidebar 71 subsubsection in toc 95 subsubsection in toc shaded 95 title page 92 titlelike 188 upper separation line foot 189 upper separation line head 189 verse 128 Beamer elements see Beamer templates colors and fonts Beamer fonts abstract 127 abstract title 127 alerted text 115 background 75 background canvas 75 bibliography entry author 102 bibliography entry location 102 bibliography entry note 102 bibliography entry title 102 bibliography item 102 240 block body 117 block body alerted 117 block body example 118 block title 117 block title alerted 117 block title example 118 button 105 caption 124 caption name 125 description item 114 enumerate item 112 enumerate mini template 113 enumerate subitem 112 enumerate subsubitem 113 example text 188 footline 65 footnote 129 footnote ma
122. 9 beamer Sets aspect ratio to 16 9 and frame size to 160mm by 90mm documentclass aspectratio 149 beamer Sets aspect ratio to 14 9 and frame size to 140mm by 90mm documentclass aspectratio 141 beamer Sets aspect ratio to 1 41 1 and frame size to 148 5mm by 105mm Xdocumentclass laspectratio 54 beamer Sets aspect ratio to 5 4 and frame size to 125mm by 100mm Xdocumentclass laspectratio 43 beamer The default aspect ratio and frame size You need not specify this option Xdocumentclass laspectratio 32 beamer Sets aspect ratio to 3 2 and frame size to 135mm by 90mm Aside from using these options you should refrain from changing the paper size However you can change the size of the left and right margins which default to lcm To change them you should use the following command AXsetbeamersizet options The following options can be given text margin left T X dimension sets a new left margin This excludes the left sidebar Thus it is the distance between the right edge of the left sidebar and the left edge of the text text margin right T X dimension sets a new right margin sidebar width left T X dimension sets the size of the left sidebar Currently this command should be given before a shading is installed for the sidebar canvas sidebar width right T X dimension sets the size of the right sidebar description width TpX dimension sets the default width of desc
123. Collection of Documents You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects You may extract a single document from such a collection and distribute it individually under this License provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document 7 3 8 Aggregating with Independent Works A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit When the Document is included in an aggregate this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate the Document s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate or the electr
124. EAMER but he must add the fragile option to the frame begin frame fragile frametitle An Algorithm For Finding Prime Numbers begin verbatim int main void std vector lt bool gt is_prime 100 true for int i 2 i lt 100 i if is_prime i std cout lt lt i lt lt for int j i j lt 100 is_prime j false j i return 0 end verbatim begin uncoverenv lt 2 gt Note the use of MXverblstd end uncoverenv end frame On second thought Euclid would prefer to uncover part of the algorithm stepwise and to add an emphasis on certain lines or parts of lines He can use package like alltt for this but in simple cases the environment semiverbatim defined by BEAMER is more useful It works like verbatim except that and retain their meaning one can typeset them by using and Euclid might now typeset his algorithm as follows begin frame fragile frametitle An Algorithm For Finding Primes Numbers begin semiverbatim uncover lt i1 gt alert lt 0 gt int main void uncover lt 1 gt alert lt 0 gt uncover lt 1 gt alert lt 1 gt alert lt 4 gt std vector lt bool gt is_prime 100 true uncover lt 1 gt alert lt 1i gt for int i 2 i lt 100 i uncover lt 2 gt alert lt 2 gt if is_prime i uncover lt 2 gt alert lt 0 gt uncover lt 3 gt alert lt 3 gt alert lt 4 gt std cout lt lt
125. For the first language for which this is the case the translation is used If there is no translation available for any language on the path the key itself is used as the translation Example caption translate Figure 2 The following options may be given e tol language This option overrules the language path setting and installs language as the target language s for which TRANSLATOR tries to find a translation 237 translatelet options 14 macro H key This command works like the translate command only it will not insert the translation into the text but will set the macro macro to the translation found by the Ntranslate command Example translatelet localfigure figure 25 3 6 Language Path and Language Substitution Manguagepatht language path This command sets the language path that is searched when TRANSLATOR looks for a key The default value of the language path is languagename English The languagename is the standard TEX macro that expands to the current language Typically this is exactly what you want and there is no real need to change this default language path There is a problem with the names used in the macro languagename These names like ngerman are not the ones used by TRANSLATOR and we somehow have to tell the TRANSLATOR about aliases for cryptic language names like ngerman This is done using the following command Manguagealiast name H language list This command tells the
126. Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete unmodified copy of the Work 53 7 If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work you may distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work as long as the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the Compiled Work and as long as the conditions of Clause 6 above are met with regard to the Derived Work 8 The conditions above are not intended to prohibit and hence do not apply to the modification by any method of any component so that it becomes identical to an updated version of that component of the Work as it is distributed by the Current Maintainer under Clause 4 above 9 Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative format where the Work or that Derived Work in whole or in part is then produced by applying some process to that format does not relax or nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of applying that process 10 a A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in Clause 6 above in regard to the Work though it does not have to honor the rest of the conditions in this license b If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license that Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the restrictions in Clause 6 above concerning changes from the Work
127. International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p RESULTS Proof of the Main Theorem Again this theme does exactly the same as the structurebold font theme only this time text is set using small caps and a serif font The same options as for the structurebold theme are supported See Section 5 6 3 for the pros and cons of using small caps 18 2 Font Changes Made Without Using Font Themes While most font decisions can be made using font themes for historical reasons some changes can only be made using class options or by loading special packages These options are explained in the following Possibly these options will be replaced by themes in the future 18 2 1 Choosing a Font Size for Normal Text As pointed out in Section 5 6 1 measuring the default font size in points is not really a good idea for presentations Nevertheless BEAMER does just that setting the default font size to 11pt as usual This may seem ridiculously small but the actual size of each frame size is by default just 128mm by 96mm and the viewer application enlarges the font By specifying a default font size smaller than 11pt you can put more onto each slide by specifying a larger font size you can fit on less To specify the font size you can use the following class options documentclass 8pt beamer This is way too small Requires that the package extsize is installed documentclass 9pt beamer
128. Largest Prime Number Number ae The proof uses reductio ad absurdum ukli Proat ot the Main Theorem Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p This theme is mainly used to uninstall any block colors setup by another theme restoring the colors used in the default theme In particular using this theme will remove all background colors for blocks usecolortheme orchid Example There ls No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem unes piro There Is No Largest Prime Number Number Era The proof uses reductio ad absurdum root af the Main Theorem There is no largest prime number 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p This theme installs white on dark block titles The background of the title of a normal block is set to the foreground of the structure color the foreground is set to white The background of alerted blocks are set to red and of example blocks to green The body of blocks get a nearly transparent background usecolortheme rose Example eae usgesi nmo There ls No Largest Prime Number
129. MIT s mascot a beaver usecolortheme spruce Example a There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid of Alexandria Theorem Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results There is no largest prime number Proof Proof of the Main Theorem 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p 180 The theme is based on the colors of Michigan State University Theme author Alan Munn 17 1 3 Inner Color Themes Inner color themes only specify the colors of elements used in inner themes Most noticably they specify the colors used for blocks They can be used together with other color themes If they are used to change the inner colors installed by a presentation theme or another color theme they should obviously be specified after the other theme has been loaded Inner color themes happen to have flower names usecolortheme lily Example There ls No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No uagestPrme here Is No
130. On slides before the start slide the counter or dimension is set to start value on the slides after the end slide it is set to end value Example newcount opaqueness begin frame animate lt 2 10 gt animatevalue lt 1 10 gt opaqueness 100 0 begin colormixin the opaqueness averagebackgroundcolor frametitle Fadeout Frame This text and all other frame content will fade out when the second slide is shown This even works with color green 90 black colored alert text end colormixin end frame newcount opaqueness newdimen offset begin frame frametitle Flying Theorems You Really Shouldn t animate lt 2 14 gt animatevalue lt 1 15 gt opaqueness 100 0 animatevalue lt 1 15 gt offset Ocm 5cm begin colormixin the opaqueness averagebackgroundcolor hskip offset begin minipage textwidth begin theorem This theorem flies out end theorem 136 end minipage end colormixin animatevalue lt 1 15 gt opaqueness 0 100 animatevalue lt 1 15 gt offset 5cm Ocm begin colormixin the opaqueness averagebackgroundcolor hskip offset begin minipage textwidth begin theorem This theorem flies in end theorem end minipage end colormixin end frame ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode If your animation graphics reside in individual external graphic files you might also consider using the multiinclude command which is expl
131. Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Foote ite Mar Theorem E E There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics A University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem The example was created using usecolortheme named SeaGreen structure This theme offers a convenient way of changing the color used for structural elements More precisely it just changes the foreground of the BEAMER color structure You can also achieve this by directly invoking the function setbeamercolor but this color theme makes things a bit easier The theme offers several options which can be used to specify the color to be used for structural elements usecolo rgb rgb tuple sets the structure foreground to the specified red green blue tuple The numbers are given as decimals between 0 and 1 For example rgb 0 5 0 0 yields a dark red RGB rgb tuple does the same as rgb except that the numbers range between 0 and 255 For example RGB 128 0 0 yields a dark red cmyk cmyk tuple sets the structure foreground to the specified cyan magenta yellow black tuple The numbers are given as decimals between 0 and 1 For example cmyk 0 1 1 0 5 yields a dark red cmy cmy tuple is similar to cmyk except
132. R included some further themes These themes are still available for compatibility though they are now implemented differently they also mainly install appropriate color font inner and outer themes However they may or may not honor color themes and they will not be supported in the future The following list shows which of the new themes should be used instead of the old themes When switching you may want to use the font theme structurebold with the option onlysma11 Old theme Replacement options none Use compatibility bars Try Dresden instead classic Try Singapore instead lined Try Szeged instead plain Try none or Pittsburgh instead sidebar Try Goettingen for the light version and Marburg for the dark version shadow Try Warsaw instead split Try Malmoe instead tree Try Montpellier and for the bars version Antibes or JuansLesPins 158 16 Inner Themes Outer Themes and Templates This section discusses the inner and outer themes that are available in BEAMER These themes install certain templates for the different elements of a presentation The template mechanism is explained at the end of the section Before we plunge into the details let us agree on some terminology for this section In BEAMER an element is part of a presentation that is potentially typeset in some special way Examples of elements are frame titles the author s name or the footnote sign The appearance of every element is governed by a temp
133. TRANSLATOR that the language name should be replaced by the language in the language list Example languagealias ngerman German Example languagealias german German1997 German For the languages used by the babel package the aliases are automatically setup so you typically do not need to call either languagepath or languagealias 25 3 7 Package Loading Process The TRANSLATOR package is loaded in stages 1 First some package or the document author requests the TRANSLATOR package is loaded 2 The TRANSLATOR package allows options like ngerman to be given These options cause the necessary aliases and the correct TRANSLATOR languages to be requested 3 During the preamble packages and the document author request creating dictionary kinds and certain languages to be used There requests are protocoled 4 At the beginning of the document begin document the requested dictionary language pairs are loaded The first thing that needs to be done is to load the package Typically this is done automatically by some other package but you may wish to include it directly usepackage translator When you load the package you can specify multiple babel languages as options The effect of giving such an option is the following It causes the TRANSLATOR package to call uselanguage for the appropriate translation of the babel language names to TRANSLATOR s language names It also causes languagealias to be called
134. The BEAMER class User Guide for version 3 36 begin frame frametitle There Is No Largest Prime Number framesubtitle The proof uses textit reductio ad absurdum begin theorem There is no largest prime number end theorem begin proof begin enumerate item lt i alert 1 gt Suppose p were the largest prime number item lt 2 gt Let q be the product of the first p numbers item lt 3 gt Then q 1 is not divisible by any of them item lt 1 gt But q 1 is greater than 1 thus divisible by some prime number not in the first p numbers qedhere end fenumerate end proof end frame Results There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Theorem TROIS mo egos oil RUSA There is no largest prime number Proof Suppose p were the largest prime number n Suppose p were the largest prime number Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Q Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p F r alle die die Sch nheit von Wissenschaft anderen zeigen wollen Copyright 2003 2007 by Till Tantau Copyright 2010 2011 by Joseph Wright and Vedran Mileti Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify the documentation under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sec
135. The author s and publisher s of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version 7 3 6 Combining Documents You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents unmodified and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers The combined work need only contain one copy of this License and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different 49 contents make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it in parentheses the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known or else a unique number Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work In the combination you must combine any sections Entitled History in the various original documents forming one section Entitled History likewise combine any sections Entitled Acknowledgements and any sections Entitled Dedications You must delete all sections Entitled Endorsements 7 3 7
136. The last subsection explains how you can get a much more fine grained control over the fonts used for every individual element of a presentation 18 1 Font Themes BEAMER comes with a set of font themes When you use such a theme certain fonts are changed as described below You can use several font themes in concert For historical reasons you cannot change all aspects of the fonts used using font themes in some cases special commands and options are needed which are described in the next subsection The following font themes only change certain font attributes they do not choose special font families although that would also be possible and themes doing just that might be added in the future Currently to change the font family you need to load special packages as explained in the next subsection usefonttheme default Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p The default font theme installs a sans serif font for all text of the presentation The default theme installs different font sizes for things like titles or head and footl
137. University of Michigan Theme author Madhusudan Singh The University of Michigan is located at Ann Arbor usetheme CambridgeUS Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria SERE Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p e Proof of the Main Theorem Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 1 2 Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 2 2 Like Boadilla but using the colors of MIT Theme author Madhusudan Singh usetheme EastLansing Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem EURI LNE ANA There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results e Proof of the Main Theorem Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p co E seneo 1 2 ar 11 zest Priv ner sono 2 2 148 Like Boadilla but using the colors of Michigan State Univers
138. When including this package you must also include the hyperref package Since you will typically want to include hyperref only at the very end of the preamble multimedia will not include hyperref itself However multimedia can be included both before and after hyperref Since BEAMER includes hyperref automatically you need not worry about this when creating a presentation using BEAMER For including an animation in a PDF file you can use the command movie which is explained below Depending on the used options this command will either setup the PDF file such that the viewer application like the Acrobat Reader itself will try to play the movie or that an external program will be called The latter approach though much less flexible must be taken if the viewer application is unable to display the movie itself movie options poster text movie filename This command will insert the movie with the filename movie filename into the PDF file The movie file must reside at some place where the viewer application will be able to find it which is typically only the directory in which the final PDF file resides The movie file will not be embedded into the PDF file in the sense that the actual movie data is part of the main pdf file The movie file must hence be copied and passed along with the PDF file Nevertheless one often says that the movie is embedded in the document but that just means that one can click on the movie when vie
139. Work when that component is used with the Base Interpreter then wherever this component of the Work identi fies itself to the user when used interactively with that Base Interpreter the replacement component of this Derived Work clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version of this component to the user when used interactively with that Base Interpreter b Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices detailing the nature of the changes to that component or a prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log of the changes c No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons including but not limited to the authors of the original version of the Work provide any support including but not limited to the reporting and handling of errors to recipients of the Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly that they do provide such support for the Derived Work d You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work i A complete unmodified copy of the Work if your distribution of a modified component is made by offering access to copy the modified component from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the Work from the same or some similar place meets this condition even though third parties are not compelled to copy the Work along with the modified component ii
140. a background canvas that is in Till s opinion way too stylish But then it is not his intention to press his taste on other people When using this option it is probably a very good idea to also use the lily color theme Example The overlystylish option together with the lily color theme 176 Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem usecolortheme beetle Example Euklid With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There is no largest prime number 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p The main theme behind this theme is to use white and black text on gray background The white text is used for special emphasis the black text for normal text The outer stuff like the headline and the footline use however a bluish color To change this color change the background o
141. ace around the text that is horizontally outside the box This means that if the box has a background this background will protrude by dimension to the left and right of the text but this protruding background will not be taken into consideration by T X for typesetting purposes A typical example usage of this option arises when you insert a box with a colored background in the middle of normal text In this case if the background color is set you would like a background to be drawn behind the text and you would like a certain extra space around this text the background should not stop immediately at the borders of the text this looks silly and you would like the normal text always to be at the same horizontal position independently of whether a background is present or not In this case using colsep 4pt is a good option e shadow true or false draws a shadow behind the box Currently this option only has an effect if used together with the rounded option but that may change e rounded true or false causes the borders of the box to be rounded off if there is a background installed This command internally calls beamerboxesrounded e ignorebg causes the background color of the beamer color to be ignored that is to be treated as if it were set to transparent or empty e vmode causes T X to be in vertical mode when the box starts Normally TeX will be in horizontal mode at the start of the box a leavevmode is insert
142. ach does not work In such cases you can use the pgfpages package which works directly with pdflatex lualatex xelatex and latex plus dvips Note however that this package destroys hyperlinks This is due to fundamental flaws in the PDF specification and it is not likely to change The pgfpages can do all sorts of tricks with pages The most important one for printing BEAMER slides is the following command usepackage pgfpages pgfpagesuselayout resize to a4paper border shrink 5mm landscape This says Resize all pages to landscape A4 pages no matter what their original size was but shrink the pages by 5mm so that there is a bit of a border around everything Naturally instead of a4paper you can also use letterpaper or any of the other standard paper sizes For further options and details see the documentation of pgfpages The second thing you might wish to do is to put several slides on a single page This can be done as follows usepackage pgfpages pgfpagesuselayout 2 on 1 a4paper border shrink 5mm This says Put two pages on one page and then resize everything so that it fits on A4 paper Note that this time we do not need landscape as the resulting page is after all not in landscape mode Instead of 2 on 1 you can also use 4 on 1 but then with landscape once more and also 8 on 1 and even 16 on 1 to get a grand though unreadable overview If you put several slides on one page and if these slides normally have a
143. ackage s superior way of typesetting them In this case you should use the class option professionalfont to suppress any font substitution See Section 18 2 2 for details documentclass prosper If you wish to partly emulate the prosper class using BEAMER please see Section 24 1 usepackage pstricks You should add the option xcolor pst to make xcolor aware of the fact that you are using pstricks documentclass seminar If you wish to emulate the seminar class using BEAMER please see Section 24 2 usepackage texpower You cannot use this package with BEAMER However you might try to use the package beamertexpower instead see Section 24 4 usepackage textpos PRESEN BEAMER automatically installs a white background behind everything unless you install a different back TATION ground template Because of this you must use the overlay option when using textpos so that it will place boxes in front of everything Alternatively you can install an empty background template but this may result in an incorrect display in certain situtations with older versions of the Acrobat Reader usepackage ucs See usepackage utf8 utf8x inputenc usepackage xcolor PRESEN The xcolor package is automatically loaded by beamer cls The same applies as to color TATION documentclass xcolor list of options beamer Causes the list of options to be passed on to the xcolor package When using BEAMER together with the pstricks pac
144. ackage beamerseminar maps some not all commands of the SEMINAR class to appropriate BEAMER commands This way individual slides or whole sets of slides that have been prepared for a presentation using SEMINAR can be used inside BEAMER provided they are reasonably simple None of the emulation layers is a perfect substitute for the original emulations seldom are and it is not intended that they ever will be Tf you want need prefer the features of another class use that class for preparing your presentations The intention of these layers is just to help speed up creating BEAMER presentations that use parts of old presentations You can simply copy these parts in verbatim without having to worry about the subtle differences in syntax A useful effect of using an emulation layer is that you get access to all the features of BEAMER while using the syntax of another class For example you can use the article mode to create a nice article version of a PROSPER talk 24 1 Prosper HA Prosper and Powerdot The package beamerprosper maps the commands of the PROSPER package developed by Fr d ric Goualard to BEAMER commands Also some commands of the HA PROSPER and POWERDOT packages developed by Hendri Adriaens are mapped to BEAMER commands These mappings cannot perfectly emulate all of Prosper Rather these mappings are intended as an aid when porting parts of presentations created using PROSPER to BEAMER No styles are implemented that mimick P
145. activated ARTICLE To make the characters lt and gt active in article mode pass the option activeospeccharacters to the package beamerbasearticle This will lead to problems with overlay specifications usepackage color PRESEN The color package is automatically loaded by beamer cls This makes it impossible to pass options to TATION color in the preamble of your document in the normal manner To pass a list of options to color you can use the following class option documentclass color list of options beamer Causes the list of options to be passed on to the color package If the list of options contains more than one option you must enclose it in curly brackets ARTICLE The color package is not loaded automatically if beamerarticle is loaded with the noxcolor option usepackage colortbl PRESEN With newer versions of xcolor sty you need to pass the option table to xcolor sty if you wish to use TATION colortbl See the notes on xcolor below on how to do this usepackage CJK PRESEN When using the CJK package for using Asian fonts you must use the class option CJK TATION usepackage deluxetable PRESEN The caption generation facilities of deluxetable are deactivated Instead the caption template is used TATION 16 usepackage DraTex See AlDraTex usepackage enumerate ARTICLE This package is loaded automatically in the presentation modes but not in the article mode If you use its features
146. ady playing If set to false all other sounds though not sound from movies are stopped before the sound is played The default is false samplingrate number Specifies the number of samples per second in the sound file If this number is 44100 this option need not be specified width T X dimension works like the height option only for the width of the poster box Example The following example creates a background sound for the slide assuming that applause au is encoded correctly 44100 samples per second mono plaw encoded 16 bits per sample sound autostart applause au Just like movies sounds can also serve as destinations of special sound hyperlinks hyperlinksound options sound label text Causes the text to become a sound hyperlink When you click on the text the sound with the label sound label will start to play The following options may be given e loop or repeat Causes the sound to start again when the end has been reached e mixsound true or false If set to true the sound is played in addition to any sound that is already playing If set to false all other sounds though not sound from movies are stopped before the sound is played The default is false Since there is no direct way of stopping the playback of a sound the following command is useful hyperlinkmute text Causes the tezt to become a hyperlink that when clicked stops the playback of all sounds
147. ails on how to specify whether the text is invisible or just transparent see Section 17 6 Example uncover lt 3 gt Text shown from slide 3 on ARTICLE This command has the same effect as Nonly visible lt overlay specification gt text This command does almost the same as uncover The only difference is that if the text is not shown it is never shown in a transparent way but rather it is not shown at all Thus for this command the transparency settings have no effect Example visible lt 2 gt Text shown from slide 2 on ARTICLE This command has the same effect as Nonly invisible lt overlay specification gt text This command is the opposite of visible Example invisible lt 2 gt Text shown from slide 3 on alt lt overlay specification gt t default tert alternative text lt overlay specification gt Only one overlay specification may be given The default text is shown on the specified slides otherwise the alternative text The specification must always be present Example alt lt 2 gt On Slide 2 Not on slide 2 Once more giving the overlay specification at the end is useful when the command is used inside other commands Example Here is the definition of uncover newcommand uncover alt firstofone makeinvisible temporal lt overlay specification gt before slide text default text after slide text This command alternates between three different texts depending on
148. ained in Section 14 1 3 together with animate For example you might create an animation like this assuming you have created graphic files named animation 1 through to animation 10 begin frame animate lt 2 9 gt multiinclude start 1 animation end frame 14 1 3 Including External Animations Residing in Multiple Image Files Some animations reside in external files in the following way For each stage of the animation there is an image file containing an image for this stage You can include such a series of images conveniently by using the style mpmulti sty from the ppower4 package This style written by Klaus Guntermann introduces a command called multiinclude that takes the base name of a graphic file like mygraphic and will then search for files called mygraphic 0 mygraphic 1 and so on till no more files are found It will then include these graphics files using the includegraphics command but will put these graphics on top of each other Furthermore and this is the important part it inserts a pause command after each graphic This command is defined in the ppower4 package and has the same effect as the pause command of BEAMER For this reason both ppower4 and also BEAMER will first display the basic graphic and will then additionally show the next graphic on each slide If you try to use mpmulti sty directly you will run into the problem that it includes a file called pause sty which is part of the ppower4 packag
149. al structure a change of that color causes the color of items to change accordingly Beamer Color Font item projected Color font parents item This is a special version of the item color and font that should be used by templates that render items with text as in an enumeration and which project this text onto something like a ball or a square or whatever While the normal item color typically has a transparent background the item projected typically has a colored background and say a white foreground Beamer Color Font subitem Color font parents item Same as item for subitems that is for items on the second level of indentation Beamer Color Font subitem projected Color font parents item projected Same as item projected for subitems that is for items on the second level of indentation Beamer Color Font subsubitem Color font parents subitem Same as subitem for subsubitems that is for items on the third level of indentation Beamer Color Font subsubitem projected Color font parents subitem projected Same as subitem projected for subsubitems that is for items on the third level of indentation 12 2 Highlighting The BEAMER class predefines commands and environments for highlighting text Using these commands makes it easy to change the appearance of a document by changing the theme structure lt overlay specification gt text The given text is marked as part of the structure that is it is supp
150. alling you may wish to review the licenses under which the class is distributed see Section 7 Fortunately most likely your system will already have BEAMER preinstalled so you can skip this section 2 1 Versions and Dependencies This documentation is part of version 3 36 of the BEAMER class BEAMER needs a reasonably recent version of several standard packages to run and also the following versions of two special packages later versions should work but not necessarily e pgf sty version 1 00 e xcolor sty version 2 00 If you use pdflatex which is optional you need e pdflatex version 0 14 or higher Earlier versions do not work 2 2 Installation of Pre bundled Packages We do not create or manage pre bundled packages of BEAMER but fortunately other nice people do We cannot give detailed instructions on how to install these packages since we do not manage them but we can tell you were to find them and we can tell you what these nice people told us on how to install them If you have a problem with installing you might wish to have a look at the following first 2 2 1 TpX Live and MacTpx In TeX Live use the tlmgr tool to install the packages called beamer pgf and xcolor If you have a fairly recent version of TEX Live and you have done full installation BEAMER is included 2 2 2 MiKTpX and proTEXt For MiKT X and proT Xt use the update wizard or package manager to install the latest versions of the packages calle
151. also begin frame plain The effect of the default overlay specification is the following Every command or environment inside the frame that accepts an action specification see Section 9 6 3 this includes the item command the actionenv environment action and all block environments and that is not followed by an overlay specifi cation gets the default overlay specification as its specification By providing an incremental specification like lt gt see Section 9 6 4 this will essentially cause all blocks and all enumerations to be uncovered piece wise blocks internally employ action specifications 58 Example In this frame the theorem is shown from the first slide on the proof from the second slide on with the first two itemize points shown one after the other the last itemize point is shown together with the first one In total this frame will contain four slides begin frame lt gt begin theorem A B end theorem begin proof begin itemize item Clearly A C item As shown earlier C B item lt 3 gt Thus A B end itemize end proof end frame The following options may be given e allowdisplaybreaks break desirability causes the AMST X command allowdisplaybreaks break desirability to be issued for the current frame The break desirability can be a value between 0 meaning formulas may never be broken and 4 the default meaning that formulas can be broken anywh
152. ame of the presentation as follows begin frame frametitle What Are Prime Numbers A prime number is a number that has exactly two divisors end frame This yields the desired result It might be a good idea to put some emphasis on the object being defined prime numbers Euclid tries emph but finds that too mild an emphasis BEAMER offers the command alert which is used like emph and by default typesets its argument in bright red Next Euclid decides to make it even clearer that he is giving a definition by putting a definition environ ment around the definition begin frame frametitle What Are Prime Numbers begin definition A alert prime number is a number that has exactly two divisors end definition end frame Other useful environments like theorem lemma proof corollary or example are also predefined by BEAMER As in amsmath they take optional arguments that they show in brackets Indeed amsmath is au tomatically loaded by BEAMER Since it is always a good idea to add examples Euclid decides to add one begin frame frametitle What Are Prime Numbers begin definition A alert prime number is a number that has exactly two divisors end definition begin example begin itemize item 2 is prime two divisors 1 and 2 item 3 is prime two divisors 1 and 3 item 4 is not prime alert three divisors 1 2 and 4 end itemize end example end frame 3 9 Creating Simple Over
153. amed beameroutertheme name sty If you do not use any of these commands a sober default theme is used for all of them In the following the presentation themes that come with the BEAMER class are described The element layout color and font themes are presented in the following sections 144 15 2 Presentation Themes without Navigation Bars A presentation theme dictates for every single detail of a presentation what it looks like Normally having chosen a particular presentation theme you do not need to specify anything else having to do with the appearance of your presentation the creator of the theme should have taken care of that for you However you still can change things afterward either by using a different color font element or even layout theme or by changing specific colors fonts or templates directly When Till started naming the presentation themes he soon ran out of ideas on how to call them Instead of giving them more and more cumbersome names he decided to switch to a different naming convention Except for two special cases all presentation themes are named after cities These cities happen to be cities in which or near which there was a conference or workshop that he attended or that a co author of his attended All themes listed without author mentioned were developed by Till If a theme has not been developped by us that is if someone else is to blame this is indicated with the theme We have sometimes sli
154. amer Color palette sidebar quaternary See palette sidebar primary 17 5 Miscellaneous Colors In this section some basic colors are listed that do not belong to any special commands Beamer Color Font normal text The color is used for normal text At the beginning of the document the foreground color is installed as normalcolor The background of this color is used by the default background canvas for the background of the presentation see Section 8 2 7 The background is also the default value of the normal color bg Since the color is the root of all other BEAMER colors both a foreground and a background must be installed In particular to get a transparent background canvas make the background of the BEAMER color background canvas empty not the background of this color The BEAMER font currently is not used In particular redefining this font will not have any effect This is likely to change in the future Beamer Color Font example text The color font is used when text is typeset inside an example block Beamer Color Font titlelike This color font is a more specialized form of the structure color font It is the base for all elements that are like titles This includes the frame title and subtitle as well as the document title and subtitle 188 Beamer Color separation line The foreground of this color is used for separating lines If the foreground is empty no separation line is drawn Be
155. amer Color upper separation line head Color parents separation line Special case for the uppermost separation line in a headline Beamer Color middle separation line head Color parents separation line Special case for the middle separation line in a headline Beamer Color lower separation line head Color parents separation line Special case for the lower separation line in a headline Beamer Color upper separation line foot Color parents separation line Special case for the uppermost separation line in a footline Beamer Color middle separation line foot Color parents separation line Special case for the middle separation line in a footline Beamer Color lower separation line foot Color parents separation line Special case for the lower separation line in a footline 17 6 Transparency Effects By default covered items are not shown during a presentation Thus if you write uncover lt 2 gt Text the text is not shown on any but the second slide On the other slides the text is not simply printed using the background color it is not shown at all This effect is most useful if your background does not have a uniform color Sometimes however you might prefer that covered items are not completely covered Rather you would like them to be shown already in a very dim or shaded way This allows your audience to get a feeling for what is yet to come without getting distracted by it Also you might wish text that
156. and Example multiinclude graphics height 5cm gra e format extension will cause the file names for which we search change from base file name number to base file name number extension Note the change from the dot to a hyphen This option allows you to include say jpg files e start number specifies the start number The default is zero end number specifies the end number The default is infinity Note that if you do not use the format option the includegraphics command will be somewhat at a loss in which format your graphic file actually is After all it ends with the cryptic format suffix 0 or 1 You can tell Nincludegraphics that any file having a suffix it knows nothing about is actually in format say mps using the following command DeclareGraphicsRule mps 14 2 Sounds You can include sounds in a presentation Such sound can be played when you open a slide or when a certain button is clicked The commands for including sounds are defined in the package multimedia which is introduced in Section 14 1 1 As was already pointed out in Section 14 1 1 a sound can be included in a PDF presentation by treating it as a movie and using the movie command While this is perfectly sufficient in most cases there are two cases where this approach is not satisfactory 1 When a page is closed any playing movie is immediately stopped Thus you cannot use the movie command to create
157. and is stored internally and the frame title is only typeset when the complete frame has been read This gives you access to both the frame title text and to the subframe title text that is possibly introduced using the framesubtitle command By default this command creates a new paragraph in article mode entitled frame title text Using the overlay specification makes it easy to suppress a frame title once in a while If you generally wish to suppress all frame titles in article mode say setbeamertemplate lt article gt frametitle Beamer Template Color Font frametitle Color font parents titlelike When the frame title and subtitle are to be typeset this template is invoked with the BEAMER color and font frametitle set This template is not invoked when the commands frametitle or framesubtitle are called Rather it is invoked when the whole frame has been completely read Till then the frame title and frame subtitle text are stored in a special place This way when the template is invoked both inserts are setup correctly The resulting TRX box is then magically put back to the top of the frame The following template options are predefined 73 default alignment The frame is typeset using the BEAMER color frametitle and the BEAMER font frametitle The subtitle is put below using the color and font framesubtitle If the color frametitle has a background a background bar stretching the whole frame width is put behind
158. any navigational elements should go like a mini table of contents or navigational mini frames and what they should look like Typically an outer theme specifies how the following elements are rendered e The head and footline e The sidebars e The logo e The frame title An outer theme will not specify how things like itemize environments should be rendered that is the job of an inner theme In the following examples the color theme seahorse is used Since the default color theme leaves most backgrounds empty most of the outer themes look too unstructured with the default color theme useoutertheme default Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p The default layout theme is the most sober and minimalistic theme around It will flush left the frame title and it will not install any head or footlines However even this theme honors the background color specified for the frame title If a color is specified a bar occupying the whole page width is put behind the frame title A background color of the frame subtitle is ignored
159. argument is present onslide without a modifier is mapped to uncover Monslide is mapped to visible and onslide is mapped to only Example begin frame onslide lt 1 gt Same effect as the following command uncover lt 1 gt Same effect as the previous command onslide lt 2 gt Same effect as the following command visible lt 2 gt Same effect as the previous command onslide lt 3 gt Same effect as the following command only lt 3 gt Same effect as the previous command end frame only lt overlay specification gt text lt overlay specification gt 80 Tf either overlay specification is present though only one may be present the text is inserted only into the specified slides For other slides the text is simply thrown away In particular it occupies no space Example only lt 3 gt Text inserted from slide 3 on Since the overlay specification may also be given after the text you can often use only to make other commands overlay specification aware in a simple manner Example newcommand myblue only color blue begin frame nmyblue lt 2 gt This text is blue only on slide 2 end frame uncover lt overlay specification gt text If the overlay specification is present the tezt is shown uncovered only on the specified slides On other slides the text still occupies space and it is still typeset but it is not shown or only shown as if transparent For det
160. arly the same happens as with only one star However in addition the color is used with the command setbeamercolor This causes the colors to be reset to the normal text color if no special foreground or background is specified by the BEAMER color element name Thus in this twice starred version the color used for the template is guaranteed to be independent of the color that was currently in use when the template is used Finally adding a third star will also cause a star to be added to the setbeamerfont command This causes the font used for the template also to be reset to normal text unless the BEAMER font element name specifies things differently This three star version is the most protected version available ifbeamertemplateempty beamer template name executed if empty executed otherwise This command checks whether a template is defined and set to a non empty text If the text is empty or the template is not defined at all executed if empty is executed Otherwise executed otherwise is executed expandbeamertemplate beamer template name This command does the same as usebeamertemplate beamer template name The difference is that this command performs a direct expansion and does not scan for a star This is important inside for example an edef If you don t know the difference between def and edef you won t need this command 16 3 3 Setting Beamer s Templates To set a BEAMER template yo
161. arties provide the program as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the program is with you Should the program prove defective you assume the cost of all necessary servicing repair or correction In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing will any copyright holder or any other party who may modify and or redistribute the program as permitted above be liable to you for damages including any general special incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the program including but not limited to loss of data or data being rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a failure of the program to operate with any other programs even if such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of such damages The GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 3 3 November 2008 Copyright 2000 2001 2002 2007 2008 Free Software Foundation Inc http fsf org Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this license document but modification of it is not allowed 7 3 1 Preamble The purpose of this License is to make a manual textbook or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy an
162. ary to typeset mathematical text using serif letters Also if you have a lot of mathematical text the audience may be quicker to parse it if it is typeset the way people usually read mathematical text in a serif font usef onttheme options structurebold Example 192 There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem z A There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics S University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This font theme will cause titles and text in the headlines footlines and sidebars to be typeset in a bold font The following options may be given e onlysmall will cause only small text to be typeset in bold More precisely only the text in the headline footline and sidebars is changed to be typeset in bold Large titles are not affected e onlylarge will cause only large text to be typeset in bold These are the main title frame titles and section entries in the table of contents As pointed out in Section 5 6 1 you should use this theme possibly with the onlysmall option if your font is not scaled down properly or for light on dark text The normal t
163. as if written in the body of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally 7 2 3 No Warranty 10 11 7 3 Because the program is licensed free of charge there is no warranty for the program to the extent permitted by applicable law Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and or other p
164. at completely specifies all colors for all parts of a frame It installs specific colors and does not derive the colors from say the structure BEAMER color Complete color themes happen to have names of flying animals usecolortheme albatross Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Results The color theme is a dark or inverted theme using yellow on blue as the main colors The color theme also installs a slightly darker background color for blocks which is necessary for presentation themes that use shadows but which in Till s opinion is undesirable for all other presentation themes By using the lily color theme together with this theme the backgrounds for blocks can be removed When using a light on dark theme like this one be aware that there are certain disadvantages e Ifthe room in which the talk is given has been darkened using such a theme makes it more difficult for the audience to take or read notes e Since the room becomes darker the pupil becomes larger thus making it harder for the eye to focus This can make text harder to read e Printing such slides is difficult at best On the other hand a light on dark presentation often appears to be more stylish than a plain black on white one The following options may be given e overlystylish installs
165. ate insertframetitle yields the frame title insertframesubtitle yields the frame subtitle framesubtitle lt overlay specification gt frame subtitle text ARTICLE If present a subtitle will be shown in a smaller font below the main title Like the frametitle command this command can be given anywhere in the frame since the frame title is actually typeset only when everything else has already been typeset Example begin frame frametitle lt presentation gt Frame Title Should Be in Uppercase framesubtitle Subtitles can be in lowercase if they are full sentences Frame contents end frame By default the subtitle is not shown in any way in article mode Beamer Color Font framesubtitle Color font parents frametitle This element provides a color and a font for the subtitle but no template It is the job of the frametitle template to also typeset the subtitle Be default all material for a slide is vertically centered You can change this using the following class options documentclass t beamer Place text of slides at the vertical top of the slides This corresponds to a vertical flush You can override this for individual frames using the c or b option Xdocumentclass c beamer Place text of slides at the vertical center of the slides This is the default You can override this for individual frames using the t or b option 74 8 2 7 The Background Each frame has a background
166. ause the main text of the slide to be shown only on the first slide This is useful if you really wish to physically place slides on top of each other The starred version does the same as the nonstarred one If this command is not issued inside a frame it sets up a frame with the fragile singleframe option set Thus this frame will contain only a single slide Example begin slide Some text end slide frame begin slide Some text And an overlay 1 overlay end slide 226 red blue Mapped to color red Mapped to color blue green Mapped to color green ifslide True in the presentation modes false in the article mode ifslidesonly Same as ifslide ifarticle False in the presentation modes true in the article mode ifportrait Always false The following commands are parsed by BEAMER but have no effect e ptsize 24 3 Foil TX The package beamerfoils maps a subset of the commands of the FOILS package to BEAMER Since this package defines only few non standard T X commands and since BEAMER implements all the standard commands the emulation layer is pretty simple A copyright notice The FoilTfX package has a restricted license For this reason no example from the FOILS package is included in the BEAMER class The emulation itself does not use the code of the FOILS package rather it just maps FOILS commands to BEAMER commands For this reason our u
167. available and the machine generated HTML PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only The Title Page means for a printed book the title page itself plus such following pages as are needed to hold legibly the material this License requires to appear in the title page For works in formats which do not have any title page as such Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work s title preceding the beginning of the body of the text The publisher means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public A section Entitled X YZ means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below such as Acknowledgements Dedications Endorsements or History To Preserve the Title of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section Entitled XYZ according to this definition The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies 47 to the Document These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License but only as regards disclaiming warranties any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning
168. ay setbeamertemplate qed symbol vrule width1 5ex height1 5ex depthOpt If you use babel and a different language the text Proof is replaced by whatever is appropriate in the selected language Example begin proof lt 2 gt Sketch of proof Suppose end proof Beamer Template Color Font ged symbol The symbol is shown at the end of every proof You can define new environments using the following command newtheorem environment name numbered same as head text number within This command is used exactly the same way as in the amsthm package as a matter of fact it is the command from that package see its documentation The only difference is that environments declared using this 119 command are overlay specification aware in BEAMER and that when typeset are typeset according to BEAMER s templates ARTICLE Environments declared using this command are also overlay specification aware in article mode ARTICLE Example newtheorem observation theorem Observation You can also use amsthm s command newtheoremstyle to define new theorem styles Note that the default template for theorems will ignore any head font setting but will honor the body font setting If you wish to define the environments like theorem differently for example have it numbered within each subsection you can use the following class option to disable the definition of the predefined environments documentclass
169. ay be given e insertshorttitle options Inserts the short version of the document title into a template Same options as for Ninsertshortauthor may be given e insertshortsubtitle options Inserts the short version of the document subtitle Same options as for insertshortauthor may be given e insertsubsection Inserts the current subsection into a template e insertsubsubsection Inserts the current subsection into a template e insertsubsectionnavigation width Inserts a vertical navigation bar containing all subsections of the current section with the current subsection highlighted e insertsubsectionnavigationhorizontal width left insert H right insert See insertsectionnavigation e insertverticalnavigation width Inserts a vertical navigation bar of the given width into a template The bar shows a little table of contents The individual lines are typeset using the templates section in head foot and subsection in head foot e insertframenumber Inserts the number of the current frame not slide into a template e inserttotalframenumber Inserts the total number of the frames not slides into a template The number is only correct on the second run of TEX on your document e insertframestartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the current frame e insertframeendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the current frame e insertsubsectionstartpage Inserts the page number of the firs
170. batim 127 slide 221 226 structureenv 115 thebibliography 101 theorem 118 verse 128 example environment 119 example text color font 188 exampleblock environment 117 expandbeamertemplate 169 enumerate enumerate enumerate enumerate enumerate 243 fly color theme 178 foilhead 229 foils class 17 FoilTeX 229 Font themes default 191 professionalfont 191 serif 192 structurebold 192 structureitalicserif 193 structuresmallcapsserif 193 fontenc package 17 Fonts see Beamer fonts fontText 223 fontTitle 223 footline template color font 65 footnote 129 footnote template color font 129 footnote mark color font 129 fourier package 17 frame environment 58 frame begin template 62 frame end template 62 framesubtitle 74 framesubtitle color font 74 frametitle 73 frametitle template color font 73 frametitle continuation template color font 59 framezoon 108 Frankfurt presentation theme 155 FromSlide 222 fromSlide 222 generic talks generic ornate 15min 45min solution 42 Goettingen presentation theme 152 green 227 HA prosper package 17 handout class option 204 Hannover presentation theme 153 headline template color font 63 hiddenitem 223 hide notes beamer option 201 hyperlink 106 hyperlinkappendixend 107 hyperlinkappendixstart 107 hyperlinkdocumentend 107 hyperlinkdocumentstart 107 hyperlinkframeend 106 hyperlinkframeendprev 106 hyperlinkfram
171. beamertemplate section in toc shaded default 20 setbeamertemplate subsection in toc shaded default 20 In detail the following happens When setbeamertemplate is encountered for a parent template BEAMER first checks whether a predefined option follows If not a single argument is read and setbeamertemplate is called for all children for this template If there is a predefined template option set BEAMER evaluates the argument for children It may contain parameters like 1 or 2 These parameters are filled with the arguments that follow the call of setbeamertemplate for the parent template The number of arguments must be the number given as argument number An optional argument can also be specified in the usual way Once the arguments for the children have been computed setbeamertemplate is called for all children for the predefined template and with the computed arguments You may wonder what happens when certain predefined options take a certain number of arguments but another predefined option takes a different number of arguments In this case the above described mechanism cannot differentiate between the predefined options and it is unclear which or even how many arguments should be contained in arguments for children For this reason you can give the optional argument predefined option name when calling defbeamertemplateparent If this optional argument is specified the parenthood of the template applies only to this
172. ber 94 inserttocsubsection 94 inserttocsubsectionnumber 94 inserttocsubsubsection 95 inserttocsubsubsectionnumber 95 inserttotalframenumber 65 insertverticalnavigation 65 institute 93 institution 221 invisible 81 item 82 item color font 114 item projected color font 114 Itemize environment 223 itemize environment 110 itemize item template color font 111 itemize items parent template 111 itemize subitem template color font 111 itemize subsubitem template color font 111 itemize enumerate body begin template 113 itemize enumerate body end template 113 items parent template 113 itemstep environment 223 JuanLesPins presentation theme 150 keywords 93 Mabel 82 languagealias 238 languagepath 238 lecture 98 lily color theme 181 listings package 18 liststepwise 230 local structure color 115 Logo 221 logo 72 logo template color font 73 Logo0ff 228 LogoOn 228 lower separation line foot color 189 lower separation line head color 189 Luebeck presentation theme 157 Madrid presentation theme 147 maketitle 92 Malmoe presentation theme 157 Marburg presentation theme 152 math text color 187 math text displayed color 187 math text inlined color 187 middle separation line foot color 189 middle separation line head color 189 mini frame template color font 69 mini frame in current subsection template 69 mini frame in other subsection templa
173. ber Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Aimee There Is No Largest Prime a Number root of he Main The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof Suppose p were the largest prime number Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p In this theme the sidebar on the left is balanced by right flushed frame titles The following options may be given e hideallsubsections causes only sections to be shown in the sidebar This is useful if you need to save space e hideothersubsections causes only the subsections of the current section to be shown This is useful if you need to save space e width dimension sets the width of the sidebar Hannover is a town in Germany It hosted the 48th Theorietag 15 5 Presentation Themes with a Mini Frame Navigation usetheme options Berlin Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria E Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria
174. ble of contents version of the current section name e inserttocsectionnumber inserts the number of the current section in the table of contents Beamer Template Color Font section in toc shaded This template is used instead of the previous one if the section should be shown in a shaded way because it is not the current section For the permissible options see the parent template table of contents section lt mode specification gt f section name Starts a section without an entry in the table of contents No heading is created but the section name is shown in the navigation bar Example section OQutline Example section lt beamer gt Outline subsection lt mode specification gt short subsection name subsection name This command works the same way as the section command Example subsection Applications Applications to the Reduction of Pollution Beamer Template Color Font subsection in toc Like section in toc only for subsection In addition to the inserts for the section in toc template the following commands are available for this template e inserttocsubsection inserts the table of contents version of the current subsection name e inserttocsubsectionnumber inserts the number of the current subsection in the table of con tents 94 Beamer Template Color Font subsection in toc shaded Like section in toc shaded only for subsections subsection lt mode specification gt subsec
175. call your main file main tex To create an initial main tex file for your talk copy an existing file from the beamer solutions directory and adapt it to your needs A list of possible BEAMER solutions that contain templates for presentation TpX files can be found below If you wish your talk to reside in the same file as some different non presentation article version of your text it is advisable to setup a more elaborate file scheme See Section 21 2 2 for details 4 2 Step Two Structure Your Presentation The next step is to fill the presentation file with section and subsection to create a preliminary outline You ll find some hints on how to create a good outline in Section 5 1 Put section and subsection commands into the more or less empty main file Do not create any frames until you have a first working version of a possible table of contents The file might look like this documentclass beamer This is the file main tex usetheme Berlin title Example Presentation Created with the Beamer Package author Till Tantau date today begin document begin frame titlepage end frame section Outline begin frame tableofcontents end frame section Introduction subsection Overview of the Beamer Class subsection Overview of Similar Classes section Usage subsection subsection section Examples subsection 28 PRESEN TATION PRESEN TATION PRESEN TATION
176. can use it to jump to the different subsections Beamer Template Color Font section in head foot This template is used to render a section entry if it occurs in the headline or the footline The background of the BEAMER color is typically used as the background of the whole area where section entries are shown in the headline You cannot usually use this template yourself since the insert insertsectionhead is setup correctly only when a list of sections is being typeset in the headline The default template just inserts the section name The following inserts are useful for this template e insertsectionhead inserts the name of the section that is to be typeset in a navigation bar e insertsectionheadnumber inserts the number of the section that is to be typeset in a navigation bar e insertpartheadnumber inserts the number of the part of the current section or subsection that is to be typeset in a navigation bar Beamer Template section in head foot shaded This template is used instead of section in head foot for typesetting sections that are currently shaded Such shading is usually applied to all sections but the current one Note that this template does not have its own color and font When this template is called the BEAMER font and color section in head foot will have been setup Then at the start of the template you will typically change the current color or start a colormixin environment The following template opt
177. cense or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation If the Document does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document 7 3 12 Relicensing Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site or MMC Site means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server A Massive Multiauthor Collaboration or MMC contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site CC BY SA means the Creative Commons Attribution Share Alike 3 0 license published by Creative Com mons Corporation a not for profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco California as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization Incorporate means to publish or republish a Document in whole or in part as part of another Document
178. changed Inside templates this command will typically have already been called for you with the option fg usebeamercolor fg or bg 14 beamer color name This command possibly changes the two colors fg and bg to the foreground and background color of the beamer color name If the BEAMER color does not specify a foreground fg is left unchanged if does not specify a background bg is left unchanged You will often wish to directly use the color fg or bg after using this command For this common situation the optional argument fg or bg is useful which may be either fg or bg Giving this option will cause the foreground fg or the background bg to be immediately installed after they have been setup Thus the following command usebeamercolor fg normal text is a shortcut for usebeamercolor normal text color fg If you use the starred version of this command the BEAMER color normal text is used before the command is invoked This ensures that barring evil trickery the colors fg and bg will be setup independently of whatever colors happened to be in use when the command is invoked This command has special side effects First the normal color parent bg is set to the value of bg prior to this call Thus you can access the color that was in use prior to the call of this command via the color parent bg Second the special color beamer color name fg is globally set to the same value as fg and beamer color name
179. ckage beamerprosper instead see Section 24 1 usepackagefhyperref PRESEN The hyperref package is automatically loaded by beamer cls and certain options are set up In order to TATION pass additional options to hyperref or to override options you can use the following class option documentclass hyperref list of options beamer Causes the list of options to be passed on to the hyperref package Example documentclass hyperref bookmarks false beamer Alternatively you can also use the hypersetup command ARTICLE In the article version you must include hyperref manually if you want to use it You can do so by passing option hyperref to beamerarticle It is not included automatically usepackage utf8 utf8x inputenc PRESEN When using Unicode you may wish to use some of the following class options TATION documentclass ucs beamer Loads the package ucs and passes the correct Unicode options to hyperref Also it preloads the Unicode code pages zero and one documentclass utf8x beamer Same as the option ucs but also sets the input encoding to utf8x You could also use the option ucs and say usepackage utf8x inputenc in the preamble This also automatically loads ucs package in most TEX systems 17 ARTICLE If you use a Unicode character outside the first two code pages which includes the Latin alphabet and the extended Latin alphabet in a section or subsection heading you have to use t
180. cks whether the special option typeset second is given If not the frame is typeset normally and the slides are put on the main 211 presentation screen more precisely on the logical pgfpages page number zero The second screen logical page number one shows whatever it showed before the frame was typeset If the special frame option typeset second is given after each slide of the frame the frame contents is typeset once more but this time for the mode second This results in another slide which is put on the second screen on logical page number one Then the whole page is shipped out The second mode behaves more like the beamer mode than other modes Any overlay specification for beamer will also apply to second mode unless an explicit second mode specification is also given In particular only lt 1 2 gt Text will be shown on slides 1 and 2 in second mode but only on the first slide in handout mode or trans mode Example documentclass beamer usepackage pgfpages setbeameroption second mode text on second screen begin document begin frame typeset second This text is shown on the left and on the right only lt second gt This text is only shown on the right only lt second 0 gt This text is only shown on the left end frame begin frame This text is shown on the left The right shows the same as for the previous frame end frame begin frame typeset second alt lt second gt The string alt c
181. cle this is the job of the color theme nor which font should be used this is the job of the font theme Outer Themes An outer theme specifies what the outside or border of the presentation slides should look like It specifies whether there are head and footlines what is shown in them whether there is a sidebar where the logo goes where the navigation symbols and bars go and so on It also specifies where the frametitle is put and how it is typeset The different themes reside in the five subdirectories theme color font inner and outer of the directory beamer themes Internally a theme is stored as a normal style file However to use a theme the following special commands should be used usetheme options name list Installs the presentation theme named name Currently the effect of this command is the same as saying usepackage for the style file named beamertheme name sty for each name in the name list usecolortheme options name list Same as usetheme only for color themes Color style files are named beamercolortheme name sty usef onttheme options name Same as usetheme only for font themes Font style files are named beamerfonttheme name sty useinnertheme options name Same as usetheme only for inner themes Inner style files are named beamerinnertheme name sty useoutertheme options name Same as usetheme only for outer themes Outer style files are n
182. command is instead called for all of these children with the same arguments The following template options are predefined default The default item marker is a small triangle colored with the foreground of the BEAMER color itemize item or for subitems itemize subitem etc Note that these colors will automat ically change under certain circumstances such as inside an example block or inside an alertenv environment triangle Alias for the default circle Uses little circles or dots as item markers square Uses little squares as item markers ball Uses little balls as item markers Beamer Template Color Font itemize item Color font parents item This template with item instead of items governs how the marker in front of a first level item is typeset First level refers to the level of nesting See the itemize items template for the options that may be given When the template is inserted the BEAMER font and color itemize item is installed Typically the font is ignored by the template as some special symbol is drawn anyway by the font may be important if an optional argument is given to the item command as in item First The font and color inherit from the item font and color which are explained at the end of this section Beamer Template Color Font itemize subitem Color font parents subitem Like itemize item only for second level items An item of an itemize inside an enumerate counts as
183. cs University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme installs a headline in which a horizontal navigational bar is shown This bar contains one entry for each section of the presentation Below each section entry small circles are shown that represent the different frames in the section The frames are arranged subsection wise that is there is a line of frames for each subsection If the class option compress is given the frames will instead be arranged in a single row for each section The navigation bars draws its color from section in head foot Below the navigation bar a line is put showing the title of the current subsection The color is drawn from subsection in head foot At the bottom two lines are put that contain information such as the author s name the institution or the paper s title What is shown exactly is influenced by the options given The colors are drawn from the appropriate BEAMER colors like author in head foot At the top and bottom of both the head and footline and between the navigation bar and the subsection name separation lines are drawn f the background color of separation line is set This separation line will have a height of 3pt You can get even more fine grained control over the colors of the separation lines by setti
184. d A AAA dar et e 127 12 11 Verse Quotations Quotes gt 2 nana ee e e ee ER Oe AA 128 DP VAR OOLNOUCS aa aa ik A areas epee Ge he Eee CeCe Ck oR Re Seat eid E TA he BED i ens Sah 129 13 Graphics 130 13 1 Including External Graphic Files Versus Inlines Graphics 2 4 130 13 2 Including Graphic Files Ending eps or ps 2 aa 131 13 3 Including Graphic Files Ending pdf jpg jpeg or png ooo 131 13 4 Including Graphic Files Ending mps 2 2 2 2 ee 131 13 5 Including Graphic Files Ending mp 132 14 Animations Sounds and Slide Transitions 133 VAL Animations 2 3 2 0 Mai AAA ele RPP A AA TAL a 133 14 1 1 Including External Animation Files 2 2 133 14 1 2 Animations Created by Showing Slides in Rapid Succession 0 0 135 14 1 3 Including External Animations Residing in Multiple Image Files 137 14 2 S0undS 3 5 2 a a ESE GE ee a o Re whee by AA A 138 14 3 Slide Transitions mai ger ai a e E ee ee Saree duke eee ane ad 140 II Changing the Way Things Look 143 15 Themes 144 15 1 Five Flavors of Themes 2 20 a a E ee 144 15 2 Presentation Themes without Navigation Bars o 0 0 2 0 000000 145 15 3 Presentation Themes with a Tree Like Navigation Bar o o 149 15 4 Presentation Themes with a Table of Contents Sidebar o 151 15 5 Presentation Themes with a Mini Frame Navigation o e
185. d beamer pgf and xcolor 2 2 3 Debian and Ubuntu The command aptitude install latex beamer should do the trick If necessary the packages pgf and latex xcolor will be automatically installed Sit back and relax In detail the following packages are installed http packages debian org latex beamer http packages debian org pgf http packages debian org latex xcolor Debian 5 0 lenny includes T X Live 2007 and version 6 0 squeeze will include TFX Live 2009 This also allows you to manually install newer versions of BEAMER into your local directory see below without having to update any other IXT X packages Ubuntu 8 04 9 04 and 9 10 include TX Live 2007 and version 10 04 includes TEX Live 2009 2 2 4 Fedora Fedora 9 10 11 12 and 13 include TFX Live 2007 which includes BEAMER It can be installed by running the command yum install texlive texm latex As with Debian this allows you to manually install newer versions Of BEAMER into your local directory explained below Jindrich Novy provides T X Live 2010 rpm packages for Fedora 12 and 13 at http fedoraproject org wiki Features TeXLive Fedora 14 will contain TeX Live 2010 once it s released 14 2 3 Installation in a texmf Tree If for whatever reason you do not wish to use a prebundled package the right way to install BEAMER is to put it in a so called texmf tree In the following we explain how to do this Obtain the latest
186. d canvas The template is inserted behind everything but on top of the background canvas Use it for pictures or grids or anything that does not necessarily fill the whole background When this template is typeset the BEAMER color and font background will be setup The following template options are predefined e default is empty e grid grid options places a grid on the background The following grid options may be given step dimension specifies the distance between grid lines The default is 0 5cm color color specifies the color of the grid lines The default is 10 foreground 75 8 3 Frame and Margin Sizes The size of a frame is actually the paper size of a BEAMER presentation and it is variable By default it amounts to 128mm by 96mm The aspect ratio of this size is 4 3 which is exactly what most beamers offer these days It is the job of the presentation program like acroread xpdf okular or evince to display the slides at full screen size The main advantage of using a small paper size is that you can use all your normal fonts at their natural sizes In particular inserting a graphic with 11pt labels will result in reasonably sized labels during the presentation To change paper size and aspect ratio you can use the following class options Xdocumentclass aspectratio 1610 beamer Sets aspect ratio to 16 10 and frame size to 160mm by 100mm documentclass aspectratio 16
187. d lstlisting begin frame mycode end frame end document usepackage msc PRESEN TATION Since this package uses pstricks internally everything that applies to pstricks also applies to msc usepackage musixtex When using MusiX TEX to typeset musical scores you have to have e TEXextensions enabled Most modern distributions enable that by default both in pdflatex and latex However if you have an older distribution the document must be compiled with pdfelatex or elatex instead of pdflatex or latex Inside a music environment the pause is redefined to match MusiXT X s definition a rest during one quarter of a whole You can use the beamerpause command to create overlays in this environment usepackage pdfpages Commands like includepdf only work outside frames as they produce pages by themselves You may also wish to say setbeamercolor background canvas bg 18 when you use such a command since the background even a white background will otherwise be printed over the image you try to include Example begin document begin frame titlepage end frame setbeamercolor background canvas bg includepdf somepdfimages pdf begin frame A normal frame end frame end document usepackage professional font package PRESEN If you use a professional font package BEAMER s internal redefinition of how variables are typeset may TATION interfere with the font p
188. d main point item lt 2 alert 2 gt The second point end enumerate end frame ARTICLE The action specification is currently completely ignored The related command bibitem is also overlay specification aware in the same way as item label lt overlay specification gt label name If the overlay specification is present the label is only inserted on the specified slide Inserting a label on more than one slide will cause a multiple labels warning However if no overlay specification is present the specification is automatically set to just 1 and the label is thus inserted only on the first slide This is typically the desired behavior since it does not really matter on which slide the label is inserted except if you use an only command and ezcept if you wish to use that label as a hyperjump target Then you need to specify a slide Labels can be used as target of hyperjumps A convenient way of labelling a frame is to use the label name option of the frame environment However this will cause the whole frame to be kept in memory till the end of the compilation which may pose a problem Example begin frame begin align a amp b c label first no specification needed c d e label second no specification needed end align 82 Blah blah uncover lt 2 gt more blah blah only lt 3 gt Specification is needed now label lt 3 gt mylabel end frame 9 4 Environments with Overla
189. d redistribute it with or without modifying it either commercially or noncommercially Secondarily this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others This License is a kind of copyleft which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense It complements the GNU General Public License which is a copyleft license designed for free software We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software because free software needs free documentation a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software 46 does But this License is not limited to software manuals it can be used for any textual work regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference 7 3 2 Applicability and definitions This License applies to any manual or other work in any medium that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License Such a notice grants a world wide royalty free license unlimited in duration to use that work under the conditions stated herein The Document below refers to any such manual or work Any member of the public is a licensee and is addressed as you You accep
190. de to get the desired effect begin frame frametitle The Title of This Frame 167 ARTICLE Blah blah end frame When rendering the frame BEAMER will use the code of the frame title template to typeset the frame title and it will replace every occurrence of insertframetitle by the current frame title We can take this example a step further It would be nicer if we did not have to hardwire the color of the frametitle but if this color could be specified independently of the code for the template This way a color theme could change this color Since this is a problem that is common to most templates BEAMER will automatically setup the BEAMER color frametitle when the template frametitle is used Thus we can remove the color red command if we set the BEAMER color frametitle to red at some point setbeamercolor frametitle fg red setbeamertemplate frametitle begin centering textbf insertframetitle par end centering F Next we can also make the font themable Just like the color the BEAMER font frametitle is installed before the frametitle template is typeset Thus we should rewrite the code as follows setbeamercolor frametitle fg red setbeamerfont frametitle series bfseries setbeamertemplate frametitle begin centering insertframetitle par end centering Users themes or whoever can now easily change the color or font of the frametitle without having to mess with t
191. ding graphics Ei ther will work fine in most situations so choose whichever you like Like pgfdeclareimage includegraphics also includes an image only once in a pdf file even if it used several times as a matter of fact the graphics package is even a bit smarter about this than pgf However currently only pgf offers the ability to include images that are partly transparent At the end of this section you will find notes on how to include specific graphic formats like eps or jpg The commands includegraphics pgfuseimage and pgfimage are overlay specification aware in BEAMER If the overlay specification does not apply the command has no effect This is useful for creating a simple animation where each picture of the animation resides in a different file begin frame includegraphics lt 1 gt height 2cm step1 pdf includegraphics lt 2 gt height 2cm step2 pdf includegraphics lt 3 gt height 2cm step3 pdf end frame A different way of creating graphics is to insert graphic drawing commands directly into your IAT X file There are numerous packages that help you do this They have various degrees of sophistication Inlining graphics suffers from none of the disadvantages mentioned above for including external graphic files but the main disadvantage is that it is often hard to use these packages In some sense you program your graphics which requires a bit of practice When choosing a graphic package there
192. distribute modified versions of your work that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while maintaining the availability integrity and reliability of that work If you do not see how to achieve your goal while meeting these conditions then read the document cfgguide tex and modguide tex in the base IX distribution for suggestions 7 4 2 Definitions In this license document the following terms are used Work Any work being distributed under this License Derived Work Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work Modification Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable law for example the production of a file containing an original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of such a file either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Modify To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable law Distribution Making copies of the Work available from one person to another in whole or in part Distribution includes but is not limited to making any electronic components of the Work accessible by file transfer protocols such as FTP or HTTP or by shared file systems such as Sun s Network File System NFS Compiled Work A version of the Work that has been processed into a form where it is directly usable on a computer system This processing may include using installation facilities provided by the Work tra
193. drawn behind the headline and footline this may change in the future with the introduction of a headline and a footline canvas The width of the headline is the whole paper width The height is determined automatically as described above The headline is typeset in vertical mode with interline skip turned off and the paragraph skip set to Zero Inside this template the command is changed such that it inserts a comma instead Example setbeamertemplatefheadline 7 begin beamercolorbox section in head foot vskip2pt insertnavigation paperwidth vskip2pt end beamercolorbox 63 The following template options are predefined default The default is just an empty headline To get the default headline of earlier versions of the BEAMER class use the compatibility theme infolines theme This option becomes available and is used if the infolines outer theme is loaded The headline shows current section and subsection miniframes theme This option becomes available and is used if the miniframes outer theme is loaded The headline shows the sections with small clickable mini frames below them sidebar theme This option becomes available and is used if the sidebar outer theme is loaded and if the head height and option of the sidebar theme is not zero In this case the headline is an empty bar of the background color frametitle with the logo to the left or right of this bar smoothtree theme This option b
194. dth of the resulting box is reset to the width textwidth but intelligent negative skips are inserted at the left and right end of the box The net effect of this is that you can use a width larger than the text width for a box and can insert the resulting box directly into normal text without getting annoying warnings and having the box positioned sensibly dp depth sets the depth of the box overriding the real depth of the box The box is first typeset normally then the depth is changed afterwards This option is useful for creating boxes that have 122 guaranteed size If the option is not given the box has its natural depth which results from the typesetting For example a box containing only the letter a will have a different depth from a box containing only the letter g e ht height sets the height of the box overriding the real height Note that the height does not include the depth see for example the T X book for details If you want a one line box that always has the same size setting the height to 2 25ex and the depth to lex is usually a good option e left causes the text inside the box to be typeset left aligned and with a radically ragged right border This is the default To get a better ragged right border use the rightskip option Note that this will override any leftskip or rightskip setting e right causes the text to be right aligned with a radically ragged left border Note that
195. e begin frame plain begin centering pgf image height paperheight somebigimagefile Xpar end centering end frame Example A title page in which the head and footlines are replaced by two graphics setbeamertemplate title page pgfuseimage toptitle vskipOpt plus 1fi111 begin centering usebeamerfont title usebeamercolor fg title inserttitle insertdate end centering vskipOpt plus 1fi111 pgfuseimage bottomtitle begin frame plain titlepage end frame 61 e shrink minimum shrink percentage This option will cause the text of the frame to be shrunk if it is too large to fit on the frame BEAMER will first normally typeset the whole frame Then it has a look at vertical size of the frame text excluding the frame title Tf this vertical size is larger than the text height minus the frame title height BEAMER computes a shrink factor and scales down the frame text by this factor such that the frame text then fills the frame completely Using this option will automatically cause the squeeze option to be used also Since the shrinking takes place only after everything has been typeset shrunk frame text will not fill the frame completely horizontally For this reason you can specify a minimum shrink percentage like 20 If this percentage is specified the frame will be shrunk at least by this percentage Since BEAMER knows this it can increase the horizontal width proportionall
196. e You might also consider using the style xmpmulti sty that comes with BEAMER This file is mainly identical to mpmulti except for two differences First it does not include pause sty a style that conceptually clashes with BEAMER although BEAMER contains a workaround that sidesteps the problem Second it extends the multiinclude command by allowing a special default overlay specification to be given The effect of this is explained below usepackage xmpmulti Defines the command multiinclude The code of this package is due to Klaus Guntermann with some additions of mine It can be used together with BEAMER and with ppower4 i e it can be used as a replacement for mpmulti if the pause package is also included in a ppower4 presentation multiinclude lt default overlay specification gt options base file name Except for the possibility of specifying a default overlay specification this command is identical to the multiinclude command from the ppower4 package If no overlay specification is given the command will search for files called base file name number for in creasing numbers number starting with zero As long as it finds these files it issues an includegraphics 137 El command on them The files following the first one are put on top of the first one Between any two invocations of includegraphics a pause command is inserted You can modify this behavior in different ways by given suitable
197. e although for some unfathomable reason the extension is not added The mp file must contain text written in the MetaFont programming language Since mps files are actually also eps files you can use the normal Nincludegraphics command to include them However as a special bonus you can also include such a file when using pdflatex Normally pdflatex cannot handle eps files but the mps files produced by MetaPost have such a simple and special structure that this is possible The graphics package implements some filters to convert such PostScript output to PDF on the fly For this to work the file should end mps instead of eps The following command can be used to make the graphics package just assume the extension mps for any file it knows nothing about like files ending with 1 which is what MetaPost loves to produce DeclareGraphicsRule mps This special feature currently only works with the graphics package not with pgf 131 13 5 Including Graphic Files Ending mmp The format mmp Multi MetaPost is actually not a format that can be included directly in a TEX file Rather like a mp file it first has to be converted using the MetaPost program The crucial difference between mp and mmp is that in the latter multiple graphics can reside in a single mmp file actually multiple graphics can also reside in a mp file but by convention such a file is called mmp When running MetaPost on a mmp file it will creat
198. e Current Maintainer to update their communication data within one month b If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active maintenance is taken by the Current y Maintainer then announce within the pertinent community your intention to take over maintenance If the Work is a TX work this could be done for example by posting to comp text tex 3 a If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass maintenance of the Work to you then this takes effect immediately upon announcement b If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you then this takes effect immediately upon announcement 4 If you make an intention announcement as described in 2b above and after three months your intention is challenged neither by the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other people then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as to name you as the new Current Maintainer 5 If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes reachable once more within three months of a change completed under the terms of 3b or 4 then that Current Maintainer must become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided they then update their communication data within one month A change in the Current Maintainer does not of itself alter the fact that the Work is distributed under the LPPL license If you become the Current Maintainer of
199. e at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control
200. e efficiently than text A picture can say more than a thousand words Although sometimes a word can say more than a thousand pictures Put at least one graphic on each slide whenever possible Visualizations help an audience enormously Usually place graphics to the left of the text Use the columns environment In a left to right reading culture we look at the left first Graphics should have the same typographic parameters as the text Use the same fonts at the same size in graphics as in the main text A small dot in a graphic should have exactly the same size as a small dot in a text The line width should be the same as the stroke width used in creating the glyphs of the font For example an 11pt non bold Computer Modern font has a stroke width of 0 4pt While bitmap graphics like photos can be much more colorful than the rest of the text vector graphics should follow the same color logic as the main text like black normal lines red highlighted parts green examples blue structure 36 5 3 5 4 Like text you should explain everything that is shown on a graphic Unexplained details make the audience puzzle whether this was something important that they have missed Be careful when importing graphics from a paper or some other source They usually have much more detail than you will be able to explain and should be radically simplified Sometimes the complexity of a graphic is intentional and you are wi
201. e ine ae The proof uses reductio ad absurdum ee Euklid Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique a ES Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem A relatively sober theme useful for a longer talk that demands a sidebar with a full table of contents The same options as for the Berkeley theme can be given G ttingen is a town in Germany It hosted the 42nd Theorietag usetheme options Marburg Example 152 There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p A very dominant variation of the Goettingen theme The same options may be given Marburg is a town in Germany It hosted the 46th Theorietag Musetheme options Hannover Example There ls No Largest Prime Num
202. e not a single encapsulated PostScript file but several ending 0 1 2 and so on The idea is that 0 might contain a main graphic and the following pictures contain overlay material that should be incrementally added to this graphic To include the series of resulting files you can use the command multiinclude from the mpmulti or from the xmpmulti package How this program works is explained in Section 14 1 3 132 14 Animations Sounds and Slide Transitions 14 1 Animations 14 1 1 Including External Animation Files If you have created an animation using some external program like a renderer you can use the capabilities of the presentation program like the Acrobat Reader to show the animation Unfortunately currently there is no portable way of doing this and even the Acrobat Reader does not support this feature on all platforms To include an animation in a presentation you can use for example the package multimedia sty which is part of the BEAMER package You have to include this package explicitly Despite being distributed as part of the BEAMER distribution this package is perfectly self sufficient and can be used independently of BEAMER usepackage multimedia A stand alone package that implements several commands for including external animation and sound files in a PDF document The package can be used together with both dvips plus ps2pdf and pdflatex though the special sound support is available only in pdflatex
203. e number gt text untilSlide slide number text This is mapped to only lt slide number gt text y FromSlide slide number This is mapped to onslide lt slide number gt OnlySlide slide number This is mapped to onslide lt slide number gt UntilSlide slide number This is mapped to onslide lt slide number gt 222 slideCaption tezt This is mapped to date tezt fontTitle texrt Simply inserts text fontText text Simply inserts text PDFtransition prosper transition Maps the prosper transition to an appropriate transxxxx command begin Itemize environment contents end Itemize This is mapped to itemize begin itemstep environment contents end itemstep This is mapped to itemize with the option lt gt begin enumstep environment contents end enumstep This is mapped to enumerate with the option lt gt hiddenitem This is mapped to addtocounter beamerpauses 1 prosperpart options text This command has the same effect as PROSPER s part command BEAMER s normal part command retains its normal semantics Thus you might wish to replace all occurrences of part by prosperpart tsection section name Creates a section named section name The star if present is ignored tsectionandpart part text Mapped to a section command followed by a prosperpart command ARTICLE In art
204. e several good packages like alltt or listings that allow you to circumvent this problem For simple cases the following environment can be used which is defined by BEAMER begin semiverbatim environment contents end semiverbatim The text inside this environment is typeset like verbatim text However the characters and retain their meaning Thus you can say things like alert lt 1 gt std cout lt lt AT amp T likes 100 performance To typeset the three characters and you can use the commands which is redefined inside this environment you do not need it anyway WM and Thus in order to get typeset alert lt 1 gt X you can write alert lt 1 gt X 12 10 Abstract The abstract environment is overlay specificiation aware in BEAMER begin abstract lt action specification gt environment contents end abstract You can use this environment to typeset an abstract Beamer Color Font abstract These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the abstract If a background color is set this background color is used as background for the whole abstract by default Beamer Template Color Font abstract title Color parents titlelike This template is used for the title By default this inserts the word abstractname centered The background color is ignored Beamer Template abstract begin This template is inserted at the very beginning of the abstract before the abstract title a
205. e shown By changing for example the last specification to lt 2 gt you can have the last two points uncovered at the same time A disadvantage of the approach is that you will have to renumber everything if you add a new item This is usually not such a big problem but it can be a nuisance To automatize the uncovering you can use the following code begin itemize lt gt item First point item Second point item Third point end itemize The effect of the lt gt is to install a default overlay specification see the definition of itemize for details Now suppose you wish the second and third point to be shown at the same time You could achieve this by adding the specification lt 2 gt to either the second or third item command However then you still have to do some renumbering if you add a new item at the beginning A better approach is to temporarily use a different overlay specification and the dot notation begin itemize lt gt item First point item lt gt Second point item Third point end itemize You might wish to build your own macros based on these ideas like an itemstep environment or a itemlikeprevious command 23 2 Highlighting the Current Item in an Enumeration If you uncover an enumeration piecewise it is sometimes a good idea to highlight the last uncovered point to draw the audience s attention to it This is best achieved as follows begin itemize item lt 1
206. e theorem end Inserted at the end of a theorem 12 5 Framed and Boxed Text In order to draw a frame a rectangle around some text you can use IATfXs standard command fbox and also frame inside a BEAMER frame the frame command changes its meaning to the normal TFX frame command More frame types are offered by the package fancybox which defines the following commands shadowbox doublebox ovalbox and Ovalbox Please consult the lAT X Companion for details on how to use these commands The BEAMER class also defines two environments for creating colored boxes begin beamercolorbox options beamer color 121 environment contents end beamercolorbox This environment can be used to conveniently typeset some text using some BEAMER color Basically the following two command blocks do the same begin beamercolorbox beamer color Text end beamercolorbox usebeamercolor beamer color colorbox bg color fg Text In other words the environment installs the beamer color and uses the background for the background of the box and the foreground for the text inside the box However in reality numerous options can be given to specify in much greater detail how the box is rendered If the background color of beamer color is empty no background is drawn behind the text that is the background is transparent This command is used extensively by the default inner and outer themes
207. ea to add something to the key to make it clear that the chess bishop is meant This is chess German dict providetranslation knight chess fSpringer providetranslation bishop chess L aufer This is chess English dict providetranslation knight chess knight providetranslation bishop chess bishop 25 3 4 Creating a User Dictionary There are two ways of creating a personal set of translations First you can simply add commands like deftranslation to German figure Figur to your personal macro files Second you can create a personal dictionary file as follows In your document you say documentclass ngerman article usepackage translator usedictionary my personal dictionary and then you create the following file somewhere where TeX can find it This is file my personal dictionary German dict ProvidesDictionary my personal dictionary German deftranslation figure Figur 25 3 5 Translating Keys Once the dictionaries and languages have been setup you can translate keys using the following commands translate options key This command will insert the translation of the key at the current position into the text The command is robust The translation process of key works as follows TRANSLATOR iterates over all languages on the current language path see Section 25 3 6 For each language on the path TRANSLATOR checks whether a translation is available for the key
208. eamer leftsidebar and beamer leftmargin is exactly Gm lmargin Thus if you wish to put some text right next to the left sidebar you might write hskip beamer leftmargin to get there Beamer Template Color Font sidebar left Color font parents sidebar The template is used to typeset the left sidebar As mentioned above the size of the left sidebar is set using the command setbeamersize sidebar width left 2cm BEAMER will not clip sidebars automatically if they are too large When the sidebar is typeset it is put inside a vbox You should currently setup things like the hsize or the parskip yourself The following template options are predefined e default installs an empty template e sidebar theme This option is available if the outer theme sidebar is loaded with the left option In this case this options is selected automatically It shows a mini table of contents in the sidebar 66 Beamer Template Color Font sidebar right Color font parents sidebar This template works the same way as the template for the left The following template options are predefined e default The default right sidebar has zero width Nevertheless it shows navigational symbols and if installed a logo at the bottom of the sidebar protruding to the left into the text e sidebar theme This option is available if the outer theme sidebar is loaded with the right option In this case this option is selected automatically It show
209. eamertemplate itemize item double arrow Sometimes a predefined template needs to get an argument when it is installed Suppose for example we want to define a predefined template that draws a square as the itemize item and we want to make this size of this square configurable In this case we can specify the argument number of the predefined option the same way one does for the newcommand command defbeamertemplate itemize item square 1 hrule width 1 height 1 The following have the same effect setbeamertemplate itemize item square 3pt setbeamertemplate itemize item hrule width 3pt height 3pt As for the newcommand command you can also specify a default optional argument defbeamertemplate itemize item square 1 1ex hrule width 1 height 1 The following have the same effect 170 setbeamertemplate itemize item square 3pt setbeamertemplate itemize item hrule width 3pt height 3pt So do the following setbeamertemplate itemize item square setbeamertemplate itemize item hrule width lex height lex The starred version of the command installs the predefined template option but then immediately calls setbeamertemplate for this option This is useful for the default templates If there are any arguments necessary these are set to relax In certain cases if a predefined template option is chosen you do not only wish the template text to be installed but certain extra actions
210. earching line wise for a mode command to shake it out of its gobbling state T X will not recognize a mode command if a mode specification follows on the same line Thus such a specification must be given on the next line Note When a TFX file ends TEX must not be in the gobbling state Switch this state off using mode on one line and lt all gt on the next Example mode lt article gt This text is typeset only in larticlel mode verb verbatim text is ok mode lt presentation gt 1 this text is inserted only in presentation mode frame tableofcontents currentsection Here we are back to article mode stuff This text is not inserted in presentation mode mode lt presentation gt This text is only inserted in presentation mode The last flavor of the mode command behaves quite differently Xmodex The effect of this mode is to ignore all text outside frames in the presentation modes In article mode it has no effect This mode should only be entered outside of frames Once entered if the current mode is a presentation mode TEX will enter a gobbling state similar to the gobbling state of the second flavor of the mode command The difference is that the text is now read token wise not line wise The text is gobbled 209 token by token until one of the following tokens is found mode frame againframe Apart section subsection appendix note begin frame and end document the last t
211. ecifications can also be used outside frames as in the following examples section lt presentation gt This section exists only in the presentation modes section lt article gt This section exists only in the article mode Presentation modes include beamer trans and handout You can also mix pure mode specifications and overlay specifications although this can get confusing only lt article beamer 1 gt Riddle This will cause the text Riddle to be inserted in article mode and on the first slide of a frame in beamer mode but not at all in handout or trans mode Try to find out how lt beamer beamer 1 gt differs from lt beamer gt and from lt beamer 1 gt As if all this were not already complicated enough there is another mode that behaves in a special way the mode second For this mode a special rule applies An overlay specification for mode beamer also applies to mode second but not the other way round Thus if we are in mode second the specification lt second 2 gt means on slide 2 and lt beamer 2 gt also means on slide 2 To get a slide that is typeset in beamer mode but not in second mode you can use lt second 0 gt 9 6 3 Action Specifications This section also introduces a rather advanced concept You may also wish to skip it on first reading Some overlay specification aware commands cannot handle not only normal overlay specifications but also so called action specifications In an action speci
212. ecomes available and is used if the smoothtree outer theme is loaded A smoothed navigation tree is shown in the headline smoothbars theme This option becomes available and is used if the smoothbars outer theme is loaded A smoothed version of the miniframes headline is shown tree This option becomes available and is used if the tree outer theme is loaded A navigational tree is shown in the headline split theme This option becomes available and is used if the split outer theme is loaded The headline is split into a left part showing the sections and a right part showing the subsections text line tezt The headline is typeset more or less as if it were a normal text line with the text as contents The left and right margin are setup such that they are the same as the margins of normal text The tezt is typeset inside an hbox while the headline is normally typeset in vertical mode Inside the template numerous inserts can be used insertnavigation width Inserts a horizontal navigation bar of the given width into a template The bar lists the sections and below them mini frames for each frame in that section insertpagenumber Inserts the current page number into a template insertsection Inserts the current section into a template insertsectionnavigation width Inserts a vertical navigation bar containing all sections with the current section highlighted insertsectionnavigationhorizontal
213. ed automatically at the beginning of the box unless this option is given Only T Xperts need this option so if you use it you will probably know what you are doing anyway begin beamerboxesrounded options head environment contents 123 end beamerboxesrounded The text inside the environment is framed by a rectangular area with rounded corners For the large rectangular area the BEAMER color specified with the lower option is used Its background is used for the background its foreground for the foreground If the head is not empty head is drawn in the upper part of the box using the BEAMER color specified with the upper option for the fore and background The following options can be given e lower beamer color sets the BEAMER color to be used for the lower main part of the box Its background is used for the background its foreground for the foreground of the main part of the box If either is empty the current background or foreground is used The box will never be transparent e upper beamer color sets the BEAMER color used for the upper head part of the box It is only used if the head is not empty e width dimension causes the width of the text inside the box to be the specified dimension By default the textwidth is used Note that the box will protrude 4pt to the left and right e shadow true or false If set to true a shadow will be drawn If no head is given the head part is completely
214. ed for each frame More generally overlay specification are lists of numbers or number ranges where the start or ending of a range can be left open For example 3 5 6 8 means on all slides except for slides 4 and 7 The qedhere is used to put the QED symbol at the end of the line inside the enumeration Normally the QED symbol is automatically inserted at the end of a proof environment but that would be on an ugly empty line here 23 The item command is not the only command that takes overlay specifications Another useful command that takes one is the uncover command It only shows its argument on the slides specified in the overlay specification On all other slides the argument is hidden though it still occupies space The command only is similar and Euclid could also have tried only lt 4 gt The proof used textit reductio ad absurdum On non specified slides the only command simply throws its argument away and the argument does not occupy any space This leads to different heights of the text on the first three slides and on the fourth slide If the text is centered vertically this will cause the text to wobble and thus uncover should be used However you sometimes wish things to really disappear on some slides and then Xonly is useful Euclid could also have used the class option t which causes the text in frames to be vertically flushed to the top Then a differing text height does not cause wobbli
215. ed in the fourth item insertenumlabel would yield iv The following templates govern how the body of an itemize or an enumerate is typeset Beamer Template itemize enumerate body begin This template is inserted at the beginning of a first level itemize or enumerate environment Furthermore before this template is inserted the BEAMER font and color itemize enumerate body is used Beamer Template itemize enumerate body end This template is inserted at the end of a first level itemize or enumerate environment There exist corresponding templates like itemize enumerate subbody begin for second and third level itemize or enumerates Parent Beamer Template items This template is a parent template of itemize items and enumerate items Example setbeamertemplate items circle will cause all items in itemize or enumerate environ ments to become circles of the appropriate size color and font begin description lt default overlay specification gt long text environment contents end description Like itemize but used to display a list that explains or defines labels The width of long tezt is used to set the indentation Normally you choose the widest label in the description and copy it here If you do not give this argument the default width is used which can be changed using setbeamersize with the argument description width width As for enumerate the default overlay specification is detected by an op
216. ed to as dirt For presentations this rule of not using bold text does not really apply On a presentation slide there is usually very little text and there are numerous elements that try to attract the viewer s attention Using the traditional italics to create emphasis will often be overlooked So using bold text seems a good alternative in a presentation However an even better alternative is using a bright color like red to attract attention As pointed out earlier you should use bold text for small text unless you use an especially robust font like Futura or DejaVu 41 6 Solution Templates In the subdirectories of the directory beamer solutions you will find solution templates in different languages A solution template is a TpX text that solves a specific problem Such a problem might be I need to create a 20 minute talk for a conference or I want to create a slide that introduces the next speaker or I want to create a table that is uncovered piecewise For such a problem a solution template consists of a mixture of a template and an example that can be used to solve this particular problem Just copy the solution template file or parts of it and freely adjust them to your needs The collecting of BEAMER solution templates has only begun and currently there are only very few of them We hope that in the future more solutions will become available and we would like to encourage users of the BEAMER class to
217. eful end itemize end frame end document There is one remaining problem While the article version can easily T X the whole file even in the presence of commands like frame lt 2 gt we do not want the special article text to be inserted into our original BEAMER presentation That means we would like all text between frames to be suppressed More precisely we want all text except for commands like section and so on to be suppressed This behavior can be enforced by specifying the option ignorenonframetext in the presentation version The option will insert a mode at the beginning of your presentation The following example shows a simple usage of the article mode documentclass a4paper article usepackage beamerarticle 4 documentclass ignorenonframetext red beamer mode lt article gt usepackage fullpage mode lt presentation gt usetheme Berlin everyone usepackage english babel usepackage pgf pgfdeclareimage height 1cm myimage filename begin document section Introduction 205 This is the introduction text This text is not shown in the presentation but will be part of the article begin frame begin figure In the article this is a floating figure In the presentation this figure is shown in the first frame pgfuseimage myimage end figure end frame This text is once more not shown in the presentation section Main Part While this text is not shown
218. ele A Bale a ole a RAPA ee Se YE ee ees 232 202k Keys x Bachan e Be ee A LL eh ag Sn iw ig Bk Dec a et te a 232 25 2 2 Language Names sr cece a A E a a 233 20 2 3 Language Paths o s oseeie aa a Md dd a a a a BC 233 25 2 4 gt Dictionaries id a aa ar a a a AR aa a era Gots edd ded 233 25 3 USAGE aca dee a A a RA EE E ee A ee ES 233 29 3 1 Basic Usages ca xc e a a hk e b bih a BOR a a aa E Aa a 233 25 3 2 Providing Translations ee 234 25 3 3 Creating and Using Dictionaries aoaaa aa a 235 25 3 4 Creatine a User Dictionary wiir imati oa a e e e al at a a A AE a a ta E Gana at E 237 25 35 Translating Keys g ro id der de e A a E E a O ed a A a A A 237 25 3 6 Language Path and Language Substitution a 238 25 3 1 Package Loading Processa a edd a wak o ua a a A a E E A 238 Index 239 1 Introduction BEAMER is a IAT X class for creating presentations that are held using a projector but it can also be used to create transparency slides Preparing presentations with BEAMER is different from preparing them with WYSIWYG programs like OpenOffice org Impress Apple Keynote KOffice KPresenter or Microsoft PowerPoint A BEAMER presentation is created like any other ATEX document It has a preamble and a body the body contains sections and subsections the different slides called frames in BEAMER are put in environments they are structured using itemize and enumerate environments and so on The obvious disadvan
219. eme author Manuel Carro Boadilla is a village in the vicinity of Madrid hosting the University s Computer Science department usetheme options Madrid Example There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum With an introduction to a new proof technique MIAEad a There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Q Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 Euklid Univ Alexandria ISPN 80 There Is No Largest Prime Number Like the Boadilla theme except that stronger colors are used and that the itemize icons are not modified The same options as for the Boadilla theme may be given Theme author Manuel Carro Madrid is the capital of Spain usetheme AnnArbor Example 147 Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p IE ee no tros Prime Number ESPN IE ree eo Largest Prime Number ISP Like Boadilla but using the colors of the
220. emma and one definition you would have Theorem 1 Lemma 2 and Definition 3 Some people prefer all three to be numbered 1 We would strongly like to discourage this The problem is that this makes it virtually impossible to find anything since Theorem 2 might come after Definition 10 or the other way round Papers and worse books that have a Theorem 1 and a Definition 1 are a pain e Do not inflict pain on other people Bibliographies You may also wish to present a bibliography at the end of your talk so that people can see what kind of further reading is possible When adding a bibliography to a presentation keep the following in mind e It is a bad idea to present a long bibliography in a presentation Present only very few references Natu rally this applies only to the talk itself not to a possible handout e If you present more references than fit on a single slide you can be almost sure that none of them will be remembered 33 Present references only if they are intended as further reading Do not present a list of all things you used like in a paper You should not present a long list of all your other great papers except if you are giving an application talk Using the cite commands can be confusing since the audience has little chance of remembering the citations If you cite the references always cite them with full author name and year like Tantau 2003 instead of something like 2 4 or
221. emplate frame begin The text of this template is inserted at the beginning of each frame in article mode and only there You can use it say to start a minipage environment at the beginning of a frame or to insert a horizontal bar or whatever Beamer Template frame end The text of this template is inserted at the end of each frame in article mode You can use the frame environment inside other environments like this newenvironment slide begin frame end frame or like this newenvironment myframe 1 begin frame fragile environment myframe frametitle 1 end frame However the actual mechanics are somewhat sensitive since the collecting of the frame contents is not easy so do not attempt anything too fancy As a rule the beginning of the environment can be pretty arbitrary but the ending must end with end frame and should not contain any end xxx Anything really complex is likely to fail If you need some end xxx there define a new command that contains this stuff as in the following example 62 newenvironment itemizeframe begin frame startitemizeframe stopitemizeframe end frame newcommand startitemizeframe begin bfseries begin itemize newcommand stopitemizeframe end itemize end bfseries begin itemizeframe item First item end itemizeframe 8 2 Components of a Frame Each frame consists of several components 1 a headline and a footline a left and a right sidebar
222. en called for you so you will only seldomly have to use this command usebeamerfont beamer font name This command changes the current font to the font specified by the beamer font name The beamer font name can be a not too fancyful text and may contain spaces Typical examples are frametitle or section in toc or My Font 1 BEAMER fonts can have and should have the same name as BEAMER templates and BEAMER colors Example usebeamerfont frametitle In the unstarred version of this command the font is changed ac cording to the attributes specified in the beamer font name but unspecified attributes remain unchanged For example if the font specifies that the font should be bold but specifies nothing else and if the current font is large then usebeamerfont causes the current font to become large and bold In the starred version of this command the font is first reset before the font s attributes are applied Thus in the above example of a BEAMER font having only the attribute boldface set saying usebeamerfont will always cause the current font to become a normal size normal shape bold default family font 18 3 3 Setting Beamer s Fonts As for BEAMER colors there exists a central command for setting and changing BEAMER fonts setbeamerfont beamer font name attributes This command sets or resets certain attributes of the BEAMER font beamer font name In the unstarred version this command just
223. ening lt The effect is the same as for enumerate and itemize Example begin description item Lion King of the savanna item Tiger King of the jungle end description begin description longest label Nitem lt 1 gt short Some text item lt 2 gt longest label Some text Nitem lt 3 gt long label Some text end description Example The following has the same effect as the previous example begin description lt gt longest label item short Some text item longest label Some text item long label Some text end description 113 Beamer Template Color Font description item This template is used to typeset the description items When this template is called the BEAMER font and color description item are installed The following template options are predefined e default By default the description item text is just inserted without any modification The main insert that is useful inside this template is e insertdescriptionitem inserts the text of the current description item In order to simplify changing the color or font of items the different kinds of items inherit from or just use the following general BEAMER color and fonts Beamer Color Font item Color parents local structure Font parents structure This color font serves as a parent for the individual items of itemize and enumerate environments but also for items in the table of contents Since its color parent is the loc
224. ent modes For example you might wish a certain text to appear only from the third slide on during your presen tation but in a handout for the audience there should be no third slide and the text should appear already on the second slide In this case you could write only lt 3 handout 2 gt Some text The vertical bar which must be followed by a white space separates the two different specifications 3 and handout 2 By writing a mode name before a colon you specify that the following specification only applies to that mode If no mode is given as in 3 the mode beamer is automatically added For this reason if you write only lt 3 gt Text and you are in handout mode the text will be shown on all slides since there is no restriction specified for handouts and since the 3 is the same as beamer 3 It is also possible to give an overlay specification that contains only a mode name or several separated by vertical bars only lt article gt This text is shown only in article mode An overlay specification that does not contain any slide numbers is called a pure mode specification If a mode specification is given all modes that are not mentioned are automatically suppressed Thus lt beamer 1 gt means on all slides in beamer mode and also on all slides in all other modes since nothing special is specified for them whereas lt beamer gt means on all slides in beamer mode and not on any other slide 87 Mode sp
225. ent is still available under the name original existing environment name Example renewenvironment lt gt verse beginfactionenv 1 beginforiginalverse end originalverse end actionenv The following two commands can be used to ensure that a certain counter is automatically reset on subsequent slides of a frame This is necessary for example for the equation count You might want this count to be increased from frame to frame but certainly not from overlay slide to overlay slide For equation counters and footnote counters you should not use footnotes these commands have already been invoked resetcounteronoverlays counter name After you have invoked this command the value of the specified counter will be the same on all slides of every frame Example resetcounteronoverlays equation resetcountonoverlays count register name The same as resetcounteronoverlays except that this command should be used with counts that have been created using the TEX primitive newcount instead of IATEX s definecounter Example newcount mycount resetcountonoverlays mycount 9 6 2 Mode Specifications This section is only important if you use BEAMER s mode mechanism to create different versions of your presen tation If you are not familiar with BEAMER s modes please skip this section or read Section 21 first In certain cases you may wish to have different overlay specifications to apply to a command in differ
226. entation due to the different ways monitors beamers and printers reproduce colors Add lots of black to pure colors when you use them on bright backgrounds 37 e Maximize contrast Normal text should be black on white or at least something very dark on something very bright Never do things like light green text on not so light green background e Background shadings decrease the legibility without increasing the information content Do not add a background shading just because it somehow looks nicer e Inverse video bright text on dark background can be a problem during presentations in bright environ ments since only a small percentage of the presentation area is light up by the beamer Inverse video is harder to reproduce on printouts and on transparencies 5 6 Choosing Appropriate Fonts and Font Attributes Text and fonts literally surround us constantly Try to think of the last time when there was no text around you within ten meters Likely this has never happened in your life Whenever you wear clothing even a swim suit there is a lot of text right next to your body The history of fonts is nearly as long as the history of civilization itself There are tens of thousands of fonts available these days some of which are the product of hundreds of years of optimization Choosing the right fonts for a presentation is by no means trivial and wrong choices will either just look bad or worse make the audience have t
227. equested them and I thought that these features would be nice to have and reasonably easy to implement Other people have given valuable feedback on themes on the user s guide on features of the class on the internals of the implementation on special ATX features and on life in general A small selection of these people includes in no particular order and I have surely forgotten to name lots of people who really really deserve being in this list Carsten for everything Birgit for being the first person to use BEAMER besides me Tua for his silent criticism Rolf Niepraschk for showing me how to program ATX correctly Claudio Beccari for writing part of the documentation on font encodings Thomas Baumann for the emacs stuff Stefan M ller for not loosing hope Uwe Kern for XCOLOR Hendri Adriaens for HA PROSPER Ohura Makoto for spotting typos People who have contributed to the themes include Paul Gomme Manuel Carro and Marlon R gis Schmitz Joseph Wright Thanks to Till Tantau for the huge development effort in creating BEAMER Sincere thanks to Vedran Mileti for taking the lead in continuing development Vedran Mileti First I would like to thank Karl Berry and Sanda Bujaci for encouragement without which I wouldn t ever be anything but a ATpX user I would also like to thank Ana Me trovi my colleague who was excited by the prospect of using BEAMER for preparing class material Ivona Frankovi and Ma
228. ere without any penalty The option is just a convenience and makes sense only together with the allowsframebreaks option e allowframebreaks fraction When this option is given the frame will be automatically broken up into several frames if the text does not fit on a single slide In detail when this option is given the following things happen 1 Overlays are not supported 2 Any notes for the frame created using the note command will be inserted after the first page of the frame 3 Any footnotes for the frame will be inserted on the last page of the frame 4 If there is a frame title each of the pages will have this frame title with a special note added indicating which page of the frame that page is By default this special note is a Roman number However this can be changed using the following template Beamer Template Color Font frametitle continuation The text of this template is inserted at the end of every title of a frame with the allowframebreaks option set The following template options are predefined default Installs a Roman number as the template The number indicates the current page of the frame roman Alias for the default from second tezt Installs a template that inserts text from the second page of a frame on By default the text inserted is insertcontinuationtext which in turn is cont by default The following inserts are available insertcontinuationcount inserts the cu
229. ersion of PostScript fonts come with real small caps though the small caps of Computer Modern are one point size too large for some unfathomable reason but your audience is going to pardon this since it will not be noticed anyway Simple PostScript fonts like out of the box Helvetica or Times only come with faked small caps e Text typeset in small caps is harder to read than normal text The reason is that we read by seeing the shape of words For example the word shape is mainly recognized by seing one normal letter one ascending letter a normal letter one descending letter and a normal letter One has much more trouble spotting a misspelling like shepe than spape Small caps destroy the shape of words since SHAPE SHEPE and SPAPE all have the same shape thus making it much harder to tell them apart Your audience will read small caps more slowly than normal text This is by the way why legal disclaimers are often written in uppercase letters not to make them appear more important to you but to make them much harder to actually read 5 6 4 Font Weight The weight of a font refers to the thickness of the letters Usually fonts come as regular or as bold fonts There often also exist semibold ultrabold or black thin or ultrathin or hair versions In typography using a bold font to create emphasis especially within normal text is frowned upon bold words in the middle of a normal text are referr
230. erted at the end of the verse begin quotation lt action specification gt environment contents end quotation Use this environment to typeset multi paragraph quotations Think again before presenting multi paragraph quotations Beamer Color Font quotation These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the quotation Beamer Template quotation begin This template is inserted at the beginning of the quotation Beamer Template quotation end This template is inserted at the end of the quotation begin quote lt action specification gt environment contents end quote Use this environment to typeset a single paragraph quotation Beamer Color Font quote These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the quote Beamer Template quote begin This template is inserted at the beginning of the quote Beamer Template quote end This template is inserted at the end of the quote 128 12 12 Footnotes First a word of warning Using footnotes is usually not a good idea They disrupt the flow of reading You can use the usual footnote command It has been augmented to take an additional option for placing footnotes at the frame bottom instead of at the bottom of the current minipage footnote lt overlay specification gt options 14 text Inserts a footnote into the current frame Footnotes will always be shown at the bottom of the current frame they will never be moved to other frames As usual one can
231. est Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There is no largest prime number Suppose p were the largest prime number Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number A not quite too dominant theme This theme gives compressed information about the current section and subsection at the top and about the title and the author at the bottom No shadows are used giving the presentation a flat look The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme Copenhagen is the capital of Denmark It is connected to Malm by the resund bridge usetheme Luebeck Example There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 E Results m Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number A variation on the Copenhagen theme Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There is no largest prime number Suppose p were the largest prime number Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number L beck is a town in nothern Germany It hosted the 41st Theorietag usetheme Malmoe
232. estart 106 hyperlinkframestartnext 106 hyperlinkmovie 135 hyperlinkmute 140 hyperlinkpresentationend 106 hyperlinkpresentationstart 106 hyperlinkslidenext 106 hyperlinkslideprev 106 hyperlinksound 140 hyperref package 17 hyperref list of options class option 17 hypertarget 104 ifarticle 227 ifbeamercolorempty 185 ifbeamertemplateempty 169 ifportrait 227 ifslide 227 ifslidesonly 227 Ilmenau presentation theme 154 includeonlyframes 30 includeonlylecture 98 includeslide 207 infolines outer theme 162 inmargin inner theme 161 Inner themes circles 160 default 159 inmargin 161 rectangles 160 rounded 160 inputenc package 17 Inserts insertappendixendpage 65 insertappendixstartpage 65 insertauthor 92 insertbackfindforwardnavigationsymbol 72 insertbiblabel 103 insertblocktitle 117 insertbuttontext 105 insertcaption 125 insertcaptionname 125 insertcaptionnumber 125 insertcontinuationcount 59 insertcontinuationcountroman 59 insertcontinuationtext 59 insertdate 92 insertdescriptionitem 114 insertdocnavigationsymbol 72 insertdocumentendpage 65 insertdocumentstartpage 65 insertenumlabel 112 113 insertfootnotemark 129 insertfootnotetext 129 insertframeendpage 65 insertframenavigationsymbol 72 insertframenumber 65 insertframestartpage 65 insertframesubtitle 74 insertframetitle 74 insertgotosymbol 105 insertin
233. etters and uppercase Roman letters respectively So the mini template i would yield the items i ii iii iv and so on The mini template A would yield the items A B C D and so on For more details on the possible mini templates see the documentation of the enumerate package Note that there is also a template that governs the appearance of the mini template Example Xbegintfenumerate item This is important item This is also important end enumerate beginfenumerate i item First Roman point item Second Roman point end enumerate beginfenumerate lt gt i item First Roman point item Second Roman point uncovered on second slide end enumerate ARTICLE To use the mini template you have to include the package enumerate Parent Beamer Template enumerate items Similar to itemize items this template is a parent template whose children are enumerate item enumerate subitem enumerate subsubitem and enumerate mini template These templates gov ern how the text the number of an enumeration is typeset The following template options are predefined e default The default enumeration marker uses the scheme 1 2 3 for the first level 1 1 1 2 1 3 for the second level and 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 for the third level e circle Places the numbers inside little circles The colors are taken from item projected or subitem projected or subsubitem projected e square Places
234. ext command will be typeset using this color The background is currently ignored 17 4 The Color Palettes When one designs a color theme one faces the following problem Suppose we want the colors in the headline to gradually change from black to say blue Whatever is at the very top of the headline should be black what comes right below it should be dark blue and at the bottom of the headline things should just be blue Unfortunately different outer themes will put different things at the top One theme might put the author at the top another theme might put the document title there This makes it impossible to directly assign one of the three colors black dark blue and blue to the different elements that are typically rendered in the headline No matter how we assign them things will look wrong for certain outer themes To circumvent this problem BEAMER uses a layer of palette colors Color themes typically only change these palette colors For example a color theme might make the BEAMER color palette primary blue make palette secondary a dark blue and make palette tertiary black Outer themes can now setup things such that whatever they show at the top of the headline inherits from palette primary what comes below inherits from palette secondary and whatever is at the bottom inherits from palette tertiary This way color themes can change the way even complicated outer themes look and they can do so consistently No
235. f Alexandria Theorem There is no largest prime number From Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number When 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers PESSE E Ea 280 Results 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Proof of the Main Theorem The idea behind this theme is to have structuring information on the left and normal information on the right To this end blocks are redefined such that the block title is shown on the left and the block body is shown on the right The code used to place text in the margin is a bit fragile You may often need to adjust the spacing by hand so use at your own risk Itemize items are redefined such that they appear on the left However only the position is changed by changing some spacing parameters the code used to draw the items is not changed otherwise Because of this you can load another inner theme first and then load this theme afterwards This theme is a dirty inner theme since it messes with things that an inner theme should not mess with In particular it changes the width of the left sidebar to a large value However you can still use it together with most outer themes Using columns inside this theme is problematic Most of the time the result will not be what you expect 161 16 2 Outer Themes An outer theme dictates roughly the overall layout of frames It specifies where
236. f palette primary Great care must be taken with this theme since both the white gray and the black gray contrasts are much lower than with other themes Make sure that the contrast is high enough for the actual presentation You can change the grayish background by changing the background of normal text usecolortheme crane Example 177 i le ji E Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics AAA University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme uses the colors of Lufthansa whose logo is a crane It is not an official theme by that company however usecolortheme dove Example Desi wesie There Is No Largest Prime Number Number Number A 4 A The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid Results There Is No Largest Prime Number Results i With an introduction to a new proof technique ace Theorem 4 There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme is nearly a black and white theme and useful for creating presentations that
237. f technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results m Proof of the Main Theorem In this theme itemize and enumerate items and table of contents entries start with small rectangles useinnertheme options rounded Example 160 There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandri 3 Dien seen ee Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem In this theme itemize and enumerate items and table of contents entries start with small balls If a background is specified for blocks then the corners of the background rectangles will be rounded off The following options may be given e shadow adds a shadow to all blocks useinnertheme inmargin Example There Is No Largest Prime Number Th f ductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number RR With an introduction to a new proof technique Who Euklid o
238. f the navigation bar the optional bar for the subsection name and the background of the frame title No footline is created You can get the footlines of the miniframes theme by first loading that theme and then loading the smoothbars theme The following options can be given e subsection true or false shows or suppresses line showing the subsection in the headline It is shown by default useoutertheme options sidebar Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No There Is No Largest Prime Largest Prime Number Number as There Is No Largest Prime Number BA With an introduction to a new proof technique ae Polen Theorem a Treen There is no largest prime number Proof Euklid of Alexandria Ss 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem In this layout a sidebar is shown that contains a small table of contents with the current section subsection or subsection highlighted The frame title is vertically centered in a rectangular area at the top that always occupies the same amount of space in all frames Finally the logo is shown in the corner resulting from the sidebar and the frame title rectangle There are several ways of modifying the layout using the options Tf you se
239. fexample lt action specification gt additional text lt action specification gt environment contents end example Behaves like the theorem environment except that the theorem style example is used A side effect of using this theorem style is that the environment contents is put in an exampleblock instead of a block The environment examples behaves exactly the same way The default template for typesetting theorems suppresses the theorem number even if this number is available for typesetting which it is by default in all predefined environments but if you define your own environment using newtheorem no number will be available In article mode theorems are automatically numbered By specifying the class option envcountsect theorems will be numbered locally to each section which is usually a good idea except for very short articles begin proof lt action specification gt proof name lt action specification gt environment contents end proof Typesets a proof If the optional proof name is given it completely replaces the word Proof This is different from normal theorems where the optional argument is shown in brackets At the end of the theorem a qed symbol is shown except if you say qedhere earlier in the proof this is exactly as in amsthm The default qed symbol is an open circle To completely suppress the symbol write def qedsymbol in your preamble To get a closed square s
240. fication gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the current frame hyperlinkframeend lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the current frame hyperlinkframestartnext lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the next frame hyperlinkframeendprev lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the previous frame The previous four command exist also with frame replaced by subsection everywhere and also again with frame replaced by section hyperlinkpresentationstart lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the presentation hyperlinkpresentationend lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the presentation This excludes the appendix 106 hyperlinkappendixstart lt overlay specification gt 1 link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the appendix If there is no appendix this will jump to the last slide of the document hyperlinkappendixend lt overlay specification gt 1 link text Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the appendix Xhyperlinkdocumentstart lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the presentation hyperlinkdocumentend lt overlay speci
241. fication gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the presentation or if an appendix is present to the last slide of the appendix 11 2 Repeating a Frame at a Later Point Sometimes you may wish some slides of a frame to be shown in your main talk but wish some supplementary slides of the frame to be shown only in the appendix In this case the againframe command is useful againframe lt overlay specification gt lt default overlay specification gt options name PRESEN Resumes a frame that was previously created using frame with the option label name You must have TATION used this option just placing a label inside a frame by hand is not enough You can use this command to continue a frame that has been interrupted by another frame The effect of this command is to call the frame command with the given overlay specification default overlay specification if present and options if present and with the original frame s contents Example frame lt 1 2 gt label myframe begin itemize item lt alert 1 gt First subject item lt alert 2 gt Second subject item lt alert 3 gt Third subject end itemize J frame Some stuff explaining more on the second matter againframe lt 3 gt myframe The effect of the above code is to create four slides In the first two the items 1 and 2 are highlighted The third slide contains the text Some
242. fication the list of slide numbers and ranges is prefixed by action Q where action is the name of a certain action to be taken on the specified slides item lt 3 alert 3 gt Shown from slide 3 on alerted on slide 3 In the above example the item command which allows actions to be specified will uncover the item text from slide three on and it will additionally alert this item exactly on slide 3 Not all commands can take an action specification Currently only item though not in article mode currently action the environment actionenv and the block environments like block or theorem handle them By default the following actions are available e alert alters the item or block e uncover uncovers the item or block this is the default if no action is specified e only causes the whole item or block to be inserted only on the specified slides e visible causes the text to become visible only on the specified slides the difference between uncover and visible is the same as between uncover and visible e invisible causes the text to become invisible on the specified slides The rest of this section explains how you can add your own actions and make commands action specification aware You may wish to skip it upon first reading You can easily add your own actions An action specification like action slide numbers simply inserts an environment called action env around the item or parameter of action with lt s
243. fl4T X on the file to get a BEAMER presentation with overlays Adding the notes option will also show the notes Certain commands like LeftFoot are ignored You can change the theme using the usual commands You can also use all normal BEAMER commands and concepts like overlay specifications in the file You can also create an article version by using the class article and including the package beamerarticle In the following the effects of PROSPER commands in BEAMER are listed email text Simply typesets its argument in typewriter text Should hence be given inside the author command institution tezt This command is mapped to BEAMER s institute command if given outside the author command otherwise it typesets its argument in a smaller font Logo x y logo teat This is mapped to logo logo text The coordinates are ignored begin slide options frame title environment contents end slide Inserts a frame with the fragile singleslide option set The frame title will be enclosed in a frametitle command The following options may be given e trans prosper transition installs the specified prosper transition as the transition effect when show ing the slide e prosper transition has the same effect as trans prosper transition e toc entry overrides the subsection table of contents entry created by this slide by entry Note that a subsection entry is created for a slide only if
244. for the languages 238 Index This index only contains automatically generated entries sorry A good index should also contain carefully selected keywords professional font package package 19 10pt class option 194 11pt class option 194 12pt class option 194 14pt class option 195 17pt class option 195 20pt class option 195 8pt class option 194 9pt class option 194 abstract color font 127 abstract environment 127 abstract begin template 127 abstract end template 128 abstract title template color font 127 action 89 actionenv environment 89 addfootbox 146 addheadbox 146 addtobeamertemplate 170 againframe 107 albatross color theme 176 AlDraTex package 16 alert 115 alertblock environment 117 alerted text color font 115 alerted text begin template 116 alerted text end template 116 alertenv environment 116 alltt package 16 alt 81 altenv environment 83 always typeset second mode beamer option 213 amsthm package 16 animate 136 animatevalue 136 AnnArbor presentation theme 147 Antibes presentation theme 149 appendix 103 aspectratio 141 class option 76 aspectratio 149 class option 76 aspectratio 1610 class option 76 aspectratio 169 class option 76 aspectratio 32 class option 76 aspectratio 43 class option 76 aspectratio 54 class option 76 AtBeginLecture 98 AtBeginNote 200 AtBeginPart 97 AtBeginSection 95 AtBeginSubsection 96 AtBeginSub
245. for typesetting the headlines and footlines It is not really intended to be used in normal frames for example it is not available inside article mode You should prefer using structuring elements like blocks or theorems that automatically insert colored boxes as needed Example The following example could be used to typeset a headline with two lines the first showing the document title the second showing the author s name begin beamercolorbox ht 2 5ex dp 1ex center title in head foot usebeamerfont title in head foot insertshorttitle end beamercolorbox begin beamercolorbox ht 2 5ex dp 1ex center author in head foot usebeamerfont fauthor in head foot insertshortauthor end beamercolorbox Example Typesetting a postit setbeamercolor postit fg black bg yellow begin beamercolorbox sep 1em wd 5cm postit Place me somewhere end beamercolorbox The following options can be given e wd width sets the width of the box This command has two effects First T X s hsize is set to width Second after the box has been typeset its width is set to width no matter what it actually turned out to be Since setting the Mhsize does not automatically change some of 4TRX s linewidth dimensions you should consider using a minipage inside this environment if you fool around with the width If the width is larger than the normal text width as specified by the value of textwidth the wi
246. four modes that is to all modes except for the article mode Depending on the current mode you may wish to have certain text inserted only in that mode For example you might wish a certain frame or a certain table to be left out of your article version In some situations you can use the only command for this purpose However the command mode which is described in the following is much more powerful than Xonly The command actually comes in three flavors which only slightly differ in syntax The first and simplest is the version that takes one argument It behaves essentially the same way as only mode lt mode specification gt text Causes the text to be inserted only for the specified modes Recall that a mode specification is just an overlay specification in which no slides are mentioned The text should not do anything fancy that involves mode switches or including other files In particular you should not put an include command inside text Use the argument free form below instead Example mode lt article gt Extra detail mentioned only in the article version mode lt beamer trans gt frame tableofcontents currentsection The second flavor of the mode command takes no argument No argument means that it is not followed by an opening brace but any other symbol 208 mode lt mode specification gt In the specified mode this command actually has no effect The interesting
247. g e caption name own line As the name suggests this options puts the caption name like Figure on its own line 124 Inside the template you can use the following inserts insertcaption Inserts the text of the current caption insertcaptionname Inserts the name of the current caption This word is either Table or Figure or if the babel package is used some translation thereof insertcaptionnumber Inserts the number of the current figure or table Beamer Color Font caption name These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the caption name a word like Figure The caption template must directly use them they are not installed automatically by the insertcaptionname com mand Beamer Template caption label separator This template is inserted between caption name and caption text The following template options are predefined default Typesets the colon followed by the space none Typesets no separator colon Alias for the default period Typesets the period followed by the space space Typesets the space quad Typesets the quad followed by the space endash Typesets the en dash surrounded by spaces 12 7 Splitting a Frame into Multiple Columns The BEAMER class offers several commands and environments for splitting perhaps only part of a frame into multiple columns These commands have nothing to do with BTEX s commands for creating columns Columns
248. ghtly changed or corrected submitted themes but we still list the original authors usetheme default Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem s h There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem As the name suggests this theme is installed by default It is a sober no nonsense theme that makes minimal use of color or font variations This theme is useful for all kinds of talks except for very long talks usetheme headheight head height footheight foot height boxes Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem A There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem For this theme you can specify an arbitrary number of templates for
249. give a number as options which will cause the footnote to use that number The BEAMER class adds one additional option e frame causes the footnote to be shown at the bottom of the frame This is normally the default behavior anyway but in minipages and certain blocks it makes a difference In a minipage the footnote is usually shown as part of the minipage rather than as part of the frame If an overlay specification is given this causes the footnote text to be shown only on the specified slides The footnote symbol in the text is shown on all slides Example footnote On a fast machine Example footnote frame 2 1Not proved Example footnote lt gt Der Spiegel 4 04 S 90 Beamer Template Color Font footnote This template will be used to render the footnote Inside this template the following two inserts can be used e insertfootnotetext Inserts the current footnote text e insertfootnotemark Inserts the current footnote mark like a raised number This mark is computed automatically Beamer Color Font footnote mark This BEAMER color font is used when rendering the footnote mark both in the text and at the begin ning of the footnote itself 129 13 Graphics In the following the advantages and disadvantages of different possible ways of creating graphics for BEAMER presentations are discussed Much of the information presented in the following is not really special to BEAMER but applies to any othe
250. glitter lt 2 3 gt direction 90 transreplace lt overlay specification gt options Replace the previous slide directly default behaviour 141 transsplitverticalin lt overlay specification gt L options Show the slide by sweeping two vertical lines from the sides inward Example transsplitverticalin transsplitverticalout lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by sweeping two vertical lines from the center outward Example Ntranssplitverticalout transsplithorizontalin lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by sweeping two horizontal lines from the sides inward Example Ntranssplithorizontalin transsplithorizontalout lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by sweeping two horizontal lines from the center outward Example transsplithorizontalout transwipe lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by sweeping a single line in the specified direction thereby wiping out the previous contents Example transwipe direction 90 You can also specify how long a given slide should be shown using the following overlay specification aware command transduration lt overlay specification gt number of seconds In full screen mode show the slide for number of seconds If zero is specified the slide is shown as short as possible This can be used to create interesting pseudo animations Example transduration lt 2 gt 1 Notice that
251. h it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 45 8 10 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation
252. h the overlay specification given for the action directly following it This causes the only to be invoked exactly for the specified overlays Here are example usages begin itemize item lt 1 ballot 1 gt First point item lt 2 ballot 2 gt Second point item lt 3 ballot 3 gt Third point end itemize and begin itemize lt ballot gt item First point item Second point item Third point end itemize In the following example more and more items become checked from slide to slide begin itemize lt ballot visible 1 1 gt item First point item Second point item Third point end itemize The important point is ballot The funny visible 1 1 has the following effect Although it has no effect with respect to what is shown after all it applies to all slides it ensures that in the enumeration the slide number 4 is mentioned Thus there will also be a slide in which all three points are checked 23 4 Uncovering Tagged Formulas Piecewise Suppose you have a three line formula as the following begin falign A amp B amp CM amp D end align 216 Uncovering this formula line by line is a little tricky A first idea is to use the pause or onslide commands Unfortunately these do not work since align internally reprocesses its input several times which messes up the delicate internals of the commands The next idea is the following which works a little bet
253. hanism to position text and graphics on the page In certain situation you may instead wish a certain text or graphic to appear at a page position that is specified absolutely This means that the position is specified relative to the upper left corner of the slide The package textpos provides several commands for positioning text absolutely and it works together with BEAMER When using this package you will typically have to specify the options overlay and perhaps absolute For details on how to use the package please see its documentation 12 9 Verbatim and Fragile Text If you wish to use a verbatim environment in a frame you have to add the option fragile to the frame environment In this case you really have to use the frame environment not the frame command and the end frame must be alone on a single line Using this option will cause the frame contents to be written to an external file and then read back See the description of the frame environment for more details You must also use the fragilel option for frames that include any fragile text which is any text that is not interpreted the way text is usually interpreted by T X For example if you use a package that locally redefined the meaning of say the character you must use this option Inside verbatim environments you obviously cannot use commands like alert lt 2 gt to highlight part of code since the text is written in well verbatim There ar
254. he Modified Version N Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section O Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers If the Modified Version includes new front matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant To do this add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version s license notice These titles must be distinct from any other section titles You may add a section Entitled Endorsements provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties for example statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front Cover Text and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back Cover Text to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version Only one passage of Front Cover Text and one of Back Cover Text may be added by or through arrangements made by any one entity If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of you may not add another but you may replace the old one on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one
255. he code used to typeset it In article mode most of the template mechanism is switched off and has no effect However a few templates are also available If this is the case it is specially indicated Here are a few hints that might be helpful when you wish to set a template e Usually you might wish to copy code from an existing template The code often takes care of some things that you may not yet have thought about The default inner and outer themes might be useful starting points Also the file beamerbaseauxtemplates sty contains interesting auxilliary templates e When copying code from another template and when inserting this code in the preamble of your document not in another style file you may have to switch on the at character To do so add the command makeatletter before the setbeamertemplate command and the command makeatother afterward e Most templates having to do with the frame components headlines sidebars etc can only be changed in the preamble Other templates can be changed during the document e The height of the headline and footline templates is calculated automatically This is done by typeset ting the templates and then having a look at their heights This recalculation is done right at the beginning of the document after all packages have been loaded and even after these have executed their AtBeginDocument initialization e Getting the boxes right inside any template is often a
256. he command PreloadUnicodePage code page to give ucs a chance to preload these code pages You will know that a character has not been preloaded if you get a message like Please insert into preamble The code page of a character is given by the unicode number of the character divided by 256 documentclass utf8 beamer This option sets the input encoding to utf8 It s designed to be used without ucs It s the same as saying usepackage utf8 inputenc in the preamble Note that none of these options apply to lualatex and xelatex since both support Unicode natively without any extra packages Most of the time using these options actually harms output quality so be careful about what you use If you want to have a document that allows compiling with multiple drivers take a look at iftex ifxetex and ifluatex packages Passing option utf8 to beamerarticle has the same effect as saying usepackage utf 8 inputenc in the preamble Again take care if you use lualatex or xelatex usepackage listings PRESEN TATION Note that you must treat lstlisting environments exactly the same way as you would treat verbatim environments When using defverbatim that contains a colored 1stlisting use the colored option of defverbatinm Example usepackage listings begin document def verbatim colored mycode begin lstlisting frame single emph cout emphstyle color blue cout lt lt Hello world en
257. he given dimension e label movie label Assigns a label to the movie such that it can later be referenced by the command hyperlinkmovie which can be used to stop the movie or to show a different part of it The movie label is not a normal label It should not be too fancy since it is inserted literally into the PDF code In particular it should not contain closing parentheses e loop Causes the movie to start again when the end has been reached Normally the movie just stops at the end e once Causes the movie to just stop at the end This is the default e open Causes the player to stay open when the movie has finished e palindrome Causes the movie to start playing backwards when the end has been reached and to start playing forward once more when the beginning is reached and so on e poster Asks the viewer application to show the first image of the movie when the movie is not playing Normally nothing is shown when the movie is not playing and thus the box containing the poster text is shown For a movie that does not have any images but sound or for movies with an uninformative first image this option is not so useful e repeat is the same as loop e showcontrols true or false Causes a control bar to be displayed below the movie while it is playing Instead of showcontrols true you can also just say showcontrols By default no control bar is shown 134 e start time s Causes the first time seconds of the mov
258. he language preferred by the user The TRANSLATOR package is not intended to be used to automatically translate more than a few words You may wonder whether the TRANSLATOR package is really necessary since there is the very nice babel package available for TX This package already provides translations for words like figure Unfortunately the architecture of the babel package was designed in such a way that there is no way of adding translations of new words to the very short list of translations directly built into babel The TRANSLATOR package was specifically designed to allow an easy extension of the vocabulary It is both possible to add new words that should be translated and translations of these words The TRANSLATOR package can be used together with babel In this case babel is used for language specific things like special quotation marks and input shortcuts while TRANSLATOR is used for the translation of words 25 1 2 How to Read This Section This section explains the commands of the TRANSLATOR package and its usage The public commands and environments provided by the translator package are described throughout the text In each such description the described command environment or option is printed in red Text shown in green is optional and can be left out In the following documentation the installation is explained first followed by an overview of the basic concepts used Then we explain the usage of the package
259. hemes do not install this theme by default while the old compatibility themes do Since you can reload the theme once it has been loaded you cannot use this theme with the old compatibility themes to set also titles to a bold font usefonttheme options structureitalicserif Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme is similarly as the structurebold font theme but where structurebold makes text bold this theme typesets it in italics and in the standard serif font The same options as for the structurebold theme are supported See Section 5 6 3 for the pros and cons of using italics usefonttheme options structuresmallcapsserif Example 193 THERE IS NO LARGEST PRIME NUMBER THE PROOF USES reductio ad absurdum THERE IS NO LARGEST PRIME NUMBER WITH AN INTRODUCTION TO A NEW PROOF TECHNIQUE THEOREM Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number f PROOF Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th
260. hen you click on it jumps the presentation to some other slide Creating such a button is a three step process 1 You specify a target using the command hypertarget or easier the command Mabel In some cases see below this step may be skipped 2 You render the button using beamerbutton or a similar command This will render the button but clicking it will not yet have any effect 3 You put the button inside a hyperlink command Now clicking it will jump to the target of the link hypertarget lt overlay specification gt t target name texrt If the overlay specification is present the text is the target for hyper jumps to target name only on the specified slide On all other slides the text is shown normally Note that you must add an overlay specifi cation to the hypertarget command whenever you use it on frames that have multiple slides otherwise pdflatex rightfully complains that you have defined the same target on different slides Example begin frame begin fitemize Nitem lt 1 gt First item item lt 2 gt Second item item lt 3 gt Third item end itemize hyperlink jumptosecond beamergotobutton Jump to second slide hypertarget lt 2 gt jumptosecond end frame ARTICLE You must say usepackage hyperref beamerarticle or usepackage hyperref in your preamble to use this command in article mode The label command creates a hypertarget as a side effect and the label name opt
261. heorem Installs a near transparent backgrounds for the headline footline and sidebar Using this theme will cause navigational elements to be much less dominant than when using the whale theme see the discussion on contrast there though It goes well with the rose or the lily color theme Pairing it with the orchid overemphasizes blocks in Till s opinion usecolortheme dolphin Example There ls No Largest Prime Biers There Is No Largest Prime Number Number Number E The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Th is I i araa Neer ere is no largest prime number Proof Department of Mathematics E 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem A color theme somewhere in the middle between the whale and the seahorse It was graciously donated by Manuel Carro Like the seahorse it goes well with the rose and the lily color theme 17 2 Changing the Colors Used for Different Elements of a Presentation This section explains how BEAMER s color management works 17 2 1 Overview of Beamer s Color Management In BEAMER s philosophy every element of a presentation can have a different color Unfortunately it turned out that simply assigning a
262. his layout is similar to the tree layout The main difference is that the background colors change smoothly 16 3 Changing the Templates Used for Different Elements of a Presentation This section explains how BEAMER s template management works 16 3 1 Overview of Beamer s Template Management If you only wish to modify the appearance of a single or few elements you do not need to create a whole new inner or outer theme Instead you can modify the appropriate template A template specifies how an element of a presentation is typeset For example the frametitle template dictates where the frame title is put which font is used and so on As the name suggests you specify a template by writing the exact IATFX code you would also use when type setting a single frame title by hand Only instead of the actual title you use the command insertframetitle Example Suppose we would like to have the frame title typeset in red centered and boldface If we were to typeset a single frame title by hand it might be done like this begin frame begin centering color red textbf The Title of This Frame par end centering Blah blah end frame In order to typeset the frame title in this way on all slides in the simplest case we can change the frame title template as follows setbeamertemplate frametitle a begin centering color red textbf insertframetitle par end centering We can then use the following co
263. hoose an appropriate option for showing something special on the second screen These options are discussed in the following sections One of the things these options do is to setup a certain pgfpages layout that is appropriate for two screen presentations However you can still change the pgfpages layout arbitrarily afterwards For example you might wish to enlarge the virtual pages For details see the documentation of pgfpages 22 1 Showing Notes on the Second Screen The first way to use a second screen is to show the presentation on the main screen and to show your notes on the second screen The option show notes on second screen can be used for this It is described on page 201 22 2 Showing Second Mode Material on the Second Screen The second way to use the second screen is to show a different vesion of the presentation on the second screen This different version might be a translation or it might just always be the current table of contents To specify what is shown on the second screen you can use a special BEAMER mode called second This mode behaves similar to modes like handout or beamer but its effect depends on the exact options used setbeameroption second mode text on second screen location This option causes the second screen to show the second mode material The location of the second screen can be left right bottom or top In detail the following happens When a new frame needs to be typeset BEAMER che
264. horthand for specifying the option subsectionstyle hide hideothersubsections causes the subsections of sections other than the current one to be hidden This command is a shorthand for specifying the option subsectionstyle show show hide part part number causes the table of contents of part part number to be shown instead of the table of contents of the current part which is the default This option can be combined with the other options although combining it with the current option obviously makes no sense pausesections causes a pause command to be issued before each section This is useful if you wish to show the table of contents in an incremental way pausesubsections causes a pause command to be issued before each subsection sections overlay specification causes only the sections mentioned in the overlay specification to be shown For example sections lt 2 4 handout 0 gt causes only the second third and fourth section to be shown in the normal version nothing to be shown in the handout version and everything to be shown in all other versions For convenience if you omit the pointed brackets the specification is assumed to apply to all versions Thus sections 2 4 causes sections two three and four to be shown in all versions 99 e sectionstyle style for current section style for other sections specifies how sections should be displayed Allowed styles are show shaded and hide The first will sho
265. hown in the article version begin frame begin slide heading This is a frame title 225 begin enumerate overlay1 item Overlays are a little tricky in seminar overlay2 item But it is possible to use them in beamer end enumerate end slide end frame end document You can use all normal BEAMER commands and concepts like overlay specifications in the file You can also create an article version by using the class article and including the package beamerarticle In the following the effects of SEMINAR commands in BEAMER are listed overlay number Shows the material till the end of the current TEX group only on overlay numbered number 1 or if the accumulated option is given from that overlay on Usages of this command may be nested as in SEMINAR If an overlay command is given inside another it temporarily overrules the outer one as demonstrated in the following example where it is assumed that the accumulated option is given Example begin frame begin slide This is shown from the first slide on overlay 2 This is shown from the third slide on overlay 1 This is shown from the second slide on This is shown once more from the third slide on end slide end frame begin slide environment contents end slide Mainly installs an overlay 0 around the environment contents If the accumulated option is given this has no effect but otherwise it will c
266. ial in these sections applies to other packages as well not just to BEAMER 57 8 Creating Frames 8 1 The Frame Environment A presentation consists of a series of frames Each frame consists of a series of slides You create a frame using the command frame or the environment frame which do the same The command takes one parameter namely the contents of the frame All of the text that is not tagged by overlay specifications is shown on all slides of the frame Overlay specifications are explained in more detail in later sections For the moment let s just say that an overlay specification is a list of numbers or number ranges in pointed brackets that is put after certain commands as in uncover lt 1 2 gt Text If a frame contains commands that have an overlay specification the frame will contain multiple slides otherwise it contains only one slide begin frame lt overlay specification gt lt default overlay specification gt options 14 title H subtitle environment contents end frame The overlay specification dictates which slides of a frame are to be shown If left out the number is calculated automatically The environment contents can be normal TAT X text but may not contain verb commands or verbatim environments or any environment that changes the character codes unless the fragile option is given The optional title is detected by an opening brace that is if the first thing in the frame is an ope
267. ic License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain
268. ically loaded by the BEAMER class uses the option dvips or some compatible option see the documentation of the HYPERREF package for details Whether this is the case depends on the contents of your local hyperref cfg file You can enforce the usage of this option by passing dvips or a compatible option to the BEAMER class write documentclass dvips beamer which will pass this option on to the HYPERREF package You can then run latex twice followed by dvips gt latex main tex lots of output gt latex main tex lots of output gt dvips P pdf main dvi The option P pdf tells dvips to use Type 1 outline fonts instead of the usual Type 3 bitmap fonts You may wish to omit this option if there is a problem with it You can convert a PostScript file to a pdf file using gt ps2pdf main ps main pdf 29 4 3 3 Ways of Improving Compilation Speed While working on your presentation it may sometimes be useful to T X your tex file quickly and have the presentation contain only the most important information This is especially true if you have a slow machine In this case you can do several things to speed up the compilation First you can use the draft class option documentclass draft beamer Causes the headlines footlines and sidebars to be replaced by gray rectangles their sizes are still computed though Many other packages including pgf and hyperref also speed up when this option is given
269. icense with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it In addition you must do these things in the Modified Version A Use in the Title Page and on the covers if any a title distinct from that of the Document and from those of previous versions which should if there were any be listed in the History section of the Document You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission B List on the Title Page as authors one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document all of its principal authors if it has fewer than five unless they release you from this requirement C State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version as the publisher D Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document E Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices 48 F Include immediately after the copyright notices a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License in the form shown in the Addendum below G Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document s license no
270. icle mode no part page is added dualslide x y z options left column 4 right column This command is mapped to a columns environment The left column text is shown in the left column the right column text is shown in the right column The options x y and z are ignored Also all options are ignored except for lcolwidth and rcolwidth These set the width of the left or right column respectively PDForPS PostScript text PDF text Inserts either the PostScript text or the PDF text depending on whether latex or pdflatex is used When porting the PDF text will most likely be incorrect since in PROSPER the PDF text is actually PostScript text that is later transformed to PDF by some external program If the PDF text contains an includegraphics command which is its usual use you should change the name of the graphic file that is included to a name ending pdf png or jpg Typically you will have to convert your graphic to this format 223 onlyInPDF PDF text The PDF text is only included if pdflatex is used The same as for the command PDForPS applies here onlyInPS PS text The PS text is only included if latex is used begin notes title e nutronment contents end notes Mapped to note textbf title environment contents more or less The following commands are parsed by BEAMER but have no effect nyitem FontTitle FontText
271. ide pages will show the slides of the main presentation on the left and auxilliary material on the right this can be switched using appropriate options though hyperlinks will only work if the presentation is on the left and the second screen on the right For the presentation you attach two screens to the system The windowing system believes that the screen is twice as wide as it actually is Everything the windowing system puts on the left half of this big virtual screen is redirected to the first video output everything on the right half is redirected to the second video output When the presentation program displays the specially prepared superwide BEAMER presentation exactly the left half of the screen will be filled with the main presentation the right part is filled with the auxilliary material voil Not all presentation programs support this special feature For example the Acrobat Reader 6 0 2 will only use one screen in fullscreen mode on MacOS X On the other hand a program named PDF Presenter supports showing dual screen presentations Generally you will have to find out for yourself whether your display program and system support showing superwide presentations stretching over two screens BEAMER uses the package pgfpages to typeset two screen presentations Because of this your first step when creating a two screen presentation is to include this package documentclass beamer usepackage pgfpages The next step is to c
272. ie to be skipped For example start 10s duration 5s will show seconds 10 to 15 of the movie when you play the movie e width T Xdimension works like the height option only for the width of the poster box Example The following example creates a background sound for the slide movie autostart test wav Example A movie with two extra buttons for showing different parts of the movie movie label cells width 4cm height 3cm poster showcontrols duration 5s cells avi hyperlinkmovie start 5s duration 7s cells beamerbutton Show the middle stage hyperlinkmovie start 12s duration 5s cells beamerbutton Show the late stage A movie can serve as the destination of a special kind of hyperlink namely a hyperlink introduced using the following command hyperlinkmovie options movie label H text Causes the text to become a movie hyperlink When you click on the text the movie with the label movie label will start to play or stop or pause or resume depending on the options The movie must be on the same page as the hyperlink The following options may be given many of which are the same as for the movie command if a different option is given for the link than for the movie itself the option for the link takes precedence e duration time s As for movie this causes the movie to be played only for the given number of seconds e loop and repeat As for movie this causes the movie to l
273. ies how subsubsections should be displayed The same styles as for the sectionstyle option may be given You can omit the last style in which case the second also applies to the last and you can omit the last two in which case the first applies to all This option operates in an analogous manner to subsectionstyle The last examples are useful if you do not wish to show too many details when presenting the talk outline ARTICLE The options are ignored in article mode Parent Beamer Template section subsection in toc This is a parent template whose children are section in toc and subsection in toc This means that if you use the setbeamertemplate command on this template the command is instead called for both of these children with the same arguments The following template options are predefined e default In the default setting the sections and subsections are typeset using the fonts and colors section in toc and subsection in toc though the background colors are ignored The subsections are indented e sections numbered Similar to the default setting but the section numbers are also shown The subsections are not numbered e subsections numbered This time the subsections are numbered but not the sections Never theless since the subsections are fully numbered as in 1 2 or 3 2 if every section has at least one subsection the section numbered will not really be missed e circle Draws little circles before
274. ifies a list of parent fonts When the BEAMER font is used the parents are used first Thus any font attributes set by one of the parents is inherited by the BEAMER font except if this attribute is overwritten by the font Example setbeamerfont parent A size large setbeamerfont parent B series bfseries setbeamerfont child parent parent A parent B size small normalfont This text is in a normal font usebeamerfont parent A This text is large usebeamerfont parent B This text is large and bold usebeamerfont parent B This text is still large and bold usebeamerfont parent B This text is only bold but not large usebeamerfont child This text is small and bold 197 Part IV Creating Supporting Material The objective of the BEAMER class is to simplify the creation of presentations using a projector However a presentation rarely exists in isolation Material that accompanies a presentation includes e Presentations should normally be accompanied by handouts written text that the audience can read during and or after your presentation is given e You might wish to create notes for yourself that ideally are shown to you on your computer screen while the audience sees the presentation e You might wish to create a printout of your talk either for yourself or for checking for errors e You might wish to create a transparencies version of your talk as a fall back This part dicusses how BEAMER he
275. ime slot Do not attempt to talk faster in order to squeeze the talk into the given amount of time You are almost sure to lose your audience this way Do not try to create the perfect presentation immediately Rather test and retest the talk and modify it as needed 4 6 Step Six Create a Handout 4 6 1 Creating the Handout Once your talk is fixed you can create a handout if this seems appropriate For this you can use the class option handout as explained in Section 21 1 Typically you might wish to put several handout slides on one page see below on how to do this easily You may also wish to create an article version of your talk An article version of your presentation is a normal T X text typeset using for example the document class article or perhaps 11ncs or a similar document 30 class The BEAMER class offers facilities to have this version coexist with your presentation version in one file and to share code Also you can include slides of your presentation as figures in your article version Details on how to setup the article version can be found in Section 21 2 4 6 2 Printing the Handout The easiest way to print a presentation is to user the Acrobat Reader with the option expand small pages to paper size form the printer dialog enabled This is necessary because slides are by default only 128mm by 96mm large For the PostScript version and for printing multiple slides on a single page this simple appro
276. in Section 9 2 a mode specification is written alongside the normal overlay specification inside the pointed brackets It is separated from the normal specification by a vertical bar and a space Here is an example only lt 1 3 5 9 trans 2 3 5 gt Text This specification says Normally in beamer mode insert the text on slides 1 3 and 5 9 For the trans parencies version insert the text only on slides 2 3 and 5 If no special mode specification is given for trans mode the default is always This causes the desirable effect that if you do not specify anything the overlay specification is effectively suppressed for the handout An especially useful specification is the following only lt 3 trans 0 gt Not shown on transparencies Since there is no zeroth slide the text is not shown Likewise alert lt 3 trans 0 gt Text will not alert the text on a transparency You can also use a mode specification for the overlay specification of the frame environment as in the following example begin frame lt 1 trans 0 gt Text end frame This causes the frame to be suppressed in the transparencies version Also you can restrict the presentation such that only specific slides of the frame are shown on the handout begin frame lt 1 trans 4 5 gt Text end frame It is also possible to give only an alternate overlay specification For example alert lt trans 0 gt causes the text to be always highlighted
277. in square brackets that can be used to create certain special effects 98 Mtableof contents comma separated option list Inserts a table of contents into the current frame Example section Outline frame tableofcontents section Introduction frame tableofcontents currentsection subsection Why frame frame subsection Where frame section Results frame tableofcontents currentsection subsection Because frame subsection Here frame The following options can be given currentsection causes all sections but the current to be shown in a semi transparent way Also all subsections but those in the current section are shown in the semi transparent way This command is a shorthand for specifying the following options sectionstyle show shaded subsectionstyle show show shaded currentsubsection causes all subsections but the current subsection in the current section to be shown in a semi transparent way This command is a shorthand for specifying the option subsectionstyle show shaded firstsection section number specifies which section should be numbered as section 1 This is useful if you have a first section like an overview section that should not receive a number Section numbers are not shown by default To show them you must install a different table of contents templates hideallsubsections causes all subsections to be hidden This command is a s
278. in the presentation the section command also applies to the presentation We can add a subsection that is only part of the article like this subsection lt article gt Article Only Section With some more text begin frame This text is part both of the article and of the presentation begin itemize item This stuff is also shown in both version item This too only lt article gt item This particular item is only part of the article version item lt presentation only 0 gt This text is also only part of the article end itemize end frame end document There is one command whose behavior is a bit special in article mode The line break command Inside frames this command has no effect in article mode except if an overlay specification is present Then it has the normal effect dictated by the specification The reason for this behavior is that you will typically inserts lots of commands in a presentation in order to get control over all line breaks These line breaks are mostly superfluous in article mode If you really want a line break to apply in all versions say lt all gt Note that the command is often redefined by certain environments so it may not always be overlay specification aware In such a case you have to write something like only lt presentation gt 21 2 2 Workflow The following workflow steps are optional but they can simplify the creation of the article version e In the main file main
279. inal behavior at the price of possible problems when using overlay specifications in the article mode e noamssymb will suppress the automatic loading of the amssymb package Normally BEAMER will load this package since many themes use AMS symbols This option allows you to opt out from this behavior in article mode thus preventing clashes with some classes and font packages that conflict with amssymb Note that if you use this option you will have to care for yourself that amssymb or an alternative package is loaded if you use respective symbols e noamsthm will suppress the loading of the amsthm package No theorems will be defined e notheorems will suppress the definition of standard environments like theorem but amsthm is still loaded and the newtheorem command still makes the defined environments overlay specification aware Using this option allows you to define the standard environments in whatever way you like while retaining the power of the extensions to amsthm e envcountsect causes theorem definitions and the like to be numbered with each section Thus instead of Theorem 1 you get Theorem 1 1 We recommend using this option e noxcolor will suppress the loading of the xcolor package No colors will be defined Example documentclass article usepackage beamerarticle begin document begin frame frametitle A frame title begin itemize item lt 1 gt You can use overlay specifications item lt 2 gt This is us
280. incorrectly the sound will be played incorrectly e It seems that you can only include uncompressed sound data which can easily become huge This is not required by the specification but some versions of Acrobat Reader are unable to play any compressed data Data formats that do work are aif and au sound options sound poster text sound filename This command will insert the sound with the filename sound filename into the PDF file As for movie the file must be accessible when the sound is to be played Unlike movie you can however use the option inlinesound to actually embed the sound data in the PDF file Also as for a movie the sound poster text will be be put in a box that when clicked on will start playing the movie However you might also leave this box empty and only use the autostart option Once playback of a sound has started it can only be stopped by starting the playback of a different sound or by use of the hyperlinkmute command The supported sound formats depend on the viewer application Some versions of Acrobat Reader support aif and au Sometimes you also need to specify information like the sampling rate even though this information could be extracted from the sound file and even though the PDF standard specifies that the viewer application should do so In this regard some versions of Acrobat Reader seem to be non standard conforming This command only works together with pdflatex If you use d
281. ines but does not use boldface or italics for highlighting To change some or all text to a serif font use the serif theme Note The command mathrm will always produce upright not slanted serif text and the command mathsf will always produce upright sans serif text The command mathbf will produce upright bold face sans serif or serif text depending on whether mathsans or mathserif is used To produce an upright sans serif or serif text depending on whether mathsans or mathserif is used you can use for instance the command operatorname from the amsmath package Using this command instead of mathrm or mathsf directly will automatically adjust upright mathematical text if you switch from sans serif to serif or back usefonttheme professionalfont This font theme does not really change any fonts Rather it suppresses certain internal replacements performed by BEAMER If you use professional fonts fonts that you buy and that come with a complete set of every symbol in all modes you do not want BEAMER to meddle with the fonts you use BEAMER normally replaces certain character glyphs in mathematical text by more appropriate versions For example BEAMER will normally replace glyphs such that the italic characters from the main font are used for variables in mathematical text If your professional font package takes care of this already BEAMER s meddling should be switched off Note that BEAMER s substitution is auto
282. ing with the extension eps Encapsulated PostScript or ps PostScript can be included if you use latex and dvips but not when using pdflatex This is true both for the normal graphics package and for pgf When using pgf do not add the extension eps When using graphics do add the extension If you have a eps graphic and wish to use pdflatex you can use the program ps2pdf to convert the graphic toa pdf file Some modern distributions enable write18 which allows pdflatex to do that automatically Note however that it is often a better idea to directly generate a pdf if the program that produced the eps supports this 13 3 Including Graphic Files Ending pdf jpg jpeg or png The four formats pdf jpg jpeg and png can only be included by pdflatex As before do not add these extension when using pgf but do add them when using graphics If your graphic file has any of these formats and you wish must use latex and dvips you have to convert your graphic to eps first 13 4 Including Graphic Files Ending mps A graphic file ending mps MetaPost PostScript is a special kind of Encapsulated PostScript file Files in this format are produced by the MetaPost program As you know T X is a program that converts simple plain text into beautifully typeset documents The MetaPost program is similar only it converts simple plain text into beautiful graphics The MetaPost program converts a plain text file ending mp into an mps fil
283. iography You can use the bibliography environment and the cite commands of TFX in a BEAMER presentation You will typically have to typeset your bibliography items partly by hand Nevertheless you can use bibtex to create a first approximation of the bibliography Copy the content of the file main bb1 into your presentation If you are not familiar with bibtex you may wish to consult its documentation It is a powerful tool for creating high quality citations Using bibtex or your editor place your bibliographic references in the environment thebibliography This standard TeX environment takes one parameter which should be the longest bibitem label in the following list of bibliographic entries begin thebibliography H longest label text environment contents end thebibliography Inserts a bibliography into the current frame The longest label tert is used to determine the indentation of the list However several predefined options for the typesetting of the bibliography ignore this parameter since they replace the references by a symbol Inside the environment use a standard TeX bibitem command for each reference item Inside each item use a standard IAT X newblock command to separate the authors names the title the book journal reference and any notes Each of these commands may introduce a new line or color or other formatting as specified by the template for bibliographies The environment must be
284. ion of the frame command creates a label named name lt slide number gt for each slide of the frame as a side effect Thus the above example could be written more easily as begin frame label threeitems begin itemize item lt 1 gt First item item lt 2 gt Second item item lt 3 gt Third item end itemize hyperlink threeitems lt 2 gt beamergotobutton Jump to second slide end frame The following commands can be used to specify in an abstract way what a button will be used for beamerbutton button text Draws a button with the given button text Example nyperlink somewhere beamerbutton Go somewhere ARTICLE This command and the following just insert their argument in article mode 104 Beamer Template Color Font button When the beamerbutton command is called this template is used to render the button Inside the template you can use the command insertbuttontext to insert the argument that was passed to beamerbutton The following template options are predefined e default Typesets the button with rounded corners The fore and background of the BEAMER color button are used and also the BEAMER font button The border of the button gets the foreground of the BEAMER color button border The following inserts are useful for this element e insertbuttontext inserts the text of the current button Inside Goto Buttons see below this text is prefixed by the insert insertgotosymbo
285. ions are predefined 69 e default percentage The default template changes the current color to fg percentage bg This causes the current color to become washed out or shaded The default percentage is 50 Example You can use the following command to make the shaded entries very light setbeamertemplate section in head foot shaded default 20 Beamer Template Color Font section in sidebar This template is used to render a section entry if it occurs in the sidebar typically as part of a mini table of contents shown there The background of the BEAMER color is used as background for the entry Just like section in head foot you cannot usually use this template yourself and you should also use insertsectionhead to insert the name of the section that is to be typeset For once no default is installed for this template The following template options are predefined e sidebar theme This template which is only available if the sidebar outer theme is loaded inserts a bar with the BEAMER color s foreground and background that shows the section name The width of the bar is the same as the width of the whole sidebar The same inserts as for section in head foot can be used Beamer Template Color section in sidebar shaded This template is used instead of section in sidebar for typesetting sections that are currently shaded Such shading is usually applied to all sections but the current one Differe
286. ironment alert lt overlay specification gt highlighted text ARTICLE The given text is highlighted typically by coloring the text red If the overlay specification is present the command only has an effect on the specified slides Example This is alert important Internally this command just puts the highlighted text inside an alertenv Alerted text is typeset as emphasized text This can be changed by modifying the templates see below Beamer Color Font alerted text This color font is used when alerted text is typeset The background is currently ignored There is no template alerted text rather there are templates alerted text begin and alerted text end that are inserted before and after alerted text 115 beginfalertenv lt overlay specification gt environment contents end alertenv Environment version of the alert command Beamer Template alerted text begin This text is inserted at the beginning of a an alertenv environment The following template options are predefined e default PRESEN This changes the color local structure to alerted text This causes things like buttons or TATION items to be colored in the same color as the alerted text which is often visually pleasing See also the structure command ARTICLE The text is emphasized Beamer Template alerted text end This text is inserted at the end of an alertenv environment 12 3 Block Environments The BEAMER class predefines
287. is also available onslide lt 2 gt will have the same effect as FromSlide 2 except that onslide transcends environments likewise pause is internally mapped to a command with an appropriate overlay specification The idea is to add overlay specifications to certain commands These specifications are always given in pointed brackets and follow the command as soon as possible though in certain cases BEAMER also allows overlay specification to be given a little later In the simplest case the specification contains just a number A command with an overlay specification following it will only have effect on the slide s mentioned in the specification What exactly having an effect means depends on the command Consider the following example begin frame textbf This line is bold on all three slides textbf lt 2 gt This line is bold only on the second slide textbf lt 3 gt This line is bold only on the third slide end frame For the command textbf the overlay specification causes the text to be set in boldface only on the specified slides On all other slides the text is set in a normal font For a second example consider the following frame begin frame only lt 1 gt This line is inserted only on slide 1 only lt 2 gt This line is inserted only on slide 2 end frame The command only which is introduced by BEAMER normally simply inserts its parameter into the current frame However if an overla
288. is covered once more still to be visible to some degree Ideally there would be an option to make covered text transparent This would mean that when covered text is shown it would instead be mixed with the background behind it Unfortunately pgf does not support real transparency yet Instead transparency is created by mixing the color of the object you want to show with the current background color the color bg which has hopefully been setup such that it is the average color of the background on which the object should be placed To install this effect you can use setbeamercovered transparent This command allows you to specify in a quite general way how a covered item should be rendered You can even specify different ways of rendering the item depending on how long it will take before this item is shown or for how long it has already been covered once more The transparency effect will automatically apply to all colors except for the colors in images For images there is a workaround see the documentation of the PGF package 189 setbeamercovered options This command offers several different options the most important of which is transparent All options are internally mapped to the two options still covered and again covered In detail the following options may be given invisible is the default and causes covered text to completely disappear transparent opaqueness causes covered text to be typse
289. is to create presentations for projectors sometimes called beamers hence the name However it is often useful to print transparencies as backup in case the hardware fails A transparencies version of a talk often has less slides than the main version since it takes more time to switch slides but it may have more slides than the handout version For example while in a handout an animation might be condensed to a single slide you might wish to print several slides for the transparency version In order to create a transparencies version specify the class option trans If you do not specify anything else this will cause all overlay specifications to be suppressed For most cases this will create exactly the desired result Xdocumentclass trans beamer Create a version that uses the trans overlay specifications In some cases you may want a more complex behavior For example if you use many only commands to draw an animation In this case suppressing all overlay specifications is not such a good idea since this will cause all steps of the animation to be shown at the same time In some cases this is not desirable Also it might be desirable to suppress some alert commands that apply only to specific slides in the handout For a fine grained control of what is shown on a handout you can use mode specifications They specify which slides of a frame should be shown for a special version for example for the handout version As explained
290. ity Theme author Alan Munn Michigan State University is located in East Lansing usetheme Pittsburgh Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria gt 4 O Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem oes jac fa 5 A sober theme The right flushed frame titles creates an interesting tension inside each frame Pittsburgh is a town in the eastern USA It hosted the second RECOMB workshop of SNPs and haplotypes 2004 usetheme options Rochester Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria E Suppose p were the largest prime number Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p E Results m Proof of the Main Theorem oe a a S A dominant theme without any navigational elements It can be made less dominant by usi
291. ived Work may be assumed under the terms of this clause You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated from a complete unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under Clause 2 above as long as that Compiled Work is distributed in such a way that the recipients may install the Compiled Work on their system exactly as it would have been installed if they generated a Compiled Work directly from the Work If you are the Current Maintainer of the Work you may without restriction modify the Work thus creating a Derived Work You may also distribute the Derived Work without restriction including Compiled Works generated from the Derived Work Derived Works distributed in this manner by the Current Maintainer are considered to be updated versions of the Work If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work you may modify your copy of the Work thus creating a Derived Work based on the Work and compile this Derived Work thus creating a Compiled Work based on the Derived Work If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work you may distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition Only the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption to a component of the Work a If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement for a component of the
292. kage be sure to pass the xcolor pst option to BEAMER and hence to xcolor ARTICLE The color package is not loaded automatically if beamerarticle is loaded with the noxcolor option 19 3 Tutorial Euclid s Presentation This section presents a short tutorial that focuses on those features of BEAMER that you are likely to use when you start using BEAMER It leaves out all the glorious details that are explained in great detail later on 3 1 Problem Statement We wish to help Prof Euclid of the University of Alexandria to create a presentation on his latest discovery There are infinitely many prime numbers Euclid wrote a paper on this and it got accepted at the 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 ISPN 80 Euclid wishes to use the BEAMER class to create a presentation for the conference On the conference webpage he found out that he will have twenty minutes for his talk including questions 3 2 Solution Template The first thing Euclid should do is to look for a solution template for his presentation Having a look at Section 6 he finds that the file beamer solutions conference talks conference ornate 20min en tex might be appropriate He creates a subdirectory presentation in the directory that contains the actual paper and copies the solution template to this subdirectory renaming to main tex He opens the file in his favorite editor It starts documentclass beamer which Euclid finds hardly surprising Nex
293. l and similarly for skip and return buttons e insertgotosymbol This text is inserted at the beginning of goto buttons Redefine this command to change the symbol Example renewcommand insertgotosymbol somearrowcommand e insertskipsymbol This text is inserted at the beginning of skip buttons e insertreturnsymbol This text is inserted at the beginning of return buttons Beamer Color button border The foreground of this color is used to render the border of buttons beamergotobutton button texrt Draws a button with the given button text Before the text a small symbol usually a right pointing arrow is inserted that indicates that pressing this button will jump to another area of the presentation Example nyperlink detour beamergotobutton Go to detour beamerskipbutton button texrt The symbol drawn for this button is usually a double right arrow Use this button if pressing it will skip over a well defined part of your talk Example framef begin theorem end theorem beginfoverprint onslide lt 1 gt hfill hyperlinkframestartnext beamerskipbutton Skip proof onslide lt 2 gt begin proof end proof end overprint beamerreturnbutton button texrt The symbol drawn for this button is usually a left pointing arrow Use this button if pressing it will return from a detour Example frame lt 1 gt label mytheorem begin theorem 105 end theorem beginfoverpri
294. late e inserttocsubsubsection inserts the table of contents version of the current subsubsection name e inserttocsubsubsectionnumber inserts the number of the current subsubsection in the table of contents Beamer Template Color Font subsubsection in toc shaded Like subsection in toc shaded only for subsubsections subsubsection lt mode specification gt subsubsection name Starts a subsubsection without an entry in the table of contents No heading is created but the subsubsection name is shown in a possible sidebar Often you may want a certain type of frame to be shown directly after a section or subsection starts For example you may wish every subsection to start with a frame showing the table of contents with the current subsection highlighted To facilitate this you can use the following commands AtBeginSection special star text 14 text The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every section If the special star text parameter is specified this text will be used for starred sections instead Different calls of this command will not add up the given texts like the AtBeginDocument command does but will overwrite any previous text 95 Example AtBeginSection Do nothing for section begin frame lt beamer gt frametitle Outline tableofcontents currentsection end frame ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode AtBeginSubsection special star text te
295. late child template name args is called for each child template name in the child template list The arguments for children come into play if the setbeamertemplate command is called with a pre defined option name not necessarily the same as the predefined option name we ll come to that If setbeamertemplate is called with some predefined option name the children are called with the arguments for children instead Let s look at two examples Example The following is the typical simple usage defbeamertemplateparent itemize items itemize item itemize subitem itemize subsubitem a The following command has the same effect as the three commands below setbeamertemplate itemize items circle setbeamertemplate itemite item circle actually the empty argument is added setbeamertemplate itemize subitem circle setbeamertemplate itemize subsubitem circle Example In the following case an argument is passed to the children defbeamertemplateparent sections subsections in toc shaded section in toc shaded subsection in toc shaded 1 20 1 The following command has the same effect as the two commands below setbeamertemplate sections subsections in toc shaded default 35 setbeamertemplate section in toc shaded default 35 setbeamertemplate subsection in toc shaded default 35 Again setbeamertemplate sections subsections in toc shaded default set
296. late for this element Appropriate templates are installed by inner and outer themes where the inner themes only install templates for elements that are typically inside the main text while outer themes install templates for elements around the main text Thus from the templates s point of view there is no real difference between inner and outer themes 16 1 Inner Themes An inner theme installs templates that dictate how the following elements are typeset e Title and part pages e Itemize environments e Enumerate environments e Description environments e Block environments e Theorem and proof environments e Figures and tables e Footnotes e Bibliography entries In the following examples the color themes seahorse and rose are used to show where and how background colors are honored Furthermore background colors have been specified for all elements that honor them in the default theme In the default color theme all of the large rectangular areas are transparent useinnertheme default Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics e University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and
297. lays The frame already looks quite nice though perhaps a bit colorful However Euclid would now like to show the three items one after another not all three right away To achieve this he adds pause commands after the 22 first and second items begin itemize item 2 is prime two divisors 1 and 2 pause item 3 is prime two divisors 1 and 3 pause item 4 is not prime alert three divisors 1 2 and 4 end itemize By showing them incrementally he hopes to focus the audience s attention on the item he is currently talking about On second thought he deletes the pause stuff once more since in simple cases like the above the pausing is rather silly Indeed Euclids has noticed that good presentations make use of this uncovering mechanism only in special circumstances Euclid finds that he can also add a pause between the definition and the example So pauses seem to transcede environments which Euclid finds quite useful After some experimentation he finds that pause only does not work in align environments He immediately writes an email about this to BEAMER s author but receives a polite answer stating that the implementation of align does wicked things and there is no fix for this Also Euclid is pointed to the last part of the user s guide where a workaround is described 3 10 Using Overlay Specifications The next frame is to show his main argument and is put in a Results section Euclid desires
298. le defbeamertemplate lt all gt my template default something applies to all modes It is often useful to have access to the same template option via different names For this you can use the following command to create aliases defbeamertemplatealias element name new predefined option name H existing predefined option name Causes the two predefined options to have the same effect There is no inheritance relation among templates as there is for colors and fonts This is due to the fact the templates for one element seldom make sense for another However sometimes certain elements behave similarly and one would like a setbeamertemplate to apply to a whole set of templates via inheritance For example one might want that setbeamertemplate items circle causes all items to use the circle option though the effects for the itemize item as opposed to the itemize subsubitem as opposed to enumerate item must be slightly different The BEAMER template mechanism implements a simple form of inheritance via parent templates In element descriptions parent templates are indicated via a check mark in parentheses 171 Xdefbeamertemplateparentt parent template name L predefined option name 14 child template list argument number default optional argument arguments for children The effect of this command is that whenever someone calls Msetbeamertemplatet parent template name H args the command setbeamertemp
299. le than TEXPOWER here this will not cause problems when porting In the following the effect of TEXPOWER commands in BEAMER are listed stepwisef tezt As in TEXPOWER this initiates text in which commands like step or switch may be given Text contained in a step command will be enclosed in an only command with the overlay specification lt 1 gt This means that the text of the first step is inserted from the second slide onward the text of the second step is inserted from the third slide onward and so on parstepwise tezt Same as stepwise only uncover is used instead of only when mapping the step command liststepwise text Same as stepwise only an invisible horizontal line is inserted before the text This is presumably useful for solving some problems related to vertical spacing in TEXPOWER step text This is either mapped to only lt 1 gt text or to uncover lt 1 gt text depending on whether this command is used inside a stepwise environment or inside a parstepwise environment steponce tezt This is either mapped to only lt 1 gt text or to Nuncover lt 1 gt tert depending on whether this com mand is used inside a stepwise environment or inside a parstepwise environment switch alternate text H text This is mapped to Na1t lt 1 gt t tezt H alternate text Note that the arguments are swapped 230 bstep text This is always mapped to uncover lt 1
300. lide lt 1 handout 1 gt Some text for the first slide Possibly several lines long onslide lt 2 handout 0 gt Replacement on the second slide Supressed for handout end overprint 84 A similar need for dynamical changes arises when you have say a series of pictures named first pdf second pdf and third pdf that show different stages of some process To make a frame that shows these pictures on different slides the following code might be used begin frame frametitle The Three Process Stages includegraphics lt 1 gt first pdf includegraphics lt 2 gt second pdf includegraphics lt 3 gt third pdf end frame The above code uses the fact the BEAMER makes the includegraphics command overlay specification aware It works nicely but only if each pdf file contains the complete graphic to be shown However some programs like xfig sometimes also produce series of graphics in which each file just contains the additional graphic elements to be shown on the next slide In this case the first graphic must be shown not on overlay 1 but from overlay 1 on and so on While this is easy to achieve by changing the overlay specification lt 1 gt to lt 1 gt the graphics must also be shown on top of each other An easy way to achieve this is to use TRX s llap command like this begin frame frametitle The Three Process Stages includegraphics lt 1 gt first pdf llap includegraphics lt 2 gt second pdf
301. lide numbers gt as overlay specification Thus by defining a new overlay specification aware environment named my action name env you can add your own action newenvironment checkenv only setbeamertemplate itemize item X You can then write item lt beamer check 2 gt Text This will change the itemization symbol before Text to X on slide 2 in beamer mode The definition of checkenv used the fact that only also accepts an overlay specification given after its argument The whole action mechanism is based on the following environment 88 beginfactionenv lt action specification gt environment contents end actionenv This environment extracts all actions from the action specification for the current mode For each action of the form action slide numbers it inserts the following text begin action env lt slide number gt at the beginning of the environment and the text end action env at the end If there are several action specifications several environments are opened and closed in the appropriate order An overlay specification without an action is promoted to uncover overlay specification If the so called default overlay specification is not empty it will be used in case no action specification is given The default overlay specification is usually just empty but it may be set either by providing an additional optional argument to the command frame or to the environments itemize enumerate or
302. lling to spend much time explaining the graphic in great detail In this case you will often run into the problem that fine details of the graphic are hard to discern for the audience In this case you should use a command like framezoom to create anticipated zoomings of interesting parts of the graphic see Section 11 3 Using Animations and Transitions Use animations to explain the dynamics of systems algorithms etc Do not use animations just to attract the attention of your audience This often distracts attention away from the main topic of the slide No matter how cute a rotating flying theorem seems to look and no matter how badly you feel your audience needs some action to keep it happy most people in the audience will typically feel you are making fun of them Do not use distracting special effects like dissolving slides unless you have a very good reason for using them If you use them use them sparsely They can be useful in some situations For example you might show a young boy on a slide and might wish to dissolve this slide into a slide showing a grown man instead In this case the dissolving gives the audience visual feedback that the young boy slowly becomes the man Choosing Appropriate Themes BEAMER comes with a number of different themes When choosing a theme keep the following in mind 5 5 Different themes are appropriate for different occasions Do not become too attached to a favorite theme choose
303. lock ARTICLE The block name is typeset in bold and is emphasized Beamer Template block alerted begin Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Template block alerted end Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Color Font block title alerted Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Color Font block body alerted Same applies as for normal blocks begin fexampleblock lt action specification gt block title lt overlay specification gt environment contents end exampleblock Inserts a block that is supposed to be an example Behaves like the block environment otherwise Example In the following example the block is completely suppressed on the first slide it does not even occupy any space begin exampleblock Example lt only 2 gt The set 1 2 3 5 has four elements end exampleblock ARTICLE The block name is typeset in italics Beamer Template block example begin Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Template block example end Same applies as for normal blocks 117 Beamer Color Font block title example Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Color Font block body example Same applies as for normal blocks 12 4 Theorem Environments The BEAMER class predefines several environments like theorem or definition or proof that you can use to typeset things like well theorems definitions or proofs The complete list is the following theorem corollary definition defi
304. lowing example all font suggestions for the environment are suppressed or ignored and the theorem number is suppressed setbeamertemplate theorem begin 7 normalfont ignore body font begin inserttheoremblockenv 7 inserttheoremname ifx inserttheoremaddition empty else inserttheoremaddition fii H setbeamertemplate theorem end end inserttheoremblockenv The following inserts are available inside this template e inserttheoremblockenv This will normally expand to block but if a theorem that has theorem style example is typeset it will expand to exampleblock Thus you can use this insert to decide which environment should be used when typesetting the theorem e inserttheoremheadfont This will expand to a font changing command that switches to the font to be used in the head of the theorem By not inserting it you can ignore the head font e inserttheoremname This will expand to the name of the environment to be typeset like Theorem or Corollary e inserttheoremnumber This will expand to the number of the current theorem preceeded by a space or to nothing if the current theorem does not have a number e inserttheoremaddition This will expand to the optional argument given to the environment or will be empty if there was no optional argument e inserttheorempunctuation This will expand to the punctuation character for the current environ ment This is usually a period Beamer Templat
305. lps you with the creation of the above 198 19 Adding Notes for Yourself A note is text that is intended as a reminder to yourself of what you should say or should keep in mind when presenting a slide Notes are usually printed out on paper but with two screen support they can also be shown on your laptop screen while the main presentation is shown on the projector 19 1 Specifying Note Contents To add a note to a slide or a frame use the Anote command This command can be used both inside and outside frames but it has quite different behaviors then Inside frames note commands accumulate and append a single note page after the current slide outside frames each note directly inserts a single note page with the given parameter as contents Using the note command inside frames is usually preferably over using them outside since only commands issued inside frames profit from the class option onlyslideswithnotes see below Inside a frame the effect of note text is the following When you use it somewhere inside the frame on a specific slide a note page is created after the slide containing the text Since you can add an overlay specification to the note command you can specify after which slide the note should be shown If you use multiple note commands on one slide they accumulate and are all shown on the same note To make the accumulation of notes more convenient you can use the note command with the option item The
306. lse class option 93 usetheme 144 utf8 class option 18 utf8x class option 17 verse color font 128 verse environment 128 verse begin template 128 verse end template 128 visible 81 vstep 231 Warsaw presentation theme 158 whale color theme 182 wolverine color theme 179 xcolor package 19 xcolor list of options class option 19 xmpmulti package 137 248
307. ly the overlays are flattened The second more complicated and more powerful way is to create an independent article version of your presentation This version coexists in your main file 21 1 Creating Handouts Using the Handout Mode The easiest way of creating a handout for your audience though not the most desirable one is to use the handout option This option works exactly like the trans option documentclass handout beamer Create a version that uses the handout overlay specifications You might wish to choose a different color and or presentation theme for the handout When printing a handout created this way you will typically wish to print at least two and possibly four slides on each page The easiest way of doing so is presumably to use pgfpages as follows usepackage pgfpages pgfpagesuselayout 2 on 1 a4paper border shrink 5mm Instead of 2 on 1 you can use 4 on 1 but then you have to add landscape to the list of options and you can use say letterpaper instead of a4paper 21 2 Creating Handouts Using the Article Mode In the following the article version of your presentation refers to a normal T X text typeset using for example the document class article or perhaps 11ncs or a similar document class This version of the presentation will typically follow different typesetting rules and may even have a different structure Nevertheless you may wish to have this version coexist with your prese
308. ly sections to be shown in the sidebar This is useful if you need to save space 151 hideothersubsections causes only the subsections of the current section to be shown This is useful if you need to save space left puts the sidebar on the left default right puts the sidebar on the right e width dimension sets the width of the sidebar If set to zero no sidebar is created Berkeley is on the western coast of the USA near San Francisco Till visited Berkeley for a year in 2004 usetheme options PaloAlto Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There ls No There Is No Largest Prime Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique aT is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number Department of Mathematics ye A University of Alexandria et g be the product of t irst p numb Then q 1 is notd ble 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results e Proof of the Main Theorem Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p A variation on the Berkeley theme with less dominance of rectangular areas The same options as for the Berkeley theme can be given Palo Alto is also near San Francisco It hosted the Bay Area Theory Workshop 2004 usetheme options Goettingen Example Largest Primo There Is No Largest Prime Number Uaio
309. ly used for blocks e numbered This option is like the default except that the theorem number is printed for environments that are numbered ams style This causes theorems to be put in a block or exampleblock but to be otherwise typeset as is normally done in amsthm Thus the head font and body font depend on the setting for the theorem to be typeset and theorems are numbered Beamer Template theorem begin Whenever an environment declared using the command newtheorem is to be typeset this template is inserted at the beginning and the template theorem end at the end If there is an overlay specification when an environment like theorem is used this overlay specification will directly follow the block beginning template upon invocation This is even true if there was an optional argument to the theorem environment This optional argument is available via the insert Ninserttheoremaddition Numerous inserts are available in this template see below Before the template starts the font is set to the body font prescribed by the environment to be typeset 120 Example The following typesets theorems like amsthm setbeamertemplate theorem begin 7 begin inserttheoremblockenv inserttheoremheadfont inserttheoremname inserttheoremnumber ifx inserttheoremaddition empty else inserttheoremaddition fii inserttheorempunctuation setbeamertemplate theorem end end inserttheoremblockenv Example In the fol
310. m or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy bot
311. mal text you can change the background of the BEAMER color normal text to change the color of the default canvas However to make the canvas transparent only set the background of the canvas empty leave the background of normal text white e vertical shading color options installs a vertically shaded background Use with care Back ground shadings are often distracting The following color options may be given top color specifies the color at the top of the page By default 25 of the foreground of the BEAMER color palette primary is used bottom color specifies the color at the bottom of the page By default the background of normal text at the moment of invocation of this command is used middle color specifies the color for the middle of the page Thus if this option is given the shading changes from the bottom color to this color and then to the top color midpoint factor specifies at which point of the page the middle color is used A factor of 0 is the bottom of the page a factor of 1 is the top The default which is 0 5 is in the middle The main background is drawn on top of the background canvas It can be used to add say a grid to every frame or a big background picture or whatever If you plan to use a PNG image as a background image use one with an alpha channel to avoid potential problems with transparency in some PDF viewers Beamer Template Color Font background Color parents backgroun
312. matically turned off if one of the following packages 191 is loaded arevmath hvmath kpfonts lmodern lucidabr lucimatx mathastext mathpmnt mathpple mathtime mtpro and mtpro2 If your favorite professional font package is not among these use the professionalfont option and write us an email so that the package can be added usef onttheme options serif Exa mple There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number e r Proof Department of Mathematics University oA zanda 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme causes all text to be typeset using the default serif font except if you specify certain options You might wish to consult Section 5 6 2 on whether you should use serif fonts The following options may be given stillsansserifmath causes mathematical text still to be typeset using sans serif This option only makes sense if you also use the stillsansseriftext option since sans serif math inside serif text looks silly stillsansserifsmall will cause small text to be still typeset using sans serif This refers to the text in the headline footline and sidebars Using this optio
313. me number in the footline 8 2 2 The Sidebars Sidebars are vertical areas that stretch from the lower end of the headline to the top of the footline There can be a sidebar at the left and another one at the right or even both Sidebars can show a table of contents but they could also be added for purely aesthetic reasons When you install a sidebar template you must explicitly specify the horizontal size of the sidebar using the command setbeamersize with the option sidebar left width or sidebar right width The vertical size is determined automatically Each sidebar has its own background canvas which can be setup using the sidebar canvas templates Adding a sidebar of a certain size say 1cm will make the main text 1cm narrower The distance between the inner side of a side bar and the outer side of the text as specified by the command setbeamersize with the option text margin left and its counterpart for the right margin is not changed when a sidebar is installed Internally the sidebars are typeset by showing them as part of the headline The BEAMER class keeps track of six dimensions three for each side the variables beamer leftsidebar and beamer rightsidebar store the horizontal sizes of the side bars the variables beamer leftmargin and beamer rightmargin store the distance between sidebar and text and the macros Gm lmargin and Gm rmargin store the distance from the edge of the paper to the edge of the text Thus the sum b
314. mercolorempty bg frametitle 1 Transparent background usebeamercolor fg frametitle insertframetitle Aw Opaque background usebeamercolor fg frametitle colorbox bg insertframetitle 17 2 3 Setting Beamer s Colors To set or to change a BEAMER color you can use the command setbeamercolor setbeamercolor beamer color name options Sets or changes a BEAMER color The beamer color name should be a reasonably simple text do not try too much trickery and avoid punctuation symbols but it may contain spaces Thus normal text is a valid beamer color name and so is My Color Number 2 In the most simple case you just specify a foreground by giving the fg option and possibly also a background using the bg option Example setbeamercolor normal text fg black bg mylightgrey Example setbeamercolor alerted text fg red 80 black The effect of this command is accumulative thus the following two commands setbeamercolor section in toc fg blue setbeamercolor section in toc bg white have the same effect as setbeamercolor section in toc fg blue bg white Naturally a second call with the same kind of option set to a different value overrides a previous call The starred version first resets everything thereby switching off the accumulative effect Use this starred version to completely reset the definition of some BEAMER color The following options may be given 18
315. mes or introduce entries in the table of contents However you can use AtBeginLecture to have BEAMER insert say a title page at the beginning of each lecture lecture short lecture name lecture name H lecture label Starts a lecture The lecture name will be available via the Ninsertlecture command The short lecture name is available via the insertshortlecture command Example begin document lecture Vector Spaces week 1 section Introduction esctiontsunmary lecture Scalar Products week 2 section Introduction sectiontSummary end document ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode includeonlylecture lecture label Causes all frame frame section subsection and part commands following a lecture command to be suppressed except if the lecture s label matches the lecture label Frames before any lecture commands are always included This command should be given in the preamble Example includeonlylecture week 1 ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode AtBeginLecture text The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every lecture Example AtBeginLecture frame Large Today s Lecture insertlecture ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode 10 5 Adding a Table of Contents You can create a table of contents using the command tableofcontents Unlike the normal XIX table of contents command this command takes an optional parameter
316. much more severe if the replacement text is several lines long To solve this problem you can use two environments overlayarea and overprint The first is more flexible but less user friendly beginfoverlayarea area width area height environment contents end overlayarea Everything within the environment will be placed in a rectangular area of the specified size The area will have the same size on all slides of a frame regardless of its actual contents Example beginfoverlayarea textwidth 3cm only lt 1 gt Some text for the first slide Possibly several lines long only lt 2 gt Replacement on the second slide end overlayarea beginfoverprint area width environment contents end overprint The area width defaults to the text width Inside the environment use onslide commands to specify different things that should be shown for this environment on different slides The onslide commands are used like item commands Everything within the environment will be placed in a rectangular area of the specified width The height and depth of the area are chosen large enough to accommodate the largest contents of the area The overlay specifications of the onslide commands must be disjoint This may be a problem for handouts since there all overlay specifications default to 1 If you use the option handout you can disable all but one onslide by setting the others to 0 Example beginfoverprint ons
317. n theme 157 crane color theme 177 Darmstadt presentation theme 155 date 93 default color theme 174 default font theme 191 default inner theme 159 default outer theme 162 default presentation theme 145 defbeamertemplate 170 defbeamertemplatealias 171 defbeamertemplateparent 172 definition environment 119 deftranslation 234 deluxetable package 16 description environment 113 description item template color font 114 dolphin color theme 183 dove color theme 178 draft class option 30 DraTex package 17 Dresden presentation theme 154 dstep 231 dualslide 223 EastLansing presentation theme 148 Elements see Beamer templates colors and fonts email 221 endfoil 229 enumerate environment 111 enumerate package 17 item template color font 112 items parent template 112 mini template template color font 113 subitem template color font 112 subsubitem template color font 113 enumstep environment 223 envcountsect class option 119 Environments abstract 127 actionenv 89 alertblock 117 alertenv 116 altenv 83 beamerboxesrounded 124 beamercolorbox 122 block 116 boldequation 229 column 126 columns 125 definition 119 description 113 enumerate 111 enumstep 223 example 119 exampleblock 117 frame 58 Itemize 223 itemize 110 itemstep 223 notes 224 onlyenv 83 overlayarea 84 overprint 84 proof 119 quotation 128 quote 128 semiver
318. n to be an incremental overlay specification see Section 9 6 4 you can imple ment for example a step wise uncovering of the items The default overlay specification is inherited by subenvironments Naturally in a subenvironment you can reset it locally by setting it to lt 1 gt Example begin itemize item This is important item This is also important end itemize Example begin itemize lt gt item This is shown from the first slide on item This is shown from the second slide on item This is shown from the third slide on item lt 1 gt This is shown from the first slide on item This is shown from the fourth slide on end itemize Example begin itemize lt alert gt 110 item This is shown from the first slide on and alerted on the first slide Nitem This is shown from the second slide on and alerted on the second slide item This is shown from the third slide on and alerted on the third slide end itemize Example newenvironment mystepwiseitemize begin itemize lt alert gt end itemize The appearance of an itemize list is governed by several templates The first template concerns the way the little marker introducing each item is typeset Parent Beamer Template itemize items This template is a parent template whose children are itemize item itemize subitem and itemize subsubitem This means that if you use the setbeamertemplate command on this template the
319. nd the environment contents is inserted 127 Beamer Template abstract end This template is inserted at the end of the abstract after the environment contents 12 11 Verse Quotations Quotes IAT X defines three environments for typesetting quotations and verses verse quotation and quote These environments are also available in the BEAMER class where they are overlay specification aware If an overlay specification is given the verse or quotation is shown only on the specified slides and is covered otherwise The difference between a quotation and a quote is that the first has paragraph indentation whereas the second hasn t You can change the font and color used for these by changing the BEAMER colors and fonts listed below Unlike the standard TX environments the default font theme typesets a verse in an italic serif font quotations and quotes are typeset using an italic font whether serif or sans serif depends on the standard document font begin verse lt action specification gt environment contents end verse You can use this environment to typeset a verse Beamer Color Font verse These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the verse If a background color is set this back ground color is used as background for the whole abstract The default font is italic serif Beamer Template verse begin This template is inserted at the beginning of the verse Beamer Template verse end This template is ins
320. nded sets of mathematical glyphs Most other standard PostScript fonts are also available in T1 encoding Among the packages that make available the Computer Modern fonts in the T1 encoding the package lmodern may be suggested If you use 1modern several extra fonts become available like a sans serif boldface math and extra symbols like proper guillemots To select the T1 encoding use usepackage T1 fontenc Thus if you have the LM fonts installed you could write usepackage T1 fontenc usepackage 1lmodern to get beautiful outline fonts and correct hyphenation Note however that certain older versions of the LM bun dle did not include correct glyphs for ligatures like fi which may cause trouble Double check that all ligatures are displayed correctly and if not update your installation Everything mentioned above applies to pdflatex and latex dvips Unlike those engines xelatex and lualatex support OpenType fonts and that means that you can use system fonts in your documents relatively easy Details will eventually be documented in this manual For now you can take a look at the documentation for the fontspec package which supports both engines Also note that when you use lualatex or xelatex with EU2 or EU1 encoding respectively by default you get OpenType Latin Modern fonts 195 18 3 Changing the Fonts Used for Different Elements of a Presentation This section explains how BEAMER s font management works
321. nderstanding is that the emulation offered by the BEAMER class is free and legally so IBM has a copyright on the FOILS class not on the effect the commands of this class have At least that s our understanding of things The workflow for the migration is the following 1 i eee iS Use the document class beamer not foils Add a usepackage beamerfoils to start the emulation Possibly add commands to install themes and templates If the command foilhead is used inside a frame command or frame environment it behaves like frametitle If it used outside a frame it will start a new frame with the allowframebreaks option thus no overlays are allowed This frame will persist till the next occurrence of foilhead or of the new command endfoil Note that a frame command will not end a frame started using foilhead If you rely on automatic frame creation based on foilhead you will need to insert an endfoil before the end of the document to end the last frame If you use pdfI4T X to typeset the presentation than you cannot include PostScript files You should convert them to pdf or to png and adjust any usage of includegraphics accordingly Sizes of objects are different in BEAMER since the scaling is done by the viewer not by the class Thus a framebox of size 6 inches will be way too big in a BEAMER presentation You will have to manually adjust explicit dimension occurring in a foil TX presentation 227
322. ng Vertical flushing can also be achieved for only a single frame by giving the optional argument t like this to the frame environment as in begin frame t frametitle There Is No Largest Prime Number end frame Vice versa if the t class option is given a frame can be vertically centered using the c option for the frame It turns out that certain environments including the theorem and proof environments above also take overlay specifications If such a specification is given the whole theorem or proof is only shown on the specified slides 3 11 Structuring a Frame On the next frame Euclid wishes to contrast solved and open problems on prime numbers Since there is no Solved problem environment similar to the theorem environment Euclid decides to use the block environment which allows him to give an arbitrary title begin frame frametitle What s Still To Do begin block Answered Questions How many primes are there end block begin block Open Questions Is every even number the sum of two primes end block end frame He could also have defined his own theorem like environment by putting the following in the preamble newtheorem answeredquestions theorem Answered Questions newtheorem openquestions theorem Open Questions The optional argument theorem ensures that these environments are numbered the same way as everything else Since these numbers are not shown anyway it does not really
323. ng a different color theme The following options may be given e height dimension sets the height of the frame title bar Rochester is a town in upstate New York USA Till visited Rochester in 2001 15 3 Presentation Themes with a Tree Like Navigation Bar usetheme Antibes Example 149 Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number L Results L Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria gt Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 El Results Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p m Proof of the Main Theorem A dominant theme with a tree like navigation at the top The rectangular elements mirror the rectangular navigation at the top The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme Antibes is a town in the south of France It hosted sTACS 2002 usetheme JuanLesPins Example Th gest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria
324. ng appropriate colors like lower separation line head The following options can be given e footline empty suppresses the footline default e footline authorinstitute shows the author s name and the institute in the footline e footline authortitle shows the author s name and the title in the footline e footline institutetitle shows the institute and the title in the footline e footline authorinstitutetitle shows the author s name the institute and the title in the footline e subsection true or false shows or suppresses line showing the subsection in the headline It is shown by default If the document does not use subsections this option should be set false useoutertheme options smoothbars Example 163 Results Results o Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme behaves very much like the miniframes theme at least with respect to the headline The only differences are that smooth transitions are installed between the background colors o
325. ng insert is useful for the template e insertbiblabel inserts the current citation label 10 7 Adding an Appendix You can add an appendix to your talk by using the Nappendix command You should put frames and perhaps whole subsections into the appendix that you do not intend to show during your presentation but which might be useful to answer a question The appendix command essentially just starts a new part named appendixname However it also sets up certain hyperlinks Like other parts the appendix is kept separate from your actual talk appendix lt mode specification gt Starts the appendix in the specified modes All frames all subsection commands and all section commands used after this command will not be shown as part of the normal navigation bars Example begin document frame titlepage section Outline frame tableofcontents section Main Text frame Some text section Summary frame Summary text appendix section appendixname frame tableofcontents subsection Additional material frame Details frame Text omitted in main talk subsection Even more additional material frame More details end document 103 11 Structuring a Presentation The Interactive Global Structure 11 1 Adding Hyperlinks and Buttons To create anticipated nonlinear jumps in your talk structure you can add hyperlinks to your presentation A hyperlink is a text usually rendered as a button that w
326. ng modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Progra
327. ng the BEAMER package The two options are a You can use the GNU General Public License Version 2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation b You can use the TAT X Project Public License version 1 3c or at your option any later version 2 The documentation of the package is also dual license Again you can choose between two options a You can use the GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation b You can use the TAT X Project Public License version 1 3c or at your option any later version The documentation of the package refers to all files in the subdirectory doc of the BEAMER pack age A detailed listing can be found in the file doc licenses manifest documentation txt All files in other directories are part of the code of the package A detailed listing can be found in the file doc licenses manifest code txt In the rest of this section the licenses are presented The following text is copyrighted see the plain text versions of these licenses in the directory doc licenses for details 7 2 The GNU General Public License Version 2 7 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Publ
328. nheadnumber Beamer Template subsubsection in head foot shaded This template behaves exactly like section in head foot shaded only for subsubsections The following template options are predefined e default percentage works like the corresponding option for sections Beamer Template Color Font subsubsection in sidebar This template behaves exactly like section in sidebar only for subsubsections Beamer Template subsubsection in sidebar shaded This template behaves exactly like section in sidebar shaded only for subsubsections By clicking on the document title in a navigation bar not all themes show it you will jump to the first slide of your presentation usually the title page except if you are already at the first slide On the first slide clicking on the document title will jump to the end of the presentation if there is one Thus by double clicking the document title in a navigation bar you can jump to the end 8 2 4 The Navigation Symbols Navigation symbols are small icons that are shown on every slide by default The following symbols are shown 1 7 8 A slide icon which is depicted as a single rectangle To the left and right of this symbol a left and right arrow are shown A frame icon which is depicted as three slide icons stacked on top of each other This symbol is framed by arrows A subsection icon which is depicted as a highlighted subsection entry in a table of contents
329. ning brace then it is assumed that a frame title follows Likewise the optional subtitle is detected the same way that is by an opening brace following the title The title and subtitle can also be given using the frametitle and framesubtitle commands The normal TEX command frame is available inside frames with its usual meaning Both outside and inside frames it is always available as framelatex Example begin frame A title Some content end frame Same effect begin frame frametitle A title Some content end frame Example begin frame lt beamer gt Outline frame is only shown in beamer mode tabelofcontent current end frame Normally the complete environment contents is put on a slide If the text does not fit on a slide being too high it will be squeezed as much as possible a warning will be issued and the text just extends unpleasantly over the bottom You can use the option allowframebreaks to cause the frame text to be split among several slides though you cannot use overlays then See the explanation of the allowframebreaks option for details The default overlay specification is an optional argument that is detected according to the following rule Tf the first optional argument in square brackets starts with a lt then this argument is a default overlay specification otherwise it is a normal options argument Thus begin frame lt gt plain would be legal but
330. nitions fact example and examples The following German block environments are also predefined Problem Loesung Definition Satz Beweis Folgerung Lemma Fakt Beispiel and Beispiele Here is a typical example on how to use them begin frame frametitle A Theorem on Infinite Sets begin theorem lt 1 gt There exists an infinite set end theorem begin proof lt 2 gt This follows from the axiom of infinity end proof begin example lt 3 gt Natural Numbers The set of natural numbers is infinite end example end frame In the following only the English versions are discussed The German ones behave analogously begin theorem lt action specification gt additional text lt action specification gt environment contents end theorem Inserts a theorem Only one action specification may be given If present the additional text is shown behind the word Theorem in rounded brackets although this can be changed by the template The appearance of the theorem is governed by the templates theorem begin and theorem end see their description later on for details on how to change these Every theorem is put into a block environment thus the templates for blocks also apply The theorem style a concept from amsthm used for this environment is plain In this style the body of a theorem should be typeset in italics The head of the theorem should be typeset in a bold font but this is usually over
331. nment 128 quote begin template 128 quote end template 128 rebstep 231 rectangles inner theme 160 red 227 redstep 231 renewcommand 86 renewenvironment 87 renewtranslation 234 resetcounteronoverlays 87 resetcountonoverlays 87 restep 231 reswitch 231 revstep 231 Rochester presentation theme 149 rose color theme 181 rotatefoilhead 229 rounded inner theme 160 seagull color theme 179 seahorse color theme 182 second mode text on second screen beamer option 211 section 94 section in head foot template color font 69 section in head foot shaded template 69 section in sidebar template color font 70 section in sidebar shaded template color 70 section in toc template color font 94 section in toc shaded template color font 94 section subsection in toc parent template 100 section subsection in toc shaded parent template 101 seminar class 19 semiverbatim environment 127 separation line color 189 serif font theme 192 setbeamercolor 185 setbeamercovered 190 setbeamerfont 196 setbeamersize 76 setbeamertemplate 169 set jobnamebeamerversion 207 shadow outer theme 165 short talks speaker_introduction ornate 2min solution 42 show notes beamer option 201 show notes on second screen beamer option 201 show only notes beamer option 202 sidebar outer theme 164 canvas left template 67 canvas right template 68 left template color font 66 sideba
332. notes added with this option are accumulated in an enumerate list that follows any text inserted using note The following example will produce one note page that follows the second slide and has two entries begin frame begin itemize item lt 1 gt Eggs item lt 2 gt Plants note item lt 2 gt Tell joke about plants note item lt 2 gt Make it short item lt 3 gt Animals end itemize end frame Outside frames the command note creates a single note page It is independent of any usage of the note commands inside the previous frame If you say note inside a frame and note right after it two note pages are created In the following the syntax and effects of the note command inside frames are described note lt overlay specification gt options 14 note text Effects inside frames This command appends the note text to the note that follows the current slide Multiple uses of this command on a slide accumulate If you do not specify an overlay specification the note will be added to all slides of the current frame This is often not what you want so adding a specification like lt 1 gt is usually a good idea The following options may be given e item causes the note to be put as an item in a list that is shown at the end of the note page Example note lt 2 gt Do not talk longer than 2 minutes about this ARTICLE Notes are ignored in article mode Next the syntax and effects of the note
333. notheorems beamer Switches off the definition of default blocks like theorem but still loads amsthm and makes theorems overlay specification aware The option is also available as a package option for beamerarticle and has the same effect In the article version the package amsthm sometimes clashes with the document class In this case you can use the following option which is once more available as a class option for BEAMER and as a package option for beamerarticle to switch off the loading of amsthm altogether documentclass noamsthm beamer Does not load amsthm and also not amsmath Environments like theorem or proof will not be available documentclass noamssymb beamer Does not load amssymb This option is mainly intended for users who are loading specialist font packages Note that blacktriangleright needs to be defined if itemize environments are in use Parent Beamer Template theorems This template is a parent of theorem begin and theorem end see the first for a detailed discussion of how the theorem templates are set Example setbeamertemplate theorems numbered The following template options are predefined e default By default theorems are typeset as follows The font specification for the body is honored the font specification for the head is ignored No theorem number is printed e normal font Like the default except all font specifications for the body are ignored Thus the fonts are used that are normal
334. ns There are three predefined environments for creating lists namely enumerate itemize and description The first two can be nested to depth three but nesting them to this depth creates totally unreadable slides The item command is overlay specification aware If an overlay specification is provided the item will only be shown on the specified slides see the following example If the item command is to take an optional argument and an overlay specification the overlay specification can either come first as in item lt 1 gt Cat or come last as in item Cat lt 1 gt begin frame There are three important points beginfenumerate item lt 1 gt A first one Nitem lt 2 gt a second one with a bunch of subpoints begin itemize item first subpoint Only shown from second slide on item lt 3 gt second subpoint added on third slide item lt 4 gt third subpoint added on fourth slide end itemize item lt 5 gt and a third one end enumerate end frame begin itemize lt default overlay specification gt environment contents end itemize Used to display a list of items that do not have a special ordering Inside the environment use an item command for each topic If the optional parameter default overlay specification is given in every occurrence of an item com mand that does not have an overlay specification attached to it the default overlay specification is used By setting this specificatio
335. ns formations of the Work copying of components of the Work or other activities Note that modification of any installation facilities provided by the Work constitutes modification of the Work Current Maintainer A person or persons nominated as such within the Work If there is no such explicit nomination then it is the Copyright Holder under any applicable law 52 Base Interpreter A program or process that is normally needed for running or interpreting a part or the whole of the Work A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used interactively Unless explicitly specified when applying the license to the Work the only applicable Base Interpreter is a IAT X Format or in the case of files belonging to the IXT EX format a program implementing the TEX language 7 4 3 Conditions on Distribution and Modification 1 Activities other than distribution and or modification of the Work are not covered by this license they are outside its scope In particular the act of running the Work is not restricted and no requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the Work You may distribute a complete unmodified copy of the Work as you received it Distribution of only part of the Work is considered modification of the Work and no right to distribute such a Der
336. ns is often advisable since small text is often easier to read in sans serif stillsansseriflarge will cause large text like the presentation title or the frame title to be still typeset using sans serif Sans serif titles with serif text are a popular combination in typography stillsansseriftext will cause normal text none of the above three to be still typeset using sans serif If you use this option you should most likely also use the first two However by not using stillsansseriflarge you get a serif possibly italic title over a sans serif text This can be an interesting visual effect Naturally interesting typographic effect can mean terrible typographic effect if you choose the wrong fonts combinations or sizes You ll need some typographic experience to judge this correctly If in doubt try asking someone who should know onlymath is a short cut for selecting all of the above options except for the first Thus using this option causes only mathematical text to by typeset using a serif font Recall that by default mathematical formulas are also typeset using sans serif letters In most cases this is visually the most pleasing and easily readable way of typesetting mathematical formulas if the surrounding text is typeset using sans serif However in mathematical texts the font used to render say a variable is sometimes used to differentiate between different meanings of this variable In such case it may be necess
337. nt onslide lt 1 gt hfill hyperlink mytheorem lt 2 gt beamergotobutton Go to proof details onslide lt 2 gt begin proof end proof hfill hyperlink mytheorem lt 1 gt beamerreturnbutton Return end overprint appendix againframe lt 2 gt mytheorem To make a button clickable you must place it in a command like hyperlink The command hyperlink is a standard command of the hyperref package The BEAMER class defines a whole bunch of other hyperlink commands that you can also use hyperlink lt overlay specification gt target name link text lt overlay specification gt Only one overlay specification may be given The link text is typeset in the usual way If you click anywhere on this text you will jump to the slide on which the hypertarget command was used with the parameter target name If an overlay specification is present the hyperlink including the link tezt is completely suppressed on the non specified slides The following commands have a predefined target otherwise they behave exactly like hyperlink In particular they all also accept an overlay specification and they also accept it at the end rather than at the beginning hyperlinkslideprev lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps one slide back hyperlinkslidenext lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps one slide forward hyperlinkframestart lt overlay speci
338. ntation in one file and you may wish to share some part of it like a figure or a formula with your presentation In general the article version of a talk is better suited as a handout than a handout created using the simple handout mode since it is more economic and can include more in depth information 21 2 1 Starting the Article Mode The article mode of a presentation is created by specifying article or book or some other class as the document class instead of beamer and by then loading the package beamerarticle The package beamerarticle defines virtually all of BEAMER s commands in a way that is sensible for the article mode Also overlay specifications can be given to commands like textbf or item once beamerarticle has been loaded Note that except for item these overlay specifications also work by writing section lt presentation gt Name you will suppress this section command in the article version For the exact effects overlay specifications have in article mode please see the descriptions of the commands to which you wish to apply them usepackage options beamerarticle Makes most BEAMER commands available for another document class The following options may be given 204 e activeospeccharacters will leave the character code of the pointed brackets as specified by other packages Normally BEAMER will turn off the special behavior of the two characters lt and gt Using this option you can reinstall the orig
339. ntly from section in head foot shaded this template has its own BEAMER color The following template options are predefined e sidebar theme Does the same as for the nonshaded version except that a different BEAMER color is used Beamer Template Color Font subsection in head foot This template behaves exactly like section in head foot only for subsections e insertsubsectionhead works like insertsectionhead e insertsubsectionheadnumber works like insertsectionheadnumber Beamer Template subsection in head foot shaded This template behaves exactly like section in head foot shaded only for subsections The following template options are predefined e default percentage works like the corresponding option for sections Example setbeamertemplate section in head foot shaded default 20 setbeamertemplate subsection in head foot shaded default 20 Beamer Template Color Font subsection in sidebar This template behaves exactly like section in sidebar only for subsections Beamer Template subsection in sidebar shaded This template behaves exactly like section in sidebar shaded only for subsections Beamer Template Color Font subsubsection in head foot This template behaves exactly like section in head foot only for subsubsections Currently it is not used by the default themes 70 e insertsubsubsectionhead works like insertsectionhead e insertsubsubsectionheadnumber works like insertsectio
340. oda ae ee EE PAO EA a a rare 4 17 6 Transparency Effects i aa ek ee ds RARE NE A de de eee BW Se 18 Fonts Ss Hone Themes uo eh a at ck ete ett Sead dette tt MEN Ad Bell tik Pett tA kK ty tn te f 18 2 Font Changes Made Without Using Font Themes 00 2000 18 2 1 Choosing a Font Size for Normal Text 020000000 18 2 2 Choosing Font Family sca do sa i ee ed a L e Se Se A DA 18 2 3 Choosing a Font Encodings 2 2 0 002 eee ee 18 3 Changing the Fonts Used for Different Elements of a Presentation 18 3 1 Overview of Beamer s Font Management 2 0 0 0 0 0000 eee eee 18 3 2 Using Beamer s Fonts suus oioi woe eae ope de DA wa eee eee bee we 18 3 3 Setting Beamer s Fonts sosa s eoe ab ee a a ee Be a IV Creating Supporting Material 19 Adding Notes for Yourself 19 1 Specifying Note Contents 3 eee Saks ook Eee ee ee AEA Se Rhee ela ee a oe 19 2 Specifying Contents for Multiple Notes 2 2 0 0 0 0 020000000000 00 0004 19 3 Specifying Which Notes and Frames Are Shown 2 2 ee e 20 Creating Transparencies 21 Creating Handouts and Lecture Notes 21 1 Creating Handouts Using the Handout Mode o 0 0 0 0 00000 21 2 Creating Handouts Using the Article Mode o o e e 21 2 1 Starting the Article Mode e 21 232 WOT LOW Caca a ta A ed e da eG le BR 21 2 3 Including Slides from the Presentation Version in
341. of this License 7 3 3 Verbatim Copying You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium either commercially or noncommercially provided that this License the copyright notices and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute However you may accept compensation in exchange for copies If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3 You may also lend copies under the same conditions stated above and you may publicly display copies 7 3 4 Copying in Quantity If you publish printed copies or copies in media that commonly have printed covers of the Document numbering more than 100 and the Document s license notice requires Cover Texts you must enclose the copies in covers that carry clearly and legibly all these Cover Texts Front Cover Texts on the front cover and Back Cover Texts on the back cover Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible You may add other material on the covers in addition Copying with changes limited to the covers as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
342. ok journal reference and any notes If the overlay specification is present the entry will only be shown on the specified slides Example bibitem Dijkstra 1982 Dijkstra1982 E Dijkstra newblock Smoothsort an alternative for sorting in situ newblock em Science of Computer Programming 1 3 223 233 1982 Beamer Template Color Font bibliography item Color font parents item This template is used to render the bibliography item Unlike normal AT X the default template for the bibliography does not repeat the citation text like Dijkstra 1982 before each item in the bibliography Instead a cute small article symbol is drawn The rationale is that the audience will not be able to remember any abbreviated citation texts till the end of the talk The following template options are predefined e default Draws a cute little article icon as the reference Use this for journal articles parts of books like conference proceedings or technical reports article Alias for the default book Draws a cute little book icon as the reference Use this for well books online Draws a cute little globe icon as the reference Use this for websites and the like triangle Draws a triangle as the reference This is more in keeping with the standard itemize items 102 e text Uses the reference text like Dijkstra 1982 as the reference text Be sure you know what you are doing if you use this The followi
343. oked when the partpage command is used The following template options are predefined e default alignment The part page is typeset showing the current part number and below the current part title The BEAMER color and font part page are used including the background color of part page As for the title page template the alignment option is passed on the beamercolorbox The following commands are useful for this template e insertpart inserts the current part name e Vinsertpartnumber inserts the current part number as an Arabic number into a template e Vinsertpartromannumber inserts the current part number as a Roman number into a template AtBeginPart tezt The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every part Example AtBeginPart frame partpage 97 10 4 Splitting a Course Into Lectures When using BEAMER with the article mode you may wish to have the lecture notes of a whole course reside in one file In this case only a few frames are actually part of any particular lecture The lecture command makes it easy to select only a certain set of frames from a file to be presented This command takes among other things a label name If you say includeonlylecture with this label name then only the frames following the corresponding lecture command are shown The frames following other lecture commands are suppressed By default the lecture command has no other effect It does not create any fra
344. ommand is useful for second mode Let s show the table of contents here tableofcontents Here comes some normal text for the first slide end frame end document Example The following example shows how translations can be added in a comfortable way documentclass beamer usepackage pgfpages setbeameroption second mode text on second screen DeclareRobustCommand translation 1 mytranslation 1 relax long def mytranslation 1 2 relax alt lt second gt 2 1 title translation Preparing Presentations Vortr age vorbereiten author Till Tantau begin document begin frame typeset second titlepage end frame begin frame typeset second frametitle translation This is the frame title Dies ist der Titel des Rahmens begin itemize Vitem lt 1 gt translation First Erstens item lt 2 gt translation Second Zweitens item lt 3 gt translation Third Drittens end itemize translation Do not use line by line uncovering Man sollte Text nicht Zeile f ur Zeile aufdecken end frame end document In the last of the above example it is a bit bothersome that the option typeset second has to be added to each frame The following option globally sets this option 212 setbeameroption always typeset second mode true or false When this option is set to true every following frame will have the option typeset second set to true 22 3 Showing the Previous Slide on the Second Screen
345. on A alert set consists of elements end block ARTICLE The block name is typeset in bold Beamer Template block begin This template is inserted at the beginning of a block before the environment contents Inside this template the block title can be accessed via the following insert 116 e insertblocktitle Inserts the block title into the template When the template starts no special color or font is installed for somewhat complicated reasons Thus this template should install the correct colors and fonts for the title and the body itself Beamer Template block end This template is inserted at the end of a block Beamer Color Font block title This BEAMER color font should be used to typeset the title of the block Since neither the color nor the font are setup automatically the template block begin must do so itself The default block template and also the rounded version honor the background of this color Beamer Color Font block body This BEAMER color font should be used to typeset the body of the block that is the environment contents As for block title the color and font must be setup by the template block begin beginfalertblock lt action specification gt t block title action specification gt environment contents end alertblock Inserts a block whose title is highlighting Behaves like the block environment otherwise Example begin alertblock Wrong Theorem 1 2 end alertb
346. on TEX has commands like large or small The actual size these commands select depends on the size of normal text In a presentation you will want to use a very small font for text in headlines footlines or sidebars since the text shown there is not vital and is read at the audience s leisure Naturally the text should still be large 38 enough that it actually can be read without binoculars However in a normal presentation environment the audience will still be able to read even tiny text when necessary However using small fonts can be tricky Many PostScript fonts are just scaled down when used at small sizes When a font is used at less than its normal size the characters should actually be stroked using a slightly thicker pen than the one resulting from just scaling things For this reason high quality multiple master fonts or the Computer Modern fonts use different fonts for small characters and for normal characters However when you use a normal Helvetica or Times font the characters are just scaled down A similar problem arises when you use a light font on a dark background Even when printed on paper in high resolution light on dark text tends to be overflooded by the dark background When light on dark text is rendered in a presentation this effect can be much worse making the text almost impossible to read You can counter both negative effects by using a bold version for small text In the other direction yo
347. on the second slide of the frame 3 12 Adding References Euclid decides that he would like to add a citation to his open questions list since he would like to attribute the question to his good old friend Christian Euclid is not really sure whether using a bibliography in his talk is a good idea but he goes ahead anyway To this end he adds an entry to the bibliography which he fortunately already finds in the solution file Having the bibliography in the appendix does not quite suit Euclid so he removes the appendix command He also notices lt presentation gt overlay specifications and finds them a bit strange but they don t seem to hurt either Hopefully they do something useful His bibliography looks like this begin thebibliography 10 bibitem Goldbach1742 Goldbach 1742 Christian Goldbach newblock A problem we should try to solve before the ISPN 43 deadline newblock emph Letter to Leonhard Euler 1742 end thebibliography and he can then add a citation begin block Open Questions Is every even number the sum of two primes cite Goldbach1742 end block 3 13 Verbatim Text On another frame Euclid would like to show a listing of an algorithm his friend Eratosthenes has sent him saying he came up with it while reorganizing his sieve collection Euclid normally uses the verbatim environment and 25 sometimes also similar environments like 1stlisting to typeset listings He can also use them in B
348. onic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate 7 3 9 Translation Translation is considered a kind of modification so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4 Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections You may include a translation of this License and all the license notices in the Document and any Warranty Disclaimers provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer the original version will prevail If a section in the Document is Entitled Acknowledgements Dedications or History the requirement section 4 to Preserve its Title section 1 will typically require changing the actual title 7 3 10 Termination You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However if you cease all violation of this
349. ontrast is too strong He adds usecolortheme seahorse usecolortheme rose The result seems some more subdued to him Euclid decides that the font used for the titles is not quite classical enough classical fonts are the latest chic in Alexandria So he adds usefonttheme onlylarge structuresmallcapsserif Euclid notices that the small fonts in the navigation bars are a bit hard to read as they are so thin Adding the following helps usefonttheme onlysmal1 structurebold 3 15 Changing the Way Things Look II Colors and Fonts Since Euclid wants to give a perfect talk he decides that the font used for the title simply has to be a serif italics To change only the font used for the title Euclid uses the following command setbeamerfont title shape itshape family rmfamily He notices that the font is still quite large which he likes but wonders why this is the case since he did not specify this The reason is that calls of setbeamerfont accumulate and the size was already set to large by some font theme Using the starred version of setbeamerfont resets the font Euclid decides that he would also like to change the color of the title to a dashing red though perhaps with a bit of black added He uses the following command setbeamercolor title fg red 80 black Trying the following command Euclid is delighted to find that specifying a background color also has an effect setbeamercolor title fg red
350. oop e once As for movie this causes the movie to played only once e palindrome As for movie this causes the movie to be played forth and back e pause Causes the playback of the movie to be paused if the movie was currently playing If not nothing happens e play Causes the movie to be played from whatever start position is specified If the movie is already playing it will be stopped and restarted at the starting position This is the default e resume Resumes playback of the movie if it has previously been paused If has not been paused but not started or is already playing nothing happens e showcontrols true or false As for movie this causes a control bar to be shown or not shown during playback e start time s As for movie this causes the given number of seconds to be skipped at the beginning of the movie if play is used to start the movie e stop Causes the playback of the movie to be stopped 14 1 2 Animations Created by Showing Slides in Rapid Succession You can create an animation in a portable way by using the overlay commands of the BEAMER package to create a series of slides that when shown in rapid succession present an animation This is a flexible approach but such animations will typically be rather static since it will take some time to advance from one slide to the next This approach is mostly useful for animations where you want to explain each picture of the animation When you advance
351. or Computer Modern and Baskerville they are quite similar A combination of Gills Sans and Helvetica is dangerous but perhaps possible A combination like Futura and Optima is certainly OK at least with respect to the fonts being very different 5 6 3 Font Shapes Italics and Small Capitals IXT X introduces the concept of the shape of a font The only really important ones are italic and small caps An italic font is a font in which the text is slightly slanted to the right like this Things to know about italics 40 e Italics are commonly used in novels to express emphasis However especially with sans serif fonts italics are typically not strong enough and the emphasis gets lost in a presentation Using a different color or bold text seems better suited for presentations to create emphasis e If you look closely you will notice that italic text is not only slanted but that different letters are actually used compare a and a for example However this is only true for serif text not for sans serif text Text that is only slanted without using different characters is called slanted instead of italic Sometimes the word oblique is also used for slanted but it sometimes also used for italics so it is perhaps best to avoid it Using slanted serif text is very much frowned upon by typographers and is considered cheap computer typography However people who use slanted text in their books include Donald Knuth
352. ore sophisticated effect might be implemented in the future This command has no effect Beamer Template Color Font logo This template is used to render the logo The following insert can be used to insert a logo somewhere e insertlogo inserts the logo at the current position This command has the same effect as usebeamertemplate logo 8 2 6 The Frame Title The frame title is shown prominently at the top of the frame and can be specified with the following command frametitle lt overlay specification gt short frame title frame title text PRESEN TATION ARTICLE You should end the frame title text with a period if the title is a proper sentence Otherwise there should not be a period The short frame title is normally not shown but it s available via the insertshortframetitle command The overlay specification is mostly useful for suppressing the frame title in article mode Example begin frame frametitle A Frame Title is Important framesubtitle Subtitles are not so important Frame contents end frame If you are using the allowframebreaks option with the current frame a continuation text like cont or something similar depending on the template frametitle continuation is automatically added to the frame title text at the end separated with a space The frame title is not typeset immediately when the command frametitle is encountered Rather the argument of the comm
353. osed to help the audience see the structure of your presentation If the overlay specification is present the command only has an effect on the specified slides Example structure Paragraph Heading Internally this command just puts the text inside a structureenv environment ARTICLE Structure text is typeset as bold text This can be changed by modifying the templates 114 Beamer Color Font structure This color font is used when structured text is typeset but it is also widely used as a base for many other colors including the headings of blocks item buttons and titles In most color themes the colors for navigational elements in the headline or the footline are derived from the foreground color of structure By changing the structure color you can easily change the basic color of your presentation other than the color of normal text See also the related color local structure and the related font tiny structure Inside the structure command the background of the color is ignored but this is not necessarily true for elements that inherit their color from structure There is no template structure use structure begin and structure end instead Beamer Color local structure This color should be used to typeset structural elements that change their color according to the local environment For example an item button in an itemize environment changes its color according to circumstances If it is used inside
354. otice that says that the Document is released under this License A Front Cover Text may be at most 5 words and a Back Cover Text may be at most 25 words A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine readable copy represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or for images composed of pixels generic paint programs or for drawings some widely available drawing editor and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup or absence of markup has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup Texinfo input format LaTeX input format SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD and standard conforming simple HTML PostScript or PDF designed for human modification Examples of transparent image formats include PNG XCF and JPG Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by propri etary word processors SGML or XML for which the DTD and or processing tools are not generally
355. over Texts or some other combination of the three merge those two alternatives to suit the situation If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license such as the GNU General Public License to permit their use in free software 7 4 The TEX Project Public License LPPL Version 1 3c 2008 05 04 Copyright 1999 2002 2008 ETrX3 Project Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this license document but modification of it is not allowed 7 4 1 Preamble The IATFX Project Public License LPPL is the primary license under which the ATEX kernel and the base ATEX packages are distributed You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright and which you wish to distribute This license may be particularly suitable if your work is T X related such as a TEX package but it is written in such a way that you can use it even if your work is unrelated to TEX The section WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE below gives instructions examples and recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their works under this license This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed and modified as well as conditions under which modified versions of that work may be distributed We the ETRX3 Project believe that the conditions below give you the freedom to make and
356. owcolors 1 blue 20 blue 10 begin tabular 1 vrule cccc Class amp A amp B amp C amp D hline X 12 28 3 4 pause Y 3 48 5 6 pause Z 54647458 end tabular By using onslide instead of pause you can get more fine grained control over which line is shown on which slide 23 6 Uncovering a Table Columnwise The same problems as for uncovering a table linewise arise for uncovering it columnwise Once more using the colortbl package offers a solution In the following example the tabular header is used to insert onslide commands one for each column that cover the entries in the column from a certain slide on At the end of the last column the onslide without a specification ensures that the first column on the next row is once more shown normally Inserting a horizontal line is tricky since it will protrude over the full width of the table also in the covered version The best idea is just not to use horizontal bars rowcolors 1 blue 20 blue 10 begin tabular 1 vrule c lt onslide lt 2 gt c lt onslide lt 3 gt c lt onslide lt 4 gt c lt onslide c Class L AL BECEDAO 217 X 12 28638 4 MM Y 384486 58 6 NM Z amp 5 amp 6 amp 7 amp SB end tabular 218 24 How To Import Presentations Based on Other Packages and Classes The BEAMER class comes with a number of emulation layers for classes or packages that do not support BEAMER directly For example the p
357. ows how the predefined option can be used together with its arguments but the setbeamertemplate xxxx is omitted Thus the above example would be documented in the description of the background element like this e grid step options causes a light grid to be addtobeamertemplate element name H pre tert post text This command adds the pre text before the text that is currently installed as the template element name and the post tert after it This allows you a limited form of modification of existing templates Example The following commands have the same effect setbeamertemplate my template Hello world setbeamertemplate my template world addtobeamertemplate my template Hello If a new template is installed any additions will be deleted On the other hand you can repeatedly use this command to add multiple things defbeamertemplate lt mode specification gt element name predefined option argument number C default optional argument predefined text action action command This command installs a predefined option for the template element name Once this command has been used users can access the predefined template using the setbeamertemplate command Example defbeamertemplate itemize item double arrow Rightarrow After the above command has been invoked the following two commands will have the same effect setbeamertemplate itemize item Rightarrow setb
358. package takes the following options e framesassubsections causes each frame to create its own subsection with the frame title as subsection name This behavior mimicks HA PROSPER s behavior In a long talk this will create way too many subsections The framesassubsections option has no effect in article mode Example documentclass notes beamer usepackage framesassubsections beamerprosper title A Beamer Presentation Using HA Prosper Commands subtitle Subtitles Are Also Supported author Till Tantau institution The Institution is Mapped To Institute begin document maketitle tsectionandpart Introduction overlays 2 begin slide About this file begin itemstep item This is a beamer presentation item You can use the prosper and the HA prosper syntax item This is done by mapping prosper and HA prosper commands to beamer commands item The emulation is by no means perfect end itemstep end slide section Second Section subsection A subsection 220 begin frame frametitle A frame created using the texttt frame environment begin itemize lt gt item You can still use the original beamer syntax item The emulation is intended only to make recycling slides easier not to install a whole new syntax for beamer end itemize end frame begin notes Notes for these slides My notes for these slides end notes end document You can run for example pd
359. pages e insertnote Inserts the text of the current note into the template e insertslideintonotes magnification Inserts a mini picture of the last slide into the current note The slide will be scaled by the given magnification Example insertslideintonotes 0 25 This will give a mini slide whose width and height are one fourth of the usual size 19 2 Specifying Contents for Multiple Notes Sometimes you wish some text to be shown on every note or at least on every note in a long series of notes To achieve this effect you can use the following two commands AtBeginNote tezt The text will be inserted at the beginning of every note in the scope of the command To stop the effect either use AtBeginNote or enclose the area in a T X group It is advisable to add a par command or an empty line at the end of the tezt since otherwise any note text will directly follow the text without a line break Example section My Section AtBeginNote Finish this section by 14 35 par begin frame note some note 200 end frame begin frame note some other note end frame AtBeginNote AtEndNote text This command behaves the same way as AtBeginNote except that the text is inserted at the end bottom You may wish to add a par at the beginning of text 19 3 Specifying Which Notes and Frames Are Shown Since you normally do not wish the notes to be part of your presentation you must e
360. part is the effect in the non specified modes In these modes the command causes TEX to enter a kind of gobbling state It will now ignore all following lines until the next line that has a sole occurrence of one of the following commands mode modex begin document end document Even a comment on this line will make T X skip it Note that the line with the special commands that make TEX stop gobbling may not directly follow the line where the gobbling is started Rather there must either be one non empty line before the special command or at least two empty lines When T X encounters a single mode command it will execute this command If the command is mode command of the first flavor T X will resume its gobbling state after having inserted or not inserted the argument of the mode command If the mode command is of the second flavor it takes over Using this second flavor of mode is less convenient than the first but there are different reasons why you might need to use it e The line wise gobbling is much faster than the gobble of the third flavor explained below e The first flavor reads its argument completely This means it cannot contain any verbatim text that contains unbalanced braces e The first flavor cannot cope with arguments that contain include e If the text mainly belongs to one mode with only small amounts of text from another mode inserted this second flavor is nice to use Note When s
361. placed inside a frame If the bibliography does not fit on one frame you should split it create a new frame and a second thebibliography environment or use the allowframebreaks option Even better you should reconsider whether it is a good idea to present so many references Example begin frame frametitle For Further Reading begin thebibliography Dijkstra 1982 bibitem Salomaa 1973 Salomaa1973 A Salomaa newblock em Formal Languages newblock Academic Press 1973 bibitem Dijkstra 1982 Dijkstra1982 E Dijkstra newblock Smoothsort an alternative for sorting in situ newblock em Science of Computer Programming 1 3 223 233 1982 end thebibliography end frame Four templates govern the appearance of the author title journal and note text These author templates are inserted before the first block of the entry the first block is all text before the first occurrence of a 101 newblock command The title template is inserted before the second block the text between the first and second occurrence of newblock Likewise for the journal and note templates The templates are inserted before the blocks and you do not have access to the blocks themselves via insert commands The corresponding BEAMER color and font are also installed before the blocks Beamer Template Color Font bibliography entry author This template is inserted before the author of a bibliography entry The color and font are al
362. places where you may run into problems e In BEAMER the command PDForPS will do exactly what the name suggests insert the first argument when run by pdflatex insert the second argument when run by latex However in PROSPER the code inserted for the PDF case is actually PostScript code which is only later converted to PDF by some external program You will need to adjust this PostScript code such that it works with pdflatex which is not always possible 219 e If you used fine grained spacing commands like adding a little horizontal skip here and a big negative vertical skip there the typesetting of the text may be poor It may be a good idea to just remove these spacing commands If you use pstricks commands you will either have to stick to using latex and dvips or will have to work around them using for example pgf Porting lots of pstricks code is bound to be difficult if you wish to switch over to pdflatex so be warned You can read more about that in Section 13 that talks about graphics If the file cannot be compiled because some PROSPER command is not implemented you will have to delete this command and try to mimick its behavior using some BEAMER command usepackage beamerprosper ARTICLE Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to PROSPER commands Use beamer as the document class not prosper Most of the options passed to the class prosper make no sense in beamer so just delete them This
363. r document class as well 13 1 Including External Graphic Files Versus Inlines Graphics There are two principal ways of creating T X documents that include graphics Either the graphic resides in an external file that is included or the graphic is inlined which means that T X file contains a bunch of commands like draw a red line from here to there In the following the advantages and disadvantages of these two approaches are discussed You can use an external program like xfig GIMP or Inkscape to create a graphic These programs have an option to export graphic files in a format that can then be inserted into the presentation The main advantage is e You can use a powerful program to create a high quality graphic The main disadvantages are e You have to worry about many files Typically there are at least two for each presentation namely the program s graphic data file and the exported graphic file in a format that can be read by TRX e Changing the graphic using the program does not automatically change the graphic in the presentation Rather you must reexport the graphic and rerun ATEX e It may be difficult to get the line width fonts and font sizes right e Creating formulas as part of graphics is often difficult or impossible You can use all the standard PTEX commands for inserting graphics like includegraphics be sure to include the package graphics or graphicx Also the pgf package offers commands for inclu
364. r right template color font 67 sidebartab color theme 175 Singapore presentation theme 156 slide environment 221 226 slideCaption 223 smaller class option 194 smoothbars outer theme 163 smoothtree outer theme 166 Solutions conference talks conference ornate 20min 42 generic talks generic ornate 15min 45min 42 short talks speaker_introduction ornate 2min 42 sound 139 split outer theme 165 spruce color theme 180 step 230 steponce 230 stepwise 230 structure 114 structure color theme 174 structure color font 115 structure begin template 115 structure end template 115 structurebold font theme 192 structureenv environment 115 structureitalicserif font theme 193 structuresmallcapsserif font theme 193 subitem color font 114 subitem projected color font 114 subject 93 subsection 94 95 subsection in head foot template color font 70 subsection in head foot shaded template 70 sidebar template color font 70 sidebar shaded template 70 toc template color font 94 subsection in toc shaded template color font 95 subsubitem color font 114 subsubitem projected color font 114 subsubsection 95 head foot template color font 70 head foot shaded template 71 sidebar template color font 71 sidebar shaded template 71 sidebar sidebar sidebar subsection in subsection in subsection in subsubsection in subsubsection in subsubsection in subsubsection in
365. r to pdflatex so be warned e If the file cannot be compiled because some SEMINAR command is not implemented you will have to delete this command and try to mimick its behavior using some BEAMER command usepackage beamerseminar Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to SEMINAR commands Use beamer as the document class not seminar Most of the options passed to the class seminar make no sense in beamer so just delete them This package takes the following options e accumulated causes overlays to be accumulated The original behavior of the SEMINAR package is that in each overlay only the really new part of the overlay is shown This makes sense if you really print out the overlays on transparencies and then really stack overlays on top of each other For a presentation with a video projector you rather want to present an accumulated version of the overlays This is what this option does When the new material of the i th overlay is shown the material of all previous overlays is also shown Example The following example is an extract of beamerexample seminar tex documentclass ignorenonframetext beamer usepackage accumulated beamerseminar usepackage beamerthemeclassic title A beamer presentation using seminar commands author Till Tantau let heading frametitle begin document begin frame maketitle end frame This is some text outside any frame It will only be s
366. ranslation and you would like to provide a new one 2 You are writing a dictionary You provide a translation using one of the following commands newtranslation options key translation This command defines the translation of key to be translation in the language specified by the options You can only use this command if the translation is really new in the sense that no translation for the keys has yet been given for the language If there is already a translation an error message will be printed The following options may be given e to language This options tells the TRANSLATOR that the translation translation of keys applies to the language language Inside a dictionary file see Section 25 3 3 this option is set automatically to the language of the dictionary Example newtranslation to German figure Abbildung Example newtranslation to German Figures Abbildungen renewtranslation options key translation This command works like newtranslation only it will redefine an existing translation providetranslation options key translation This command works like newtranslation but no error message will be printed if the translation already exists It this case the existing translation is not changed This command should be used by dictionary authors since their translations should not overrule any trans lations given by document authors or other dictionary au
367. rea width zoom area depth This command should be given somewhere at the beginning of a frame When given two different things will happen depending on whether the button overlay specification applies to the current slide of the frame or whether the zoomed overlay specification applies These overlay specifications should not overlap If the button overlay specification applies a clickable area is created inside the frame The size of this area is given by zoom area width and zoom area depth which are two normal T X dimensions like 1cm or 20pt The upper left corner of this area is given by upper left x and upper left y which are also T X dimensions They are measures relative to the place where the first normal text of a frame would go Thus the location Opt Opt is at the beginning of the normal text which excludes the headline and also the frame title By default the button is clickable but it will not be indicated in any special way You can draw a border around the button by using the following option e border width in pixels will draw a border around the specified button area The default width is 1 pixel The color of this button is the linkbordercolor of hyperref BEAMER sets this color to a 50 gray by default To change this you can use the command hypersetup linkbordercolor red green blue where red green and blue are values between 0 and 1 When you press the button created in thi
368. remental Specifications a Structuring a Presentation The Static Global Structure 10 1 Adding ar Litle Ragen erica a he OG el a ed Alpe A AD ee ee 10 2 Adding Sections and Subsections 2 2 ee 10 3 Adding Parts 2 sine Aa BAA AA ek Bete Gee ee A ee AR a o de 10 4 Splitting a Course Into Lectures eee 10 5 Adding a Table of Contents ee ee 10 6 Adding a Bibliography 2 64 02 EGG Skee eke dee b h h o ee eu a Res 10 7 Adding an Appendiks ge ge gre sink ee READ be oe ooo eee ee be Structuring a Presentation The Interactive Global Structure 11 1 Adding Hyperlinks and Buttonas secer EA e p eee E E A A A AT EE E E EG 11 2 Repeating a Frame at a Later Point e 11 3 Adding Anticipated Zooming 2 e o e a a aa A a E e eh 12 Structuring a Presentation The Local Structure 110 12 1 Itemizations Enumerations and Descriptions 00 0000 eee eee 110 12 2 ESPERE AS A a a A Re A E E AR A 114 1223 Block Envitonments a A Gece a A AS ated eee 116 12 4 Theorem Environments 2 20 0 ce ee 118 12 5 Framed and Boxed Text 000 e e b a a a a a a ae ee 121 12 6 Figures and Tables id anaue os ek a A a A Ee E wa a Y 124 12 7 Splitting a Frame into Multiple Columns 125 12 8 Positioning Text and Graphics Absolutely s oe scac ceea sanana eee aa 127 12 9 Verbatim and Fragile Text i e t ea bbe ee ee A A o ee 127 ZOA aO ahs r tick e of Ok AA ar Sede Mets hp Mot gat an ARO bal l l
369. ribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whol
370. rina Rajnovi my students at Department of Informatics who were the first to hear about ATRX BEAMER and how it can help in preparing class material I would like to thank Heiko Oberdiek for HYPERREF Johannes Braams for BABEL and Philipp Lehman for BIBLATEX Above all I owe a lot to Till Tantau for developing BEAMER in the first place and to Joseph Wright for developing SIUNITX and for helping me develop BEAMER further 1 4 How to Read this User s Guide You should start with the first part If you have not yet installed the package please read Section 2 first If you are new to BEAMER you should next read the tutorial in Section 3 When you sit down to create your first real presentation using BEAMER read Section 4 where the technical details of a possible workflow are discussed If you are still new to creating presentations in general you might find Section 5 helpful where many guidelines are given on what to do and what not to do Finally you should browse through Section 6 where you will find ready to use solution templates for creating talks possibly even in the language you intend to use The second part of this user s guide goes into the details of all the commands defined in BEAMER but it also addresses other technical issues having to do with creating presentations like how to include graphics or animations The third part explains how you can change the appearance of your presentation easily either using themes or by
371. ription labels see Section 12 1 description width of tezt sets the default width of description labels to the width of the text see Section 12 1 mini frame size T X dimension sets the size of mini frames in a navigation bar When two mini frame icons are shown alongside each other their left end points are TX dimension far apart mini frame offset TpX dimension set an additional vertical offset that is added to the mini frame size when arranging mini frames vertically ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode 76 8 4 Restricting the Slides of a Frame The number of slides in a frame is automatically calculated If the largest number mentioned in any overlay specification inside the frame is 4 four slides are introduced despite the fact that a specification like lt 4 gt might suggest that more than four slides would be possible You can also specify the number of slides in the frame by hand To do so you pass an overlay specification to the frame command The frame will contain only the slides specified in this argument Consider the following example begin frame lt 1 2 4 gt This is slide number only lt 1 gt 1 only lt 2 gt 2 only lt 3 gt 3 only lt 4 gt 4 only lt 5 gt 5 end frame This command will create a frame containing four slides The first will contain the text This is slide number 1 the second This is slide number 2 the third This is slide number 4 and
372. rk 129 framesubtitle 74 frametitle 73 frametitle continuation 59 headline 63 item 114 item projected 114 itemize item 111 itemize subitem 111 itemize subsubitem 111 logo 73 mini frame 69 navigation symbols 72 normal text 188 note page 200 page number in head foot 66 part page 97 qed symbol 119 quotation 128 quote 128 section in head foot 69 section in sidebar 70 section in toc 94 section in toc shaded 94 sidebar left 66 sidebar right 67 structure 115 subitem 114 subitem projected 114 subsection in head foot 70 subsection in sidebar 70 subsection in toc 94 subsection in toc shaded 95 subsubitem 114 subsubitem projected 114 subsubsection in head foot 70 subsubsection in sidebar 71 subsubsection in toc 95 subsubsection in toc shaded 95 tiny structure 115 title page 92 titlelike 188 verse 128 Beamer options always typeset second mode 213 hide notes 201 previous slide on second screen 213 second mode text on second screen 211 show notes 201 show notes on second screen 201 show only notes 202 Beamer templates abstract begin 127 abstract end 128 abstract title 127 alerted text begin 116 alerted text end 116 background 75 background canvas 75 bibliography entry author 102 bibliography entry location 102 bibliography entry note 102 bibliography entry title 102 bibliography item 102 block alerted begin 117 block alerted
373. rmal HTX label on the slide using the label command Since this command is overlay specification aware you can also select specific slides of a frame Also by adding the option label name to a frame a label name lt slide number gt is automatically added to each slide of the frame Once you have labeled a slide you can use the following command in your article version to insert the slide into it includeslide options label name This command calls pgfimage with the given options for the file specified by set j obnamebeamerversion filename Furthermore the option page page of label name is passed to pgfimage where the page of label name is read internally from the file filename snm Example article begin figure begin center includeslide height 5cm slide1 end center caption The first slide height 5cm Note the partly covered second item end figure begin figure begin center includeslide slide2 end center caption The second slide original size Now the second item is also shown end figure The exact effect of passing the option page page of label name to the command pgf image is explained in the documentation of pgf In essence the following happens e For old versions of pdflatex and for any version of latex together with dvips the pgf package will look for a file named filename page page of label name extension 207 For each page of your pdf or ps
374. rom third slide on end itemize item Shown from third slide on pause item Shown from fourth slide on end itemize Shown from fourth slide on begin itemize onslide item Shown from first slide on pause item Shown from fifth slide on end itemize end frame pause number This command causes the text following it to be shown only from the next slide on or if the optional number is given from the slide with the number number If the optional number is given the counter beamerpauses is set to this number This command uses the onslide command internally This command does not work inside amsmath environments like align since these do really wicked things Example begin frame begin itemize item A pause 78 item B pause item C end itemize end frame ARTICLE This command is ignored To unpause some text that is to temporarily suspend pausing use the command onslide see below 9 2 The General Concept of Overlay Specifications The approach taken by most presentation classes to overlays is somewhat similar to the above pause command These commands get a certain slide number as input and affect the text on the slide following this command in a certain way For example PROSPER s FromSlide 2 command causes all text following this command to be shown only from the second slide on The BEAMER class uses a different approach though the abovementioned command
375. ronment lt gt environment name argument number default optional value begin text end text Declares a new environment that is overlay specification aware If this environment is encountered the same algorithm as for newcommand lt gt is used to parse the arguments and the overlay specification Note that as always the end text may not contain any arguments like 1 In particular you do not have access to the overlay specification In this case it is usually a good idea to use altenv environment in the begin text Example Declare your own action block newenvironment lt gt myboldblock 1 begin actionenv 2 textbf 1 par par end actionenv begin frame begin myboldblock lt 2 gt This theorem is shown only on the second slide end myboldblock end frame Example Text in the following environment is normally bold and italic on non specified slides newenvironment lt gt boldornormal begin altenv 1 begin bfseries end bfseries 00 end altenv Incidentally since altenv also accepts its argument at the end the same effect could have been achieved using just newenvironment boldornormal begin faltenv 86 begin bfseries end bfseries end altenv renewenvironment lt gt ezisting environment name argument number default optional value begin text end text Redefines an existing environment The original environm
376. rosper styles Rather the normal BEAMER themes must be used although one could implement BEAMER themes that mimicks existing PROSPER styles we have not done that and do not intend to The workflow for creating a BEAMER presentation that uses PROSPER code is the following 1 Use the document class beamer not prosper Most options passed to prosper do not apply to beamer and should be omitted 2 Add a usepackage beamerprosper to start the emulation 3 If you add slides relying on HA PROSPER you may wish to add the option framesassubsections to beamerprosper though we do not recommend it use the normal subsection command instead it gives you more fine grained control 4 If you also copy the title commands it may be necessary to adjust the content of commands like title or author Note that in PROSPER the email command is given outside the author command whereas in BEAMER and also in HA PROSPER it is given inside 5 When copying slides containing the command includegraphics you will almost surely have to adjust its usage If you use pdfI4T X to typeset the presentation than you cannot include PostScript files You should convert them to pdf or to png and adjust any usage of includegraphics accordingly 6 When starting to change things you can use all of BEAMER s commands and even mix them with PROSPER commands An example can be found in the file beamerexample prosper tex There are unfortunately quite a few
377. rouble reading your slides This user s guide cannot replace a good book on typography but in the present section you ll find several hints that should help you setup fonts for a BEAMER presentation that look good A font has numerous attributes like weight family or size All of these have an impact on the usability of the font in presentations In the following these attributes are described and advantages and disadvantages of the different choices are sketched 5 6 1 Font Size Perhaps the most obvious attribute of a font is its size Fonts are traditionally measured in points How much a point is depends on whom you ask TEX thinks a point is the 72 27th part of an inch which is 2 54 cm On the other hand PostScript and Adobe think a point is the 72th part of an inch T X calls this a big point There are differences between American and European points Once it is settled how much a point is claiming that a text is in 11pt means that the height of the letters in the font are 11pt However this height stems from the time when letters where still cast in lead and refers to the vertical size of the lead letters It thus does not need to have any correlation with the actual height of say the letter x or even the letter M The letter x of an 11pt Times from Adobe will have a height that is different from the height of the letter x of an 11pt Times from UTC and the letter x of an 11pt Helvetica from Adobe will have yet ano
378. rrent page of the frame as an arabic number insertcontinuationcountroman inserts the current page of the frame as an uppercase Roman number insertcontinuationtext just inserts the text cont or possibly a translation thereof like Forts in German If a frame needs to be broken into several pages the material on all but the last page fills only 95 of each page by default Thus there will be some space left at the top and or bottom depending on the vertical placement option for the frame This yields a better visual result than a 100 filling which typically looks crowded However you can change this percentage using the optional argument 59 fraction where 1 means 100 and 0 5 means 50 This percentage includes the frame title Thus in order to split a frame roughly in half you should give 0 6 as fraction Most of the fine details of normal TEX page breaking also apply to this option For example when you wish equations to be broken automatically be sure to use the Nallowdisplaybreaks command You can insert break nobreak and penalty commands to control where breaks should occur The commands pagebreak and nopagebreak also work including their options Since you typically do not want page breaks for the frame to apply also to the article mode you can add a mode specification like lt presentation gt to make these commands apply only to the presentation modes The command framebreak is a shorthand for
379. rsion of this license is in http www latex project org lppl txt and version 1 3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version 2005 12 01 or later This work has the LPPL maintenance status maintained The Current Maintainer of this work is M Y Name This work consists of the files pig dtx and pig ins and the derived file pig sty Given such a notice and statement in a file the conditions given in this license document would apply with the Work referring to the three files pig dtx pig ins and pig sty the last being generated from pig dtx using pig ins the Base Interpreter referring to any TAT X Format and both Copyright Holder and Current Maintainer referring to the person M Y Name If you do not want the Maintenance section of LPPL to apply to your Work change maintained above into author maintained However we recommend that you use maintained as the Maintenance section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful to the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it yourself 7 4 10 Derived Works That Are Not Replacements Several clauses of the LPPL specify means to provide reliability and stability for the user community They therefore concern themselves with the case that a Derived Work is intended to be used as a compatible or incompatible replacement of the original
380. rticular it should be comprehensible before someone has heard your talk e Keep section and subsection titles self explaining e Both the sections and the subsections should follow a logical pattern 32 e Begin with an explanation of what your talk is all about Do not assume that everyone knows this The Ignorant Audience Law states Someone important in the audience always knows less than you think everyone should know even if you take the Ignorant Audience Law into account e Then explain what you or someone else has found out concerning the subject matter e Always conclude your talk with a summary that repeats the main message of the talk in a short and simple way People pay most attention at the beginning and at the end of talks The summary is your second chance to get across a message e You can also add an appendix part using the appendix command Put everything into this part that you do not actually intend to talk about but that might come in handy when questions are asked e Do not use subsubsections they are evil Giving an Abstract In papers the abstract gives a short summary of the whole paper in about 100 words This summary is intend to help readers appraise whether they should read the whole paper or not e Since your audience is unlikely to flee after the first slide in a presentation you usually do not need to present an abstract e However if you can give a nice succinct statement of your talk yo
381. ruled by the templates If the option envcountsect is given either as class option in one of the presentation modes or as an option to the package beamerarticle in article mode then the numbering of the theorems is local to each section with the section number prefixing the theorem number otherwise they are numbered consecutively throughout the presentation or article We recommend using this option in article mode By default no theorem numbers are shown in the presentation modes Example begin theorem Kummer 1992 If _A n is n enumerable then A is recursive end theorem begin theorem lt 2 gt Tantau 2002 If _A 2 is 2 fa enumerable then A is regular end theorem 118 PRESEN TATION ARTICLE The environments corollary fact and lemma behave exactly the same way documentclass envcountsect beamer Causes theorems definitions and so on to be numbered locally to each section Thus the first theorem of the second section would be Theorem 2 1 assuming that there are no definitions lemmas or corollaries earlier in the section begin definition lt action specification gt additional text lt action specification gt environment contents end def inition Behaves like the theorem environment except that the theorem style definition is used In this style the body of a theorem is typeset in an upright font The environment definitions behaves exactly the same way begin
382. s 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem In this layout the headline contains three lines that show the title of the current talk the current section in this talk and the current subsection in the section The colors are drawn from title in head foot section in head foot and subsection in head foot In addition separation lines of height 3pt are shown above and below the three lines if the background of separation line is set More fine grained control of the colors of these lines can be gained by setting upper separation line head and lower separation line head The following options may be given e hooks causes little hooks to be drawn in front of the section and subsection entries These are supposed to increase the tree like appearance useoutertheme smoothtree Example 166 There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics a University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem T
383. s a mini table of contents in the sidebar Beamer Template sidebar canvas left Like the overall background canvas this canvas is drawn behind the actual text of the sidebar This template should normally insert a rectangle of the size of the sidebar though a too large height will not lead to an error or warning When this template is called the BEAMER color sidebar left will have been installed The following template options are predefined e default uses a large rectangle colored with sidebar bg as the sidebar canvas However if the background of sidebar is empty nothing is drawn and the canvas is transparent e vertical shading color options installs a vertically shaded background The following color options may be given top color specifies the color at the top of the sidebar By default 25 of the foreground of the BEAMER color palette primary is used bottom color specifies the color at the bottom of the sidebar more precisely at a distance of the page height below the top of the sidebar By default the background of normal text at the moment of invocation of this command is used middle color specifies the color for the middle of the sidebar Thus if this option is given the shading changes from the bottom color to this color and then to the top color midpoint factor specifies at which point of the page the middle color is used A factor of 0 is the bottom of the page a factor of 1 i
384. s an empty footline Note that the navigational symbols are not part of the footline by default Rather they are part of an invisible right sidebar e infolines theme This option becomes available and is used if the infolines outer theme is loaded The footline shows things like the author s name and the title of the talk 65 miniframes theme This option becomes available and is used if the miniframes outer theme is loaded Depending on the exact options that are used when the miniframes theme is loaded different things can be shown in the footline e page number Shows the current page number in the footline frame number Shows the current frame number in the footline split This option becomes available and is used if the split outer theme is loaded The footline just like the headline is split into a left part showing the author s name and a right part showing the talk s title text line tezt The footline is typeset more or less as if it were a normal text line with the text as contents The left and right margin are setup such that they are the same as the margins of normal text The text is typeset inside an hbox while the headline is normally typeset in vertical mode Using the strut command somewhere in such a line might be a good idea The same inserts as for headlines can be used Beamer Color Font page number in head foot These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the page number or fra
385. s not divisible by any E ime number ne first w of them 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Like the dove color theme this theme is useful for printing on a black and white printer However it uses different shades of gray extensively which may or may not look good on a transparency usecolortheme wolverine Example 179 Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Theorem Results Proof 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 There is no largest prime number Proof of the Main Theorem 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Theme author Madhusudan Singh The theme is based on the colors of the University of Michigan s mascot a wolverine usecolortheme beaver Example a Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid Euklid of Alexandria Proof ot the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Theorem 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results There is no largest prime number Proof Proof of the Main Theorem 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Theme author Madhusudan Singh The theme is based on the colors of
386. s sometimes necessary to translate a group of words like Table of figures as a whole While these are three words in English the German translation in just a single word Abbildungsverzeichnis 2 Uppercase and lowercase letters may cause problems Suppose we provide a translation for the key Figure Then what happens when we want to use this word in normal text spelled with a lowercase first letter We could use T X s functions to turn the translation into lowercase but that would be wrong with the German translation Abbildung which is always spelled with a capital letter 3 Plurals may also cause problems If we know the translation for Figure that does not mean that we know the translation for Figures which is Abbildungen in German Because of these problems there are many keys for the single concept of figures Figure figure Figures and figures The first key is used for translations of figure when used in a headline in singular The last key is used for translations of figure when used in normal text in plural A key may contain spaces so Table of figures is a permissible key Keys are normally English texts whose English translation is the same as the key but this need not be the case Theoretically a key could be anything However since the key is used as a last fallback when no translation whatsoever is available a key should be readable by itself 25 2 2 Language Names
387. s the top The default which is 0 5 is in the middle Note that you must give real IAT X colors here This often makes it necessary to invoke the command usebeamercolor before this command can be used Also note that the width of the sidebar should be setup before this option is used Example A stylish but not very useful shading usebeamercolor palette primary setbeamertemplate sidebar canvas vertical shading top palette primary bg middle white bottom palette primary bg e horizontal shading color options installs a horizontally shaded background The following color options may be given left color specifies the color at the left of the sidebar right color specifies the color at the right of the sidebar middle color specifies the color in the middle of the sidebar midpoint factor specifies at which point of the sidebar the middle color is used A factor of 0 is the left of the sidebar a factor of 1 is the right The default which is 0 5 is in the middle Example Adds two pillars setbeamersize sidebar width left 0 5cm sidebar width right 0 5cm usebeamercolor sidebar setbeamertemplate sidebar canvas left horizontal shading 67 left white middle sidebar bg right white setbeamertemplate sidebar canvas right horizontal shading left white middle sidebar bg right white Beamer Template sidebar canvas right Works exactly as for the left side 8 2 3 Naviga
388. s way the viewer application will hyperjump to the first of the frames specified by the zoomed overlay specification For the slides to which this overlay specification applies the following happens The exact same area as the one specified before is zoomed out to fill the whole normal text area of the frame Everything else including the sidebars the headlines and footlines and even the frame title retain their normal size The zooming is performed in such a way that the whole specified area is completely 108 shown The aspect ratio is kept correct and the zoomed area will possibly show more than just the specified area if the aspect ratio of this area and the aspect ratio of the available text area do not agree Behind the whole text area which contains the zoomed area a big invisible Back button is put Thus clicking anywhere on the text area will jump back to the original unzoomed picture You can specify several zoom areas for a single frame In this case you should specify different zoomed overlay specification but you can specify the same button overlay specification You cannot nest zoomings in the sense that you cannot have a zoom button on a slide that is in some zoomed overlay specification However you can have overlapping and even nested button overlay specification When clicking on an area that belongs to several buttons the one given last will win it should hence be the smallest one If you
389. satisfy these conditions can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects Tf the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly you should put the first ones listed as many as fit reasonably on the actual cover and continue the rest onto adjacent pages If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100 you must either include a machine readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer network location from which the general network using public has access to download using public standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document free of added material If you use the latter option you must take reasonably prudent steps when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy directly or through your agents or retailers of that edition to the public It is requested but not required that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document 7 3 5 Modifications You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this L
390. se end 128 beamerarticle package 204 section in sidebar sidebar subsection in subsubsection in beamerboxesrounded environment 124 beamerbutton 104 beamercolorbox environment 122 beamerdefaultoverlayspecification 89 beamerfoils package 228 beamergotobutton 105 beamerprosper package 220 beamerreturnbutton 105 beamerseminar package 225 beamerskipbutton 105 beamertexpower package 230 beaver color theme 180 beetle color theme 177 Bergen presentation theme 146 Berkeley presentation theme 151 Berlin presentation theme 153 bibitem 102 bibliography entry author template color font 102 bibliography entry location template color font 102 bibliography entry note template color font 102 bibliography entry title template color font 102 bibliography item template color font 102 bigger class option 194 block environment 116 block alerted begin template 117 block alerted end template 117 block begin template 116 block body color font 117 block body alerted color font 117 block body example color font 118 block end template 117 block example begin template 117 block example end template 117 block title color font 117 block title alerted color font 117 block title example color font 118 blocks parent template 116 blue 227 bm 229 bmstyle 229 Boadilla presentation theme 146 boldequation environment 229 boxedsteps 231 boxes presentation theme 145
391. section icon will jump to the first slide of the section clicking on the right side will jump to the last slide of the section 5 Clicking on the left side of the presentation icon will jump to the first slide clicking on the right side will jump to the last slide of the presentation However this does not include the appendix 6 Clicking on the left side of the appendix icon will jump to the first slide of the appendix clicking on the right side will jump to the last slide of the appendix 7 If supported by the viewer application clicking on the back and forward symbols jumps to the previously visited slides 8 If supported by the viewer application clicking on the search icon pops up a window that allows you to enter a search string If found the viewer application will jump to this string You can reduce the number of icons that are shown or their layout by adjusting the navigation symbols template Beamer Template Color Font navigation symbols This template is invoked in three star mode by themes at the place where the navigation symbols should be shown Three star mode means that the command usebeamertemplate is used Note that although it may look like the symbols are part of the footline they are more often part of an invisible right sidebar The following template options are predefined e default Organizes the navigation symbols horizontally e horizontal This is an alias for the default e ver
392. send us solutions they develop We would also like to encourage users to help in translating solutions to languages other than English and German If you have written a solution or a translation please feel free to send it to us make sure however that it contains about the same amount of explanations and justifications as do the existing solutions The following list of solution templates is sorted by the length of the talks for which they provide a template As always the solutions can be found in the directory beamer solutions Solution Template short talks speaker_introduction ornate 2min e Introducing another speaker e Talk length is about 2min e Ornate style PRESEN TpX version available in languages de en and fr TATION Solution Template generic talks generic ornate 15min 45min e Generic solution template for talks on any subject e Talk length is between 15min and 45min e Ornate style PRESEN T X version available in languages de en and fr TATION Solution Template conference talks conference ornate 20min e Talk at a conference colloquium e Talk length is about 20 minutes e Ornate style PRESEN T X version available in languages de en and fr TATION 42 7 Licenses and Copyright 7 1 Which License Applies Different parts of the BEAMER package are distributed under different licenses 1 The code of the package is dual license This means that you can decide which license you wish to use when usi
393. setbeameroption previous slide on second screen location This option causes the second screen to show the previous slide that was typeset unless this is overruled by a frame with the typeset second option set The idea is that if you have two projectors you can always present the last two slides simultaneously and talk about them Using this option will switch off the updating of external files like the table of contents 213 Part V Howtos This part contains explanations of how to do things commonly known as howtos These explanations are not really part of the BEAMER core Rather they explain how to use BEAMER to achieve a certain effect or how get something special done The first howto is about tricky uncovering situations The second howto explains how you can import parts or presentations created using some other TFX presentation class like PROSPER The third and final howto talks about TRANSLATOR a package BEAMER uses for translating simple strings 214 23 How To Uncover Things Piecewise 23 1 Uncovering an Enumeration Piecewise A common usage of overlays is to show a list of points in an enumeration in a piecewise fashion The easiest and most flexible way to do this is the following begin itemize item lt 1 gt First point item lt 2 gt Second point item lt 3 gt Third point end itemize The advantage of this approach is that you retain total control over the order in which items ar
394. sing this command it will be closed before the next frame is started The dimension is ignored rotatefoilhead dimension frame title This command has exactly the same effect as foilhead endfoil This is a command that is not available in FOILS In BEAMER it can be used to end a frame that has automatically been opened using foildhead This command must be given before the end of the document if the last frame was opened using foildhead begin boldequation environment contents end boldequation This is mapped to the equation or the equation environment with boldmath switched on FoilTeX Typesets the foil TFX name as in the FOILS package bm texrt Implemented as in the FOILS package bmstyle texrt more text Implemented as in the FOILS package The following additional theorem like environments are predefined e Theorem e Lemma e Corollary e Proposition and e Definitionx For example the first is defined using newtheorem Theorem Theorem The following commands are parsed by BEAMER but have no effect e leftheader rightheader e leftfooter rightfooter Restriction and e marginpar 229 24 4 TpXPower The package beamertexpower maps a subset of the commands of the TEXPOWER package due to Stephan Lehmke to BEAMER This subset is currently rather small so a lot of adaptions may be necessary Note that TEXPOWER is not a full class by itself b
395. so installed Note that the effect of this template will persist until the end of the bibliography item or until one of the following templates undo the effect By default this template does nothing The default color is the structure color Beamer Template Color Font bibliography entry title This template is inserted before the title of a bibliography entry more precisely it is inserted after the first occurrence of the newblock command By default this template starts a new paragraph causing a line break The default color is the normal text color Beamer Template Color Font bibliography entry location This template is inserted before the journal of a bibliography entry the second newblock By default this template starts a new paragraph The default color is a slightly transparent version of the structure color Beamer Template Color Font bibliography entry note This template is inserted before any note text at the end of a bibliography entry it is inserted before the third newblock By default this template starts a new paragraph The default color is the same as for the journal bibitem lt overlay specification gt citation text 14 label name The citation text is inserted into the text when the item is cited using cite label name in the main presentation text For a BEAMER presentation this should usually be as long as possible Use newblock commands to separate the authors s names the title the bo
396. sounds that persist for a longer time 138 2 You cannot play two movies at the same time The PDF specification introduces special sound objects which are treated quite differently from movie objects You can create a sound object using the command sound which is somewhat similar to movie There also exists a Ahyperlinksound command which is similar to hyperlinkmovie While it is conceptually better to use sound for sounds there are a number of things to consider before using it e Several sounds can be played at the same time In particular it is possible to play a general sound in parallel to a hopefully silent movie e A sound playback can persist after the current page is closed though it need not e The data of a sound file can be completely embedded in a PDF file obliterating the need to carry around other files e The sound objects do not work together with dvips and ps2pdf They only work with pdflatex e There is much less control over what part of a sound should be played In particular no control bar is shown and you can specify neither the start time nor the duration e A bug in some versions of the Acrobat Reader makes it necessary to provide very exact details on the encoding of the sound file You have to provide the sampling rate the number of channels mono or stereo the number of bits per sample and the sample encoding method raw signed Alaw or plaw If you do not know this data or provide it
397. source version ending tar gz or zip of the BEAMER package from http bitbucket org rivanvx beamer most likely you have already done this Next you also need the PGF package and the XCOLOR packages which you need to install separately see their installation instructions The package contains a bunch of files beamer cls is one of these files and happens to be the most important one You now need to put these files in an appropriate texmf tree When you ask TEX to use a certain class or package it usually looks for the necessary files in so called texmf trees These trees are simply huge directories that contain these files By default T X looks for files in three different texmf trees e The root texmf tree which is usually located at usr share texmf usr local texlive texmf c texmf or c texlive texmf e The local texmf tree which is usually located at usr local share texmf usr local texlive texmf local c localtexmf or c texlive texmf local e Your personal texmf tree which is usually located in your home directory at texmf or Library texmf You should install the packages either in the local tree or in your personal tree depending on whether you have write access to the local tree Installation in the root tree can cause problems since an update of the whole T X installation will replace this whole tree Inside whatever texmf directory you have chosen create the sub sub sub directory texmf
398. specifying colors or fonts for specific elements of a presentation like say the font used for the numbers in an enumeration The fourth part talks about handouts and lecture notes so called support material You will frequently have create some kind of support material to give to your audience during the talk or after it and this part will explain how to do it using the same source that you created your presentation from The last part contains howtos which are explanations of how to get certain things done using BEAMER This user s guide contains descriptions of all public commands environments and concepts defined by the BEAMER class The following examples show how things are documented As a general rule red text is defined green text is optional blue text indicates special mode considerations somebeamercommand optional arguments 14 first argument H second argument Here you will find the explanation of what the command somebeamercommand does The green argument s is optional The command of this example takes two parameters Example somebeamercommand opt my arg xxx begin somebeamerenvironment optional arguments 14 first argument environment contents 10 end somebeamerenvironment Here you will find the explanation of the effect of the environment somebeamerenvironment As with commands the green arguments are optional Example begin somebeamerenvironment Argument Some text
399. stitute 92 insertlogo 73 insertnavigation width 64 insertnote 200 insertpagenumber 64 insertpart 97 244 insertpartendpage 65 insertpartheadnumber 69 insertpartnumber 97 insertpartromannumber 97 insertpartstartpage 65 insertpresentationendpage 65 insertpresentationstartpage 65 insertreturnsymbol 105 insertsection 64 insertsectionendpage 65 insertsectionhead 69 insertsectionheadnumber 69 insertsectionnavigation 64 insertsectionnavigationhorizontal 64 insertsectionnavigationsymbol 72 insertsectionstartpage 65 insertshortauthor 64 insertshortdate 64 insertshortinstitute 65 insertshortpart 65 insertshortsubtitle 65 insertshorttitle 65 insertskipsymbol 105 insertslideintonotes 200 insertslidenavigationsymbol 72 insertsubenumlabel 112 insertsubsection 65 insertsubsectionendpage 65 insertsubsectionhead 70 insertsubsectionheadnumber 70 insertsubsectionnavigation 65 insertsubsectionnavigationhorizontal 65 insertsubsectionnavigationsymbol 72 insertsubsectionstartpage 65 insertsubsubenumlabel 113 insertsubsubsection 65 insertsubsubsectionhead 71 insertsubsubsectionheadnumber 71 insertsubtitle 92 inserttheoremaddition 121 inserttheoremblockenv 121 inserttheoremheadfont 121 inserttheoremname 121 inserttheoremnumber 121 inserttheorempunctuation 121 inserttitle 92 inserttitlegraphic 92 inserttocsection 94 inserttocsectionnum
400. stuff Let s include files mode lt all1 gt includefa include b mode Back to star mode end document And a tex and likewise b tex mode section First section Extra text in article version begin frame Some text end frame mode lt all gt 210 22 Taking Advantage of Multiple Screens This section describes options provided by BEAMER for taking advantage of computers that have more than one video output and can display different outputs on them For such systems one video output can be attached to a projector and the main presentation is shown there The second video output is attached to a small extra monitor or is just shown on the display of the computer and shows for example special notes for you Alternatively the two outputs might be attached to two different projectors One can then show the main presentation on the first projection and say the table of contents on the second Or the second projection might show a version translated into a different language Or the seoncd projection might always show the previous slide Or we are sure you can think of further useful things The basic idea behind BEAMER s support of two video outputs is the following Using special options you can ask BEAMER to create a PDF file in which the pages are unusually wide or high By default their height will still be 128mm but their width will be 192mm twice the usual default 96mm These superw
401. subsection 96 239 AtEndNote 201 author 93 babel package 16 background template color font 75 background canvas template color font 75 Beamer colors abstract 127 abstract title 127 alerted text 115 background 75 background canvas 75 bibliography entry author 102 bibliography entry location 102 bibliography entry note 102 bibliography entry title 102 bibliography item 102 block body 117 block body alerted 117 block body example 118 block title 117 block title alerted 117 block title example 118 button 105 button border 105 caption 124 caption name 125 description item 114 item 112 mini template 113 subitem 112 subsubitem 113 example text 188 footline 65 footnote 129 footnote mark 129 framesubtitle 74 frametitle 73 frametitle continuation 59 headline 63 item 114 item projected 114 itemize item 111 itemize subitem 111 itemize subsubitem 111 local structure 115 logo 73 lower separation line foot 189 lower separation line head 189 math text 187 math text displayed 187 math text inlined 187 enumerate enumerate enumerate enumerate middle separation line foot 189 middle separation line head 189 mini frame 69 navigation symbols 72 normal text 188 normal text in math text 187 note page 200 page number in head foot 66 palette primary 188 palette quaternary 188 palette secondary 188 palette sidebar primary 188 palette sidebar quaternary 18
402. suppressed Example begin beamerboxesrounded upper block head lower block body shadow true Theorem A B end beamerboxesrounded ARTICLE This environment is not available in article mode 12 6 Figures and Tables You can use the standard ATEX environments figure and table much the same way you would normally use them However any placement specification will be ignored Figures and tables are immediately inserted where the environments start If there are too many of them to fit on the frame you must manually split them among additional frames or use the allowframebreaks option Example begin frame begin figure pgfuseimage myfigure caption This caption is placed below the figure end figure begin figure caption This caption is placed above the figure pgfuseimage myotherfigure end figure end frame Beamer Template Color Font caption This template is used to render the caption The following template options are predefined e default typesets the caption name a word like Figure or Abbildung or Table depending on whether a table or figure is typeset and depending on the currently installed language before the caption text No number is printed since these make little sense in a normal presentation e numbered adds the figure or table number to the caption Use this option only if your audience has a printed handout or printed lecture notes that follow the same numberin
403. symbols at the bottom seem to be clickable Toying around with them for a while he finds that clicking on the arrows left or right of a symbol hyperjumps him backward or forward one slide frame subsection section He finds the symbols quite small but decides not to write an email to BEAMER s authors since he also thinks that bigger symbols would be distracting 3 6 The Table of Contents The next frame contains a table of contents begin frame frametitle Outline tableofcontents end frame Furthermore this frame has an individual title Outline A comment in the frame says that Euclid might wish to try to add the pausesections option He tries this changing the frame to begin frame frametitle Outline tableofcontents pausesections end frame After re pdfTpxXing the presentation he finds that instead of a single slide there are now two table of contents slides in the presentation On the first of these only the first section is shown on the second both sections are shown scanning down in the file Euclid finds that indeed there are section commands introducing these sections The effect of the pausesections seems to be that one can talk about the first section before the second one is shown Then Euclid can press the down or right key to show the complete table of contents and can talk about the second section 3 7 Sections and Subsections The next commands Euclid finds are section Motivation
404. t are before is and before the second the Bad breaks are before either alphabet and before larger Text and numbers in figures should have the same size as normal text Illegible numbers on axes usually ruin a chart and its message 35 5 1 4 Interactive Elements Ideally during a presentation you would like to present your slides in a perfectly linear fashion presumably by pressing the page down key once for each slide However there are different reasons why you might have to deviate from this linear order Your presentation may contain different levels of detail that may or may not be skipped or expanded depending on the audience s reaction You are asked questions and wish to show supplementary slides You present a complicated picture and you have to zoom out different parts to explain details You are asked questions about an earlier slide which forces you to find and then jump to that slide You cannot really prepare against the last kind of questions In this case you can use the navigation bars and symbols to find the slide you are interested in see 8 2 3 Concerning the first three kinds of deviations there are several things you can do to prepare planned detours or planned short cuts 5 2 You can add skip buttons When such a button is pressed you jump over a well defined part of your talk Skip button have two advantages over just pressing the forward key is
405. t important item We want to alert lt gt highlight this and alert lt gt this item What is the alert lt gt matrix end itemize 91 10 Structuring a Presentation The Static Global Structure This section lists the commands that are used for structuring a presentation globally using commands like section or part These commands are used to create a static structure meaning that the resulting presen tation is normally presented one slide after the other in the order the slides occur Section 11 explains which commands can be used to create the interactive structure For the interactive structure you must interact with the presentation program typically by clicking on hyperlinks to advance the presentation 10 1 Adding a Title Page You can use the titlepage command to insert a title page into a frame By default it will arrange the following elements on the title page the document title the authors names their affiliation a title graphic and a date titlepage Inserts the text of a title page into the current frame Example frame titlepage Example frame plain titlepage for a titlepage that fills the whole frame Beamer Template Color Font title page This template is invoked when the titlepage command is used The following template options are predefined e default alignment The title page is typeset showing the title followed by the author his or her affiliation the date and
406. t comes a line reading mode lt presentation gt which Euclid does not understand Since he finds more stuff in the file that he does not understand he decides to ignore all of that for time being hoping that it all serves some good purpose 3 3 Title Material The next thing that seems logical is the place where the title command is used Naturally he replaces it with title There Is No Largest Prime Number since this was the title of the paper He sees that the command title also takes an optional short argument in square brackets which is shown in places where there is little space but he decides that the title is short enough by itself Euclid next adjusts the author and date fields as follows author Euclid of Alexandria date ISPN 80 27th International Symposium of Prime Numbers For the date he felt that the name was a little long so a short version is given ISPN 80 On second thought Euclid decides to add his email address and replaces the author field as follows author Euclid Euclid of Alexandria texttt euclid alexandria edu Somehow Euclid does not like the fact that there is no email command in BEAMER He decides to write an email to BEAMER s author asking him to fix this but postpones this for later when the presentation is finished There are two fields that Euclid does not know but whose meaning he can guess subtitle and institute He adjusts them Euclid does not need to use
407. t in a transparent way By default this means that 85 of the background color is mixed into all colors or that the opaqueness of the text is 15 You can specify a different percentage where 0 means totally transparent and 100 means totally opaque Unfortunately this value is kind of specific to every projector What looks good on your screen need not look good during a presentation dynamic Makes all covered text quite transparent but in a dynamic way The longer it will take till the text is uncovered the stronger the transparency highly dynamic Has the same effect as dynamic but the effect is stronger still covered not yet list specifies how to render covered items that have not yet been uncovered The not yet list should be a list of opaqueness commands see the description of that command below Example setbeamercovered still covered opaqueness lt 1 gt 15 opaqueness lt 2 gt 10 opaqueness lt 3 gt 5 opaqueness lt 4 gt 2 again covered opaqueness lt 1 gt 15 again covered once more list specifies how to render covered items that have once more been covered that is that had been shown before but are now covered again opaqueness lt overlay specification gt percentage of opaqueness The overlay specification specifies on which slides covered text should have which percentage of opaqueness Unlike other overlay specifications this overlay specification is a
408. t page of the current subsection e insertsubsectionendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the current subsection e insertsectionstartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the current section e insertsectionendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the current section e insertpartstartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the current part e insertpartendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the current part e insertpresentationstartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the presentation e insertpresentationendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the presentation excluding the appendix e insertappendixstartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the appendix If there is no appendix this number is the last page of the document e insertappendixendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the appendix If there is no appendix this number is the last page of the document e insertdocumentstartpage Inserts 1 e insertdocumentendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the document including the appendix Beamer Template Color Font footline This template behaves exactly the same way as the headline Note that sometimes quite annoyingly BEAMER currently adds a space of 4pt between the bottom of the frame s text and the top of the footline The following template options are predefined e default The default i
409. t the license if you copy modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it either copied verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front matter section of the Document that deals ex clusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document s overall subject or to related matters and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject Thus if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters or of legal commercial philosophical ethical or political position regarding them The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated as being those of Invariant Sections in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed as Front Cover Texts or Back Cover Texts in the n
410. t the width of the sidebar to Opt it is not shown giving you a layout in which the frame title does not wobble since it always occupies the same amount of space on all slides Conversely if you set the height of the frame title rectangle to Opt the rectangular area is not used and the frame title is inserted normally occupying as much space as needed on each slide The background color of the sidebar is taken from sidebar the background color of the frame title from frametitle and the background color of the logo corner from logo 164 The colors of the entries in the table of contents are drawn from the BEAMER color section in sidebar and section in sidebar current as well as the corresponding BEAMER colors for subsections If an entry does not fit on a single line it is automatically linebroken The following options may be given height dimension specifies the height of the frame title rectangle Tf it is set to Opt no frame title rectangle is created Instead the frame title is inserted normally into the frame The default is 2 5 base line heights of the frame title font Thus there is about enough space for a two line frame title plus a one line subtitle hideothersubsections causes all subsections except those of the current section to be suppressed in the table of contents This is useful if you have lots of subsections hideallsubsections causes all subsections to be suppressed in the table of contents left
411. tage of this approach is that you have to know TFX in order to use BEAMER The advantage is that if you know IXI X you can use your knowledge of ATFX also when creating a presentation not only when writing papers 1 1 Main Features The list of features supported by BEAMER is quite long unfortunately so is presumably the list of bugs supported by BEAMER The most important features in our opinion are e You can use BEAMER with pdflatex latex dvips lualatex and xelatex latex dvipdfm isn t sup ported but we accept patches e The standard commands of ATX still work A tableofcontents will still create a table of contents section is still used to create structure and itemize still creates a list e You can easily create overlays and dynamic effects e Themes allow you to change the appearance of your presentation to suit your purposes e The themes are designed to be usable in practice they are not just for show You will not find such nonsense as a green body text on a picture of a green meadow e The layout the colors and the fonts used in a presentation can easily be changed globally but you still also have control over the most minute detail e A special style file allows you to use the LXT X source of a presentation directly in other IXT X classes like article or book This makes it easy to create presentations out of lecture notes or lecture notes out of presentations e The final output is typically a PDF file
412. te 69 mini frames parent template 68 miniframes outer theme 163 mode 208 209 monarca color theme 179 Montpellier presentation theme 150 movie 133 msc package 18 multiinclude 137 multimedia package 133 musixtex package 18 MyLogo 228 navigation symbols template color font 72 newcommand 85 245 newenvironment 86 newtheorem 119 newtranslation 234 noamssymb class option 120 noamsthm class option 120 nonboxedsteps 231 normal text color font 188 normal text in math text color 187 note 199 note page template color font 200 notes environment 224 notheorems class option 120 only 80 onlyenv environment 83 onlyInPDF 224 onlyInPS 224 OnlySlide 222 onlySlide 222 onslide 80 opaqueness 190 orchid color theme 181 Outer themes default 162 infolines 162 miniframes 163 shadow 165 sidebar 164 smoothbars 163 smoothtree 166 split 165 tree 166 overlay 226 overlayarea environment 84 overlays 222 overprint environment 84 Packages professional font package 19 AlDraTex 16 alltt 16 amsthm 16 babel 16 beamerarticle 204 beamerfoils 228 beamerprosper 220 beamerseminar 225 beamertexpower 230 CJK 16 color 16 colortbl 16 deluxetable 16 DraTex 17 enumerate 17 fontenc 17 fourier 17 HA prosper 17 hyperref 17 inputenc 17 listings 18 msc 18 multimedia 133 musixtex 18 pdfpages 18 pstricks 19 texpower 19 textpos
413. te that the user can still change the color of every element individually simply by overriding the color s of the elements in the headline In a sense the palette colors are just a suggestion how things should be colored by an outer theme In detail the following palette colors are used by outer themes 187 Beamer Color palette primary Outer themes should base the color of navigational elements and possibly also of other elements on the four palette colors The primary palette should be used for the most important navigational elements which are usually the ones that change most often and hence require the most attention by the audience The secondary and tertiary are less important the quaternary one is the least important By default the palette colors do not have a background and the foreground ranges from structure fg to black For the sidebar there is an extra set of palette colors see palette sidebar primary Beamer Color palette secondary See palette primary Beamer Color palette tertiary See palette primary Beamer Color palette quaternary See palette primary Beamer Color palette sidebar primary Similar to palette primary only outer themes should base the colors of elements in the sidebar on the four sidebar palette colors Beamer Color palette sidebar secondary See palette sidebar primary Beamer Color palette sidebar tertiary See palette sidebar primary Be
414. tee that your emails will be answered timely or even at all Reporting an issue is usually a better approach as they don t get lost 12 Part I Getting Started This part helps you getting started It starts with an explanation of how to install the class Hopefully this will be very simple with a bit of luck the whole class is already correctly installed You will also find an explanation of special things you should consider when using certain other packages Next a short tutorial is given that explains most of the features that you ll need in a typical presentation Following the tutorial you will find a possible workflow for creating a presentation Following this workflow may help you avoid problems later on This part includes a guidelines sections Following these guidelines can help you create good presentations no guarantees though This guideline section is kept as general as possible most of what is said in that section applies to presentations in general independent of whether they have been created using BEAMER or not At the end of this part you will find a summary of the solutions templates that come with BEAMER You can use solutions templates to kick start the creation of your presentation 13 2 Installation There are different ways of installing the BEAMER class depending on your installation and needs When installing the class you may have to install some other packages as well as described below Before inst
415. ter begin falign A amp BM uncover lt 2 gt k C uncover lt 3 gt amp D end align Unfortunately this does not work in the presence of tags so it works for the align environment What happens is that the tag of the last line is shown on all slides The problem here is that the tag is created when is encountered or when end align is encountered In the last line these are already behind the uncover To solve this problem you can add an empty line without a tag and then insert a negative vertical skip to undo the last line begin falign A amp BM uncover lt 2 gt k C uncover lt 3 gt x D notag end align vskip 1 5em 23 5 Uncovering a Table Rowwise When you wish to uncover a table line by line you will run into all sorts of problems if there are vertical and horizontal lines in the table The reason is that the first vertical line at the left end is drawn before the line is even read and thus in particular before any onslide command can be read However placing a pause or uncover at the end of the line before is also not helpful since it will then suppress the horizontal line below the last uncovered line A possible way to solve this problem is not to use either horizontal or vertical lines Instead coloring the lines using the colortbl package is a good alternative to structure the table Here is an optically pleasing example where the table is uncovered line wise r
416. tex latex beamer and place all files of the package in this directory Finally you need to rebuild T X s filename database This is done by running the command texhash or mktexlsr they are the same In MiKT X package manager and T X Live tlmgr there is a menu option to do this For a more detailed explanation of the standard installation process of packages you might wish to consult http www ctan org installationadvice However note that the BEAMER package does not come with a ins file simply skip that part 2 4 Updating the Installation To update your installation from a previous version simply replace everything in the directory texmf tex latex beamer with the files of the new version The easiest way to do this is to first delete the old version and then to proceed as described above Note that if you have two versions installed one in texmf and other in texmf local directory TEX distribu tion will prefer one in texmf local directory This generally allows you to update packages manually without administrator privileges 2 5 Testing the Installation To test your installation copy the file generic ornate 15min 45min en tex from the directory beamer solutions generic talks to some place where you usually create presentations Then run the command pdflatex several times on the file and check whether the resulting PDF file looks correct If so you are all set 15 2 6 Compatibility with Other Packages and Classes
417. that the black component is not specified hsb hsb tuple sets the structure foreground to the specified hue saturation brightness tuple The numbers are given as decimals between 0 and 1 For example hsb 0 1 5 yields a dark red named color name sets the structure foreground to a named color This color must pre viously have been defined using the DefineNamedColor command Adding the class option xcolor dvipsnames or xcolor svgnames will install a long list of standard dvips or SVG color names respectively See the file dvipsnam def for the list rtheme sidebartab Example There Is No There Is No estes Prive ugestPime There Is No Largest Prime Number Number Euklid Results Proof ot the Main Number 5 ae The proof uses reductio ad absurdum ukli There Is No Largest Prime Number Results With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem z There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics y University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem 175 This theme changes the colors in a sidebar such that the current entry in a table of contents shown there gets highlighted by showing a different background behind it 17 1 2 Complete Color Themes A complete color theme is a color theme th
418. the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be dis tributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or 44 b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsubsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for maki
419. the duration of a slide transition is entire separate from the type of transition which takes place Most notably to cancel an existing auto advance you need to use Example transduration possibly with an overlay specification 142 Part III Changing the Way Things Look BEAMER offers ways to change the appearance of a presentation at all levels of detail On the top level themes can be used to globally change the appearance conveniently On the bottom level templates allow you to specify the appearance of every minute detail individually Two important aspects of the appearance of a presentation are treated in extra sections colors and fonts Here too color and font themes can be used to globally change the colors or fonts used in a presentation while you can still change the color or font of say block titles independently of everything else 143 15 Themes 15 1 Five Flavors of Themes Themes make it easy to change the appearance of a presentation The BEAMER class uses five different kinds of themes Presentation Themes Conceptually a presentation theme dictates for every single detail of a presentation what it looks like Thus choosing a particular presentation theme will setup for say the numbers in enumeration what color they have what color their background has what font is used to render them whether a circle or ball or rectangle or whatever is drawn behind them and so forth Thus when you choose a presenta
420. the numbers on little squares e ball Projects the numbers onto little balls Beamer Template Color Font enumerate item This template governs how the number in front of a first level item is typeset The level here refers to the level of enumeration nesting only Thus an enumerate inside an itemize is a first level enumerate but it uses the second level itemize enumerate body When the template is inserted the BEAMER font and color enumerate item are installed The following command is useful for this template e insertenumlabel inserts the current number of the top level enumeration as an Arabic number This insert is also available in the next two templates Beamer Template Color Font enumerate subitem Like enumerate item only for second level items e insertsubenumlabel inserts the current number of the second level enumeration as an Arabic number Example setbeamertemplatefenumerate subitem insertenumlabel insertsubenumlabel 112 Beamer Template Color Font enumerate subsubitem Like enumerate item only for third level items e insertsubsubenumlabel inserts the current number of the second level enumeration as an Arabic number Beamer Template Color Font enumerate mini template This template is used to typeset the number that arises from a mini template e insertenumlabel inserts the current number rendered by this mini template For example if the mini template is i and this command is us
421. the title A background color of the subtitle is ignored The alignment is passed on to the beamercolorbox environment In particular useful options are left center and right As a special case the right option causes the left border of the frame title to be somewhat larger than normal so that the frame title is more in the middle of the frame shadow theme This option is available if the outer theme shadow is loaded It draws the frame title on top of a horizontal shading between the background colors of frametitle and frametitle right A subtitle is if present also put on this bar Below the bar a shadow is drawn sidebar theme This option is available if the outer theme sidebar is loaded and if the headline height is not set to Opt which can be done using an option of the sidebar theme With this option the frame title is put inside a rectangular area that is part of the headline some negative space is used to raise the frame title into this area The background of the color frametitle is not used this is the job of the headline template in this case smoothbars theme This option is available if the outer theme smoothbars is loaded It typesets the frame title on a colored bar with the background color of frametitle The top and bottom of the bar smoothly blend over to backgrounds above and below smoothtree theme Like smoothbars theme only for the smoothtree theme The following commands are useful for this templ
422. ther height Summing up the font size has little to do with the actual size of letters Rather these days it is a convention that 10pt or 11pt is the size a font should be printed for normal reading Fonts are designed so that they can optimally be read at these sizes In a presentation the classical font sizes obviously lose their meaning Nobody could read a projected text if it were actually 11pt Instead the projected letters need to be several centimetres high Thus it does not really make sense to specify font sizes for presentations in the usual way Instead you should try to think of the number of lines that will fit on a slide if you were to fill the whole slide with line by line text you are never going to do that in practice though Depending on how far your audience is removed from the projection and on how large the projection is between 10 and 20 lines should fit on each slide The less lines the more readable your text will be In BEAMER the default sizes of the fonts are chosen in a way that makes it difficult to fit too much onto a slide Also it will ensure that your slides are readable even under bad conditions like a large room and only a small projection area However you may wish to enlarge or shrink the fonts a bit if you know this to be more appropriate in your presentation environment Once the size of the normal text is settled all other sizes are usually defined relative to that size For this reas
423. thors deftranslation options key translation This command defines the translation no matter what An existing translation will be overwritten This command should typically used by document authors to install their preferred translations Example deftranslation to German figure Figur 234 Here is an example where a translation is provided by a document author documentclass ngerman article usepackage babel usepackage some package that uses translator deftranslation to German Sketch of proof Beweisskizze begin document end document 25 3 3 Creating and Using Dictionaries Two kind of people will create dictionaries First package authors will create dictionaries containing translations for the new keys used in the package Second document authors can create their own private dictionaries that overrule settings from other dictionaries or that provide missing translations There is not only one dictionary per language Rather many different dictionaries may be used by TRANS LATOR when it tries to find a translation This makes it easy to add new translations Instead of having to change TRANSLATOR s main dictionaries which involves among other things the release of a new version of the translator package package authors can just add a new dictionary containing just the keys needed for the package Dictionaries are named according to the following rule The name of the dictionary must
424. tical Organizes the navigation symbols vertically e only frame symbol Shows only the navigational symbol for navigating frames Example The following command suppresses all navigation symbols setbeamertemplate navigation symbols HF Inside this template the following inserts are useful e insertslidenavigationsymbol Inserts the slide navigation symbols that is the slide symbols a rectangle together with arrows to the left and right that are hyperlinked e insertframenavigationsymbol Inserts the frame navigation symbol e insertsubsectionnavigationsymbol Inserts the subsection navigation symbol e insertsectionnavigationsymbol Inserts the section navigation symbol e insertdocnavigationsymbol Inserts the presentation navigation symbol and if necessary the ap pendix navigation symbol e insertbackfindforwardnavigationsymbol Inserts a back a find and a forward navigation symbol 8 2 5 The Logo To install a logo use the following command Mogot logo texrt The logo text is usually a command for including a graphic but it can be any text The position where the logo is inserted is determined by the current theme you cannot currently specify this position directly Example pgfdeclareimage height 0 5cm logo tu logo logo pgfuseimage logo 72 ARTICLE Example logo includegraphics height 0 5cm logo pdf Currently the effect of this command is just to setup the logo template However a m
425. tice H Include an unaltered copy of this License I Preserve the section Entitled History Preserve its Title and add to it an item stating at least the title year new authors and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page If there is no section Entitled History in the Document create one stating the title year authors and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence J Preserve the network location if any given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on These may be placed in the History section You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission K For any section Entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications Preserve the Title of the section and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and or dedications given therein L Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document unaltered in their text and in their titles Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles M Delete any section Entitled Endorsements Such a section may not be included in t
426. tion Bars Many themes install a headline or a sidebar that shows a navigation bar Although these navigation bars take up quite a bit of space they are often useful for two reasons e They provide the audience with a visual feedback of how much of your talk you have covered and what is yet to come Without such feedback an audience will often puzzle whether something you are currently introducing will be explained in more detail later on or not e You can click on all parts of the navigation bar This will directly jump you to the part you have clicked on This is particularly useful to skip certain parts of your talk and during a question session when you wish to jump back to a particular frame someone has asked about Some navigation bars can be compressed using the following option Xdocumentclass compress beamer Tries to make all navigation bars as small as possible For example all small frame representations in the navigation bars for a single section are shown alongside each other Normally the representations for different subsections are shown in different lines Furthermore section and subsection navigations are compressed into one line Some themes use the Ninsertnavigation to insert a navigation bar into the headline Inside this bar small icons are shown called mini frames that represent the frames of a presentation When you click on such an icon the following happens e Tf you click on the
427. tion name Starts a subsection without an entry in the table of contents No heading is created but the subsection name is shown in the navigation bar except if subsection name is empty In this case neither a table of contents entry nor a navigation bar entry is created but any frames in this empty subsection are shown in the navigation bar Example section Summary frame This frame is not shown in the navigation bar subsection frame This frame is shown in the navigation bar but no subsection entry is shown subsection A subsection frame Normal frame shown in navigation bar The subsection name is also shown in the navigation bar but not in the table of contents subsubsection lt mode specification gt short subsubsection name subsubsection name This command works the like subsection However subsubsections are supported less well than subsec tions For example in the table of contents subsubsections are always shown with the same shading hiding parameters as the subsection We strongly discourage the use of subsubsections in presentations If you do not use them you will give a better presentation Example subsubsection Applications Applications to the Reduction of Pollution Beamer Template Color Font subsubsection in toc Like subsection in toc only for subsection In addition to the inserts for the subsection in toc template the following commands are available for this temp
428. tion theme your presentation will look the way someone the creator of the theme thought that a presentation should look like Presentation themes typically only choose a particular color theme font theme inner theme and outer theme that go well together Color Themes A color theme only dictates which colors are used in a presentation If you have chosen a particular presentation theme and then choose a color theme only the colors of your presentation will change A color theme can specify colors in a very detailed way For example a color theme can specifically change the colors used to render say the border of a button the background of a button and the text on a button Font Themes A font theme dictates which fonts or font attributes are used in a presentation As for colors the font of all text elements used in a presentation can be specified independently Inner Themes An inner theme specifies how certain elements of a presentation are typeset This includes all elements that are at the inside of the frame that is that are not part of the headline footline or sidebars This includes all enumerations itemize environments block environments theorem environments or the table of contents For example an inner theme might specify that in an enumeration the number should be typeset without a dot and that a small circle should be shown behind it The inner theme would not specify what color should be used for the number or the cir
429. tions no Front Cover Texts and no Back Cover Texts A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify the code of the package under the terms of the GNU General Public License Version 2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU General Public License Permission is also granted to distribute and or modify both the documentation and the code under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License either version 1 3c of this license or at your option any later version A copy of the license is included in the section entitled BTEX Project Public License The BEAMER class http bitbucket org rivanvx beamer User Guide for version 3 36 Till Tantau Joseph Wright Vedran Mileti March 8 2015 Contents 1 Introduction Ted Mam Features 4 4 2 42 2 Sa a o o A e E E2 History 40 0 e ee a a E A a L3 Acknowledements tipos ee a A ee e bbe AA ig eee ee 1 4 How to Read this Users Guide Hed Getine Help 5 2 4 O tl ra a e RAEE ce ie Ms GD UPGO SAS Shins oe Getting Started Installation 2 1 Versions and Dependencies ee ee 2 2 Installation of Pre bundled Packages e 221 TEX Live and Mac TEX 2 ta es e e eee ae ee E E 2 2 2 Mik TEX and PrOTEXE u ma 0 O A A A a es A 223 Debian and Ubuntu tes d h M ae a e e A BLA EOL LU AS A
430. to make sure that another BEAMER color is setup correctly before the foreground or background color specification are evaluated Suppose you wish the foreground of items to be a mixture of 50 of the foreground of structural elements and 50 of the normal foreground color You could try setbeamercolor item fg structure fg 50 normal text fg However this will not necessarily give the desired result If the BEAMER color structure changes the normal color structure fg is not immediately updated In order to ensure that the normal color structure fg is correct use the following setbeamercolor item use structure normal text fg structure fg 50 normal text fg This will guarantee that the colors structure fg and normal text fg are setup correctly when the foreground of item is computed To show the difference consider the following example setbeamercolor grandfather fg red setbeamercolor grandmother bg white setbeamercolor father parent grandfather grandmother setbeamercolor mother fg black usebeamercolor father usebeamercolor mother Defines father fg and mother fg globally F setbeamercolor my color A fg father fg 50 mother fg setbeamercolor my color B use father mother fg father fg 50 mother fg usebeamercolor fg my color A dark red text usebeamercolor fg my color B also dark red text 186 setbeamercolor grandfather fg green usebeamercolor fg my color A still dark red te
431. to render the template e circle radius causes circles of the given radius to be used to render the template You can install such a predefined option like this setbeamertemplate some beamer element square Now squares are used setbeamertemplate some beamer element circle 3pt Now a circle is used BEAMER colors are explained in Section 17 Here is the essence To change the foreground of the color to say red use setbeamercolor some beamer element fg red To change the background to say black use setbeamercolor some beamer element bg black You can also change them together using fg red bg black The background will not always be honoured since it is difficult to show a colored background correctly and an extra effort must be made by the templates while the foreground color is usually used automatically BEAMER fonts are explained in Section 18 Here is the essence To change the size of the font to say large use setbeamerfont some beamer element size large In addition to the size you can use things like series bfseries to set the series shape itshape to change the shape family sffamily to change the family and you can use them in conjunction Add a star to the command to first reset the font 11 PRESEN As next to this paragraph you will sometimes find the word PRESENTATION in blue next to some paragraph This TATION means that the paragraph applies only when you normall
432. ty of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem A theme with a strong separation into a navigational upper part and an informational main part By using a different color theme this separation can be lessened Darmstadt is a town in Germany usetheme Frankfurt Example 155 Results There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem A variation on the Darmstadt theme that is slightly less cluttered by leaving out the subsection information Frankfurt is a town in Germany usetheme Singapore Results There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics a University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime
433. u can use larger text for titles However using a larger font does not always have the desired effect Just because a frame title is printed in large letters does not mean that it is read first Indeed have a look at the cover of your favorite magazine Most likely the magazine s name is the typeset in the largest font but your attention will nevertheless first go to the topics advertised on the cover Likewise in the table of contents you are likely to first focus on the entries not on the words Table of Contents Most likely you would not spot a spelling mistake there a friend of mine actually managed to misspell his own name on the cover of his master s thesis and nobody noticed until a year later In essence large text at the top of a page signals unimportant since I know what to expect So instead of using a very large frame title also consider using a normal size frame title that is typeset in bold or in italics 5 6 2 Font Families The other central property of any font is its family Examples of font families are Times or Helvetica or Futura As the name suggests a lot of different fonts can belong to the same family For example Times comes in different sizes there is a bold version of Times an italics version and so on To confuse matters font families like Times are often just called the font Times There are two large classes of font families serif fonts and sans serif fonts A sans serif font is a font in
434. u can use the following command setbeamertemplate element name predefined option args In the simplest case if no predefined option is given the args must be a single argument and the text of the template element name is setup to be this text Upon later invocation of the template by the command usebeamertemplate this text is used Example setbeamertemplate answer correct Your answer is usebeamertemplate answer If you specify a predefined option this command behaves slightly differently In this case someone has used the command defbeamertemplate to predefine a template for you By giving the name of this 169 predefined template as the optional parameter predefined option you cause the template element name to be set to this template Example setbeamertemplate bibliography item book causes the bibliography items to become lit tle book icons This command causes a subsequent call of usebeamertemplate bibliography item to insert the predefined code for inserting a book Some predefined template options take parameters themselves In such a case the parameters are given as args Example The predefined option grid for the template background takes an optional argument setbeamertemplate background grid step 1cm In the example the second argument in square brackets is the optional argument In the descriptions of elements if there are possible predefined option the description sh
435. u might wish to include an abstract e If you include an abstract be sure that it is not some long text but just a very short message e Never ever reuse a paper abstract for a presentation except if the abstract is We show P NP or We show P 4 NP e If your abstract is one of the above two double check whether your proof is correct Numbered Theorems and Definitions A common way of globally structuring math articles and books is to use consecutively numbered definitions and theorems Unfortunately for presentations the situation is a bit more complicated and we would like to discourage using numbered theorems in presentations The audience has no chance of remembering these numbers Never say things like now by Theorem 2 5 that I showed you earlier we have It would be much better to refer to say Kummer s Theorem instead of Theorem 2 5 If Theorem 2 5 is some obscure theorem that does not have its own name unlike Kummer s Theorem or Main Theorem or Second Main Theorem or Key Lemma then the audience will have forgotten about it anyway by the time you refer to it again In our opinion the only situation in which numbered theorems make sense in a presentation is in a lecture in which the students can read lecture notes in parallel to the lecture where the theorems are numbered in exactly the same way If you do number theorems and definitions number everything consecutively Thus if there are one theorem one l
436. used to typeset the frame to ensure that inside the frame the character codes can be reset The price of switching to another internal mechanism is that either you cannot use overlays or an external file needs to be written and read back which is not always desirable In detail the following happens when this option is given for normal pdf I4T X The contents of the frame is scanned and then written to a special file named jobname vrb or if a label has been assigned to the frame jobname current frame number vrb Then the frame is started anew and the content of this file is read back Since upon reading of a file the character codes can be modified this allows you to use both verbatim text and overlays To determine the end of the frame the following rule is used The first occurence of a single line containing exactly end frame environment name ends the frame The environment name is normally frame but it can be changed using the environment option This special rule is needed since the frame contents is after all not interpreted when it is gathered 60 You can also add the optional information singleslide This tells BEAMER that the frame contains only a single slide In this case the frame contents is not written to a special file but interpreted directly which is faster and cleaner environment frame environment name This option is useful only in conjunction with the fragile option but it is not used for
437. usedictionary chess newcommand MoveKnight 2 translate knight Now we create dictionaries like the following This is chess German dict ProvidesDictionary chess German providetranslation chess Schach providetranslation knight Springer providetranslation bishop L aufer and This is chess English dict ProvidesDictionary chess English providetranslation chess chass providetranslation knight knight providetranslation bishop bishop Here are a few things to note e The package chess sty does not use the command uselanguage After all the package does not know or care about the language used in the final document It only needs to tell the TRANSLATOR package that it will use the dictionary chess 236 e You may wonder why we need an English dictionary After all the keys themselves are the ultimate fallbacks if no other translation is available The answer to this question is that first of all English should be treated like any other language Second there are some situations in which there is a better English translation than the key itself An example is explained next e The keys we chose may not be optimal What happens if some other package perhaps on medieval archi tecture also needs translations of knights and bishops However in this different context the translations of knight and bishop are totally different namely Ritter and Bischof Thus it might be a good id
438. ut a package that needs another class like seminar or prosper to do the actual typesetting It may thus be necessary to additionally load an emulation layer for these also Indeed it might be possible to directly use TEXPOWER inside BEAMER but we have not tried that Perhaps this will be possible in the future Currently the package beamertexpower mostly just maps the stepwise and related commands to appro priate BEAMER commands The pause command need not be mapped since it is directly implemented by BEAMER anyway The workflow for the migration is the following 1 Replace the document class by beamer If the document class is seminar or prosper you can use the above emulation layers that is you can include the files beamerseminar or beamerprosper to emulate the class All notes on what to do for the emulation of SEMINAR or PROSPER also apply here 2 Additionally add usepackage beamertexpower to start the emulation usepackage beamertexpower Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to the TEXPOWER commands having to do with the stepwise command A note on the pause command Both BEAMER and TEXPOWER implement this command and they have the same semantics so there is no need to map this command to anything different in beamertexpower However a difference is that pause can be used almost anywhere in BEAMER whereas it may only be used in non nested situations in TEXPOWER Since BEAMER is only more flexib
439. ut that is what happens basically An important effect of this behavior is that a note page following a frame is shown next to this frame Normally this is exactly what you want and expect However if there are multiple note pages for a single slide only the last one is shown currently This may change in the future so do not rely on this effect Example begin frame First frame end frame note This note is not shown at all currently note This note is shown together with the first frame 201 begin frame Second frame note This note is shown together with the second frame end frame begin frame No note text is shown for this frame end frame If you really need multiple note pages for a single slide you will have to use something more complicated like this begin frame lt 1 3 gt First frame note lt 1 gt First page of notes for this frame note lt 2 gt Second page of notes for this frame note lt 3 gt Third page of notes for this frame end frame setbeameroption show only notes Include only the notes in the output file and suppresses all frames This options is useful for printing them If you specify this command the aux and toc files are not updated So if you add a section and re TEX your presentation this will not be reflected in the navigation bars which you do not see anyway since only notes are output 202 20 Creating Transparencies The main aim of the BEAMER class
440. uthor on the left and the talk s title on the right The colors are taken from palette primary and palette quaternary useoutertheme shadow Example 165 Results Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics A University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number This layout theme extends the split theme by putting a horizontal shading behind the frame title and adding a little shadow at the bottom of the headline useoutertheme options tree Example There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number L Results L Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Number
441. versity of Alexandria E Suppose p were the largest prime number EIA 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 a A Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem A theme based on the inmargin inner theme and the rectangles inner theme Using this theme is not quite trivial since getting the spacing right can be trickier than with most other themes Also this theme goes badly with columns You may wish to consult the remarks on the inmargin inner theme Bergen is a town in Norway It hosted IWPEC 2004 usetheme options Boadilla Example 146 There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem a There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Proof anda Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 1 2 Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 2 2 A theme giving much information in little space The following options may be given e secheader causes a headline to be inserted showing the current section and subsection By default this headline is not shown Th
442. versity of Rijeka and inst 2 Fakult at f ur Elektrotechnik und Informatik Technical University of Berlin ARTICLE The short form is ignored in article mode The long form is also ignored except if the document class like 11ncs defines it date short date date Example date today or date STACS 2003 STACS Conference 2003 ARTICLE The short form is ignored in article mode titlegraphic tezt The text is shown as title graphic Typically a picture environment is used as text Example titlegraphic pgfuseimage titlegraphic ARTICLE The command is ignored in article mode subject texrt Enters the text as the subject text in the PDF document info It currently has no other effect keywords text Enters the text as keywords in the PDF document info It currently has no other effect By default the title and author commands will also insert their arguments into a resulting PDF file in the document information fields This may cause problems if you use complicated things like boxes as arguments to these commands In this case you might wish to switch off the automatic generation of these entries using the following class option documentclass usepdftitle false beamer Suppresses the automatic generation of title and author entries in the PDF document information 93 10 2 Adding Sections and Subsections You can structure your text using the commands section and subsection Unlike standard TEX
443. vips the poster is still shown but clicking it has no effect and no sound is embedded in any way Example sound autostart samplingrate 22050 applause au The following options may be given e autostart Causes the sound to start playing immediately when the page is shown e automute Causes all sounds to be muted when the current page is left e bitspersample 8 or 16 Specifies the number of bits per sample in the sound file If this number is 16 this option need not be specified e channels 1 or 2 Specifies whether the sound is mono or stereo If the sound is mono this option need not be specified e depth T X dimension Overrides the depth of the sound poster text box and sets it to the given dimension 139 encoding method Specifies the encoding method which may be Raw Signed muLaw or ALaw If the method is muLaw this option need not be specified height T X dimension Overrides the height of the sound poster text box and sets it to the given dimension inlinesound causes the sound data to be stored directly in the PDF file label sound label Assigns a label to the sound such that it can later be referenced by the command hyperlinksound which can be used to start a sound The sound label is not a normal label loop or repeat Causes the sound to start again when the end has been reached mixsound true or false If set to true the sound is played in addition to any sound that is alre
444. w the section title normally the second will show it in a semi transparent way and the third will completely suppress it You can also omit the second style in which case the first is used for all sections this is not really useful e subsectionstyle style for current subsection style for other subsections in current section style for subsections in other sections specifies how subsections should be displayed The same styles as for the sectionstyle option may be given You can omit the last style in which case the second also applies to the last and you can omit the last two in which case the first applies to all Example subsectionstyle shaded causes all subsections to be shaded Example subsectionstyle hide causes all subsections to be hidden Example subsectionstyle show shaded causes all subsections but the current subsection in the current section to be shown in a semi transparent way Example subsectionstyle show show hide causes all subsections outside the current section to be suppressed Example subsectionstyle show shaded hide causes all subsections outside the current section to be suppressed and only the current subsection in the current section to be highlighted e subsubsectionstyle style for current subsubsection style for other subsubsections in current subsection style for subsubsections in other subsections in current section style for subsubsections in other subsections in other sections specif
445. white background it may be useful to write the following in your preamble mode lt handout gt setbeamercolor background canvas bg black 5 This will cause the slides of the handout version to have a very light gray background This makes it easy to discern the slides border if several slides are put on one page 31 5 Guidelines for Creating Presentations In this section we sketch the guidelines that we try to stick to when we create presentations These guidelines either arise out of experience out of common sense or out of recommendations by other people or books These rules are certainly not intended as commandments that if not followed will result in catastrophe The central rule of typography also applies to creating presentations Every rule can be broken but no rule may be ignored 5 1 Structuring a Presentation 5 1 1 Know the Time Constraints When you start to create a presentation the very first thing you should worry about is the amount of time you have for your presentation Depending on the occasion this can be anything between 2 minutes and two hours e A simple rule for the number of frames is that you should have at most one frame per minute e In most situations you will have less time for your presentation that you would like e Do not try to squeeze more into a presentation than time allows for No matter how important some detail seems to you it is better to leave it out but get the main message across
446. wing the document and the movie will start to play The movie will use a rectangular area whose size is determined either by the width and height options or by the size of the poster text The poster text can be any T X text for example it might be a pgfuseimage command or an includegraphics command or a pgfpicture environment or just plain text The poster text is typeset in a box the box is inserted into the normal text and the movie rectangle is put exactly over this box Thus if the poster text is an image from the movie this image will be shown until the movie is started when it will be exactly replaced by the movie itself However there is also a different sometimes better way of creating a poster image namely by using the poster option as explained later on The aspect ratio of the movie will not be corrected automatically if the dimension of the poster text box does not have the same aspect ratio Most movies have an aspect ratio of 4 3 or 16 9 Despite the name a movie may consist only of sound with no images In this case the poster text might be a symbol representing the sound There is also a different dedicated command for including sounds in a PDF file see the sound command in Section 14 2 Unless further options are given the movie will start only when the user clicks on it Whether the viewer application can actually display the movie depends on the application and the version For example the Acrobat
447. wo are not really tokens but they are recognized anyway Once one of these commands is encountered the gobbling stops and the command is executed However all of these commands restore the mode that was in effect when they started Thus once the command is finished TX returns to its gobbling Normally mode is exactly what you want T X to do outside of frames ignore everything except for the above mentioned commands outside frames in presentation mode However there are cases in which you have to use the second flavor of the mode command instead If you have verbatim text that contains one of the commands if you have very long text outside frames or if you wish some text outside a frame like a definition to be executed also in presentation mode The class option ignorenonframetext will switch on modex at the beginning of the document Example begin document mode This text is not shown in the presentation begin frame This text is shown both in article and presentation mode end frame this text is not shown in the presentation again section This command also has effect in presentation mode Back to article stuff again frame lt presentation gt this frame is shown only in the presentation end document Example The following example shows how you can include other files in a main file The contents of a main tex documentclass ignorenonframetext beamer begin document This is star mode
448. wslide command is used in a slide or similarly slide environment that contains an overlay you must replace it by a closing end slide and an opening begin slide Next for each slide or slide environment that contains an overlay you must place a frame environment around it You can remove the slide environment and hence effectively replace it by frame unless you use the accumulated option 224 8 If you use section or subsection commands inside slides you will have to move them outside the frames It may then be necessary to add a frametitle command to the slide 9 If you use pdfATEX to typeset the presentation you cannot include PostScript files You should convert them to pdf or to png and adjust any usage of includegraphics accordingly 10 When starting to change things you can use all of BEAMER s commands and even mix them with SEMINAR commands An example can be found in the file beamerexample seminar tex There are unfortunately numerous places where you may run into problems e The whole note management of seminar is so different from beamer s that you will have to edit notes by hand In particular commands like ifslidesonly and ifslide may not do exactly what you expect e If you use pstricks commands you will either have to stick to using latex and dvips or will have to work around them using for example pgf Porting lots of pstricks code is bound to be difficult if you wish to switch ove
449. xplicitly say so in the preamble if notes should be included in your presentation You can use the following BEAMER options for this setbeameroptionfhide notes Notes are not shown This is the default in a presentation setbeameroption show notes Include notes in the output file Normal slides are also included and the note pages are interleaved with them setbeameroption show notes on second screen location When this option is given a two screen version of your talk is created see Section 22 for further details The second screen which is displayed on the right by default shows your notes By specifying a different location you can also place the second screen on the left bottom or top Example documentclass beamer usepackage pgfpages setbeameroption show notes on second screen begin document begin frame A frame note This is shown on the right end frame end document In detail the following happens The presentation is typeset normally and shown on the main screen or to be precise on pgfpages s logical page number zero The second screen logical screen number one is initialized to be empty Whenever a note page is to be typeset either because a frame contained note commands or because the frame was followed by a note command the note page is normally typeset Then the note page is put on the second screen Then the whole page is shipped out The exact details are bit more complex b
450. xt The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every subsection If the special star text parameter is specified this text will be used for starred subsections instead Different calls of this command will not add up the given texts Example AtBeginSubsection Do nothing for subsection begin frame lt beamer gt frametitle Outline tableofcontents currentsection currentsubsection end frame AtBeginSubsubsection special star text text Like AtBeginSubsection only for subsubsections BEAMER also provides sectionpage and subsectionpage commands which are used to fill a frame with section or subsection number and title in a stylish way They are very similar to partpage command described below Example section A section frame sectionpage frame Some text If you enable TRANSLATOR as described in Section 25 3 1 you will also get translated strings for Section Subsection and others 10 3 Adding Parts If you give a long talk like a lecture you may wish to break up your talk into several parts Each such part acts like a little talk of its own with its own table of contents its own navigation bars and so on Inside one part the sections and subsections of the other parts are not shown at all To create a new part use the part command All sections and subsections following this command will be local to that part Like the section and subsection
451. xt usebeamercolor fg my color B now dark green text 17 3 The Color of Mathematical Text By default mathematical text does not have any special color it just inherits the surrounding color Some people prefer mathematical text to have some special color Though we do not recommend this we believe mathematical text should not stand out amid the normal text BEAMER makes it reasonably easy to change the color of mathematical text Simply change the following colors Beamer Color math text This color is the parent of math text inlined and math text displayed It is empty by default See those colors for details Beamer Color math text inlined Color parents math text If the foreground of this color is set inlined mathematical text is typeset using this color This is done via some everymath hackery and may not work in all cases If not you ll have to try to find a way around the problem The background is currently ignored Beamer Color math text displayed Color parents math text Like math text inlined only for so called displayed mathematical text This is mathematical text between and or between and or inside environments like equation or align The setup of this color is somewhat fragile use at your own risk The background is currently ignored Beamer Color normal text in math text If the foreground of this color is set normal text inside mathematical text which is introduced using the t
452. y Specifications Environments can also be equipped with overlay specifications For most of the predefined environments see Section 12 3 adding an overlay specification causes the whole environment to be uncovered only on the specified slides This is useful for showing things incrementally as in the following example begin frame frametitle A Theorem on Infinite Sets begin theorem lt 1 gt There exists an infinite set end theorem begin proof lt 3 gt This follows from the axiom of infinity end proof beginfexample lt 2 gt The set of natural numbers is infinite end example end frame In the example the first slide only contains the theorem on the second slide an example is added and on the third slide the proof is also shown For each of the basic commands only alt visible uncover and invisible there exists envi ronment versions onlyenv altenv visibleenv uncoverenv and invisibleenv Except for altenv and onlyenv these environments do the same as the commands beginfonlyenv lt overlay specification gt environment contents end onlyenv If the overlay specification is given the contents of the environment is inserted into the text only on the specified slides The difference to on1y is that the text is actually typeset inside a box that is then thrown away whereas only immediately throws away its contents If the text is not typesettable the onlyenv may produce an
453. y specification at any point where you would usually use a number If a sign is encountered it is replaced by the current value of the AXTpx counter beamerpauses which is 1 at the beginning of the frame Then the counter is increased by 1 though it is only increased once for every overlay specification even if the specification contains multiple signs they are replaced by the same number In the above example the first specification is replaced by lt 1 gt Then the second is replaced by lt 2 gt and so forth We can now easily insert new entries without having to change anything else We might also write the following begin itemize item lt alert gt Apple item lt alert gt Peach item lt alert gt Plum item lt alert gt Orange end itemize This will alert the current item when it is uncovered For example the first specification lt alert gt is replaced by lt 1 alert 1 gt the second is replaced by lt 2 alert 2 gt and so on Since the itemize environ ment also allows you to specify a default overlay specification see the documentation of that environment the above example can be written even more economically as follows begin itemize lt alert gt item Apple item Peach item Plum item Orange end itemize The pause command also updates the counter beamerpauses You can change this counter yourself using the normal ATEX commands setcounter or addtocounter
454. y specification is present it throws away its parameter on slides that are not mentioned Overlay specifications can only be written behind certain commands not every command Which commands you can use and which effects this will have is explained in the next section However it is quite easy to redefine an existing command such that it becomes overlay specification aware see also Section 9 3 The syntax of basic overlay specifications is the following They are comma separated lists of slides and ranges Ranges are specified like this 2 5 which means slide two through to five The start or the end of a range can be omitted For example 3 means slides three four five and so on and 5 means the same as 1 5 A complicated example is 3 6 8 10 12 15 which selects the slides 1 2 3 6 7 8 10 12 13 14 and 15 9 3 Commands with Overlay Specifications Important Due to the way overlay specifications are implemented the commands documented here are all fragile even if the ATEX 2e kernel versions are not 79 For the following commands adding an overlay specification causes the command to be simply ignored on slides that are not included in the specification textbf textit textsl textrm textsf color alert structure If a command takes several arguments like color the specification should directly follow the command as in the following example but there are exceptions to this rule begin frame
455. y such that the shrunk text once more fills the entire frame If however the percentage is not enough the text will be shrunk as needed and you will be punished with a warning message The best way to use this option is to identify frames that are overly full but in which all text absolutely has to be fit on a single frame Then start specifying first shrink 5 then shrink 10 and so on until no warning is issued any more or just ignore the warning when things look satisfactory Using this option is very evil It will result in changes of the font size from slide to slide which is a typographic nightmare Its usage can always be avoided by restructuring and simplifying frames which will result in a better presentation Example begin frame shrink 5 Some evil endless slide that is 5 too large end frame e squeeze causes all vertical spaces in the text to be squeezed together as much as possible Currently this just causes the vertical space in enumerations or itemizations to be reduced to zero Using this option is not good but also not evil ARTICLE In article mode the frame environment does not create any visual reference to the original frame no frame is drawn Rather the frame text is inserted into the normal text To change this you can modify the templates frame begin and frame end see below To suppress a frame in article mode you can for example specify lt presentation gt as overlay specification Beamer T
456. y typeset your presentation using ATEX or pdflAT RX ARTICLE Opposed to this a paragraph with ARTICLE next to it describes some behavior that is special for the article mode This special mode is used to create lecture notes out of a presentation the two can coexist in one file 1 5 Getting Help When you need help with BEAMER please do the following l 2 Read the user guide at least the part that has to do with your problem If that does not solve the problem try searching TeX sx tex stackexchange com Perhaps someone has already reported a similar problem and someone has found a solution If you find no answers there or if you are sure you have found a bug in BEAMER please report it via bitbucket org rivanvx beamer issues Before you file a bug report especially a bug report concerning the installation make sure that this is really a bug In particular have a look at the log file that results when you TEX your files This log file should show that all the right files are loaded from the right directories Nearly all installation problems can be resolved by looking at the 1og file If you can before reporting the bug retest using latest version of BEAMER with latest version of TeX Live This can help isolate bugs from other packages that might affect BEAMER As a last resort you can try emailing authors We do not mind getting emails we simply get way too many of them Because of this we cannot guaran

Beamer User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents